Home

Screenwriter™ - Screenplay.com Support

1. Turn Revision Color Off Turns your color selection off displaying any new text you add as normal Remove Current Revision Marks Removes all current revision marks from the script Strikeout Codes and or Text Removes all Strikeout Text or just the Strikeout Codes leaving the text intact Red Highlights Removes red highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal Blue Highlights Removes blue highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal Green Highlights Removes green highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal User Defined Color Highlights Removes User Defined highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal All or Some Script Notes Select this item to go to a menu where you can select which script notes to remove i e delete from the script this definition is taken from the Help menu SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR All OMITTED Scene Headings All OMITTED Scene Headings will cause any following scenes to be renumbered as if those omitted scenes had NEVER existed Scene Heading w o OMITTED Removes the Scene Heading that the cursor is in without creating an OMITTED Scene Heading to indicate something was deleted May cause Scene Headings after the one removed to be renumbered Locked Page Break Removes a Locked forced page break if it s immediately before or after the element the cursor s in Override Page s Header Draft Color Allows
2. 117 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 118 your partner s computer allowing your partner to view the script even though it still resides in your computer Once you click on the Show Partner button it will change to Showing Partner to indicate that your partner is viewing your Script At this point you are considered in Master view since the script is on your computer and you control the editing and the viewing of the script When your partner is showing you a script the Show Partner button will change to View Partner to indicate that you are viewing your partner s script Since at this point you can only view the script and cannot edit without the Master s permission you are considered in Slave view Editing in Slave view Normally in Slave view you are unable to have any control over what part of the script you are viewing or make changes in it However it is possible for the Master to grant you permission to edit the script While you can edit the script it is important to realize you are viewing a script on another s computer You will not be able to use any of your menu commands function key s or quick entry features such as pop up lists of Character Name s This feature is mainly for the purpose of editing or rewriting existing text in a collaborative type of environment If the Slave needs to do major rewriting it would probably be better to use the send script feature so they can have ful
3. Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks If checked SmartCheck accepts blank lines with Revision Marks as correct Unchecked it treats such blank lines as Completely Blank Elements see above Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT match If checked treats the same Character Name speaking twice in a row as correct when their Extensions differ such as V O and O S Unchecked it flags this as an error Combine OMITTEDs that are Widowed on page If checked SmartCheck finds any page that contains only an OMITTED scene and prompts you to combine that OMITTED with any OMITTEDs that precede or follow it Unchecked the page prints with only an OMITTED scene on it SmartCheck Prompts If you select Yes to fix an error SmartCheck has prompted you about it fixes the error and continue to check your script If you select No it asks you whether YOU want to fix it If you reply Yes it pauses at the format error to allow you to fix it If you reply No it ignores the error and continues checking If you select Cancel it stops the SmartCheck scan If SmartCheck was run automatically before a print job printing begins Otherwise you ll be returned to your script When SmartCheck completes a manual scan it informs you with a dialog box When it finishes an automatic scan before printing it starts printing without any further message Spelling Correct Double Capitals e g MIstake If ch
4. Restore the Main Window s Size If you make Movie Magic Screenwriter less than full screen and then exit it the next time it starts it can either automatically become full screen or it can restore its previous size amp position e With this option enabled then it will restore the program s main window s size and position to whatever it was last displaying when it was exited e With this option NOT enabled it will ALWAYS start in full screen display 139 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 140 Re register File Type Associations Click this button if Windows forgets that a file with the appropriate extension for a script is a Movie Magic Screenwriter script and or Double Clicking a script file in Windows explorer does NOT run Movie Magic Screenwriter Clicking this button will re register the appropriate File Type Associations to fix this problem SmartCheck Page You should always have your script proofread before sending it out to be read preferably by someone else At the very least run SmartCheck before printing your script SmartCheck scans your script for the following common formatting errors e An element that starts with a single blank space a common typing error e Completely blank elements e Character Names with no dialogue e A Character with two speeches in a row with no intervening text such as an Action element Any errors found are displayed onscreen for your attention or if you prefe
5. Under the Production Menu select Breakdown Tagging then Untag All Items A warning screen prompts you to confirm your choice which can t be undone Type YES to Untag all items Cancel to exit without making changes 185 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 186 Edit Breakdown Categories If you use different Breakdown Categories than the ones Screenwriter supplies or would like to add ones of your own design use the Edit Categories feature Under the Production Menu select Breakdown Tagging then Edit Categories A Breakdown Sheets Edit screen displays The categories displayed are the defaults for exporting to Movie Magic Scheduling 3 User Definable categories are available for your new categories or you can edit an existing category Cast Members and Scene Description cannot be edited Grayed out categories are Hidden and do not display on the pop up Tagging menu To Hide or Show a category select it by clicking on it and click on the Hide Show Selected Category button Double click on a Category to select it for editing An Edit screen displays Double click on the Category in the Category Name window to select it and type in your new Category name Type an ampersand amp before the letter you d like to appear underlined and selectable as the one key QuickLetter on menus Tab to the Display Code as window and type in an unique abbreviation up to 6 letters that displays as the category s Format Code in Taggin
6. 1 Under the File Menu select New 2 Under the Format Menu select Load Script Format then Multimedia You now have access to all the Multimedia features and elements The speed buttons on the Right SpeedBar change to reflect the fact that you re writing a multimedia script With a Multimedia script open pressing Enter in a blank line displays this menu Select an Element Type x Create Branch Point P Create New Branch Target 5 x Cancel Help User Activity Wizard Clicking on this button displays the User Activity Wizard This feature handholds you through the creation of User Activities with examples for each question If you are ina User Activity element when you select this option the Wizard first parses this activity and then sets its options to reflect the current choices The editing of existing User Activities is made easier User Activity Wizard x Does the User have a choice to do something example If User opens the door then C Does the User have a choice to do something but this choice is contingent on he or she already having done or learned something Example if the user learned about the secret passageway then they ll have the choice if User opens secret passageway then but if they don t know about the passageway then they don t have this choice C Are we checking to see if the user has already done something example Has the user already talked to the King of th
7. Allows text to be replaced by Typeover instead of the default Insertion method Unchecked Screenwriter stays in permanent Insert mode If 131 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 132 checked you can switch back and forth between the two modes by clicking on the Insert Typeover button on the Bottom Status Bar Undo Levels Allows Screenwriter to undo up to the last 20 text editing changes If you are low on memory limit Undo levels to less than the default 10 Entering 0 disallows Undo altogether Enable Alt Keys for Character Name Entry If checked pressing the le key and a letter key enters a Character Name with that first letter such as 2 J 4 for Henry Unchecked pressing the J key and a letter key drops down a Main Menu Bar menu such as J for the Help Menu An either or choice with a default of unchecked Allow any name to be selected for any Alt Key This feature is a sub feature of Enable Alt Keys for Character Name Entry With this option enabled when you press lt ENTER gt immediately following entry of a character name using an le KEY then ALL the names in the script will pop up allowing you to select ANY name for assignment to that ALT key regardless of the initial letter Selecting Bold Italics or Underline turns off Block If checked selected text will not remain highlighted after Bold Italics or Underline formatting has been performed Unchecked selected text remains hi
8. How should Interpret This Text Import Text in Script Format Import Text as Action Only VY Tet Only adan RTR JV Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text use when line spacing in the source textis inconsistant though it can cause shots to be imported as Character Names F Dontuse Capitalization Information for Element identification use when Character Names may be lower case in the source text F Ignore Margins for Element identification P Action is in Parenthenticals F Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks use ONLY when the scriptis already in Production and the page breaks have to match x Cancel Help To import a script file Import in Script Format should be checked To import an outline or some other non script text check Import Text as Action Only Text Only Non RTF Checking this CheckBox if available imports the file slightly faster and may improve the accuracy of the import It also loses any bold italic or underline formatting Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Causes Screenwriter to normalize inconsistent line spacing and margins In most cases this produces the most accurate import However it may cause Shots to be misinterpreted as Character Names Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification Some word processors lose Capitalization Information when exporting files Checking this box tells Sc
9. If checked prints an alphabetical list of all Scene Locations in the script Production Breakdowns If checked displays the Production Breakdown Print Menu when you click on the OK or Fax buttons See the Production Breakdown Print Menu section below Script Notes If checked prints all Script Notes with the page numbers they appear on When you click on the OK button a Script Notes Print menu displays Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Prints a separate Script Notes report of all notes listed in sequence with the page numbers they refer to Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed script Prints each Script Note opposite the page it refers to on the back of the previous page Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed Only asks you to insert the page preceding a script note so it can print the note for the following page Requires you to insert pages one at a time Print without Prompting requires you to insert entire script Requires you to insert the entire script including a Title Page Screenwriter only prints on those pages that have a script note on the following page Select Which Color Notes to Print If you have more than one color of script note in your script check the colored boxes for the notes you want to print Asterisked Pages If checked prints only those pages which have Current Revision Marks on them and any A Pages immediately following them 102
10. Move the cursor to the place you want the text you ve cut to appear and click there The cut text appears after the cursor position If you select any text in the new position the cut text replaces it e Under the Edit Menu select Paste Copying and Pasting with the Mouse e Select the text to be moved Under the Edit Menu select Copy Move the cursor to the place you want the text you ve copied to appear and click there The copied text appears after the cursor position If you select any text in the new position the copied text replaces it e Under the Edit Menu select Paste Cutting Copying Pasting with the Keyboard There are two competing standards used to Cut Copy Paste text in Windows programs Some use foro to cut c 9 to copy and J to paste Others use c J X to cut c 0 to copy and cJ V to paste This is the Screenwriter default equivalent to the 2 Command keys in Apple Macintosh software You can choose between these editing key schemes Under the File Menu select Program Options then the Keyboard button Check the appropriate radio button under Cut and Paste Quick Keys are Dragging and Dropping 1 Move the cursor to the start of the text you want to move 82 SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING 2 Highlight the text to move using your preferred selection method 3 Using the Mouse move the cursor anywhere over the selected text and press the Left Mouse Button down Hold it do
11. Table Draft Players EQ gt um 4 Edit a Pronunciation As the script is being read an arrow will appear to the left of the element that is being read Edit a Pronunciation Clicking this button brings up the Edit Pronunciation window Here you can edit the way voices will say a word See the picture above that illustrates the look of this window Change a Voice Clicking this button displays the Setup Voices window where you can assign the voice to a particular element iPartner This feature allows two people to view and edit the same script over the Internet When this feature is activated it displays the following window Each computer that is connected to the internet has an IP Address which is used by the other computers to know where to send messages Your computer s IP Address is 206 000 000 000 For your computer to be able to communicate with your partner s either 1 he or she needs to enter Enter Partner s IP in your IP address or 2 you need to enter Let Partner do it his or her P Address Which do you wantto do __Troubie shocting Connect on Port 2200 Cancel n2 Enter Partner s IP If you click this button another window will appear allowing you to enter your partner s IP address Let Partner do it If you click this button screenwriter takes you straight to the iPartner window Selecting this option leaves the responsibility for naming IP addresses t
12. You can also nest IF THEN statements i e put one if then statement within another The angle brackets automatically reflect the nesting level to make it easier to read We could rewrite the preceding Dungeon segment as follows 1 DUNGEON The dungeon is cold and damp Dangerous looking fungus grows from the dank walls encrusted with centuries of lime deposit There are two open cells visible The main corridor of the dungeon continues to the right vanishing behind the second cell gt IF YOU LOOK IN FIRST CELL THEN YOU lt LOOKED IN FIRST CELL gt AND The bones of a hapless prisoner lie where they fell from rusty manacles on the wall There is nothing else in the cell OTHERWISE You walk by the first cell without glancing in lt ENDIF gt IF YOU LOOK IN SECOND CELL THEN Straw is strewn on the floor Nothing else is visible 69 70 MOVIE MAGIC gt gt IF YOU lt LOOKED IN FIRST CELL gt THEN YOU lt NOTICED TRAP gt AND You notice that the door seems to be rigged to spring shut if anyone enters lt lt ENDIF gt gt IF YOU ENTER SECOND CELL THEN The door slams behind you and locks A lunatic s LAUGHTER surrounds you gt gt gt IF YOU lt NOTICED TRAP gt THEN Kal DISEMBODIED VOICE You aren t terribly bright are you 22AOTHERWISE DISEMBODIED VOICE I ve got you now
13. if you select card 5 then card 12 then card 8 and insert them before card 3 the new shuffled order will be cards 1 2 5 12 8 and then 3 4 etc Printing Index Cards To print your Index Cards click the Print button on the bottom SpeedBar You ll be taken to the following menu Setup Index Card Printing 3 x2 H C 5x 3 Landscape FH C 5x3 Laser 3 4x 2 Sparco 1099 C Define Your Own Options Portrait V Draw Boxes Y Bold HeadLines Top Btm Margins 0 50 inches Lft Rght Margins 0 50 inches Inter Card Margins 0 25 inches I Save as the default Layout The three large page icons across the top of the screen are pre defined layouts designed to be used with pre cut card stock Index Cards Select one by clicking on its icon or radio button The layout at the top right of the screen 3 3 4 x 2 1 2 is the default layout and the one that prints the perforated index cards supplied with Screenwriter Create a new layout by clicking on the Define Your Own button Choose Portrait or Landscape and enter the number of cards Across and Down for your page 32 SCREENWRITER INDEX CARDS Several other settings are available Draw Boxes Prints a box around each Index Card Recommended if you are not printing onto pre cut card stock for example if printing onto plain copy paper Bold Headlines Prints the Scene Heading Line of each card in boldface P
14. 104 e Print as Production Sides 2 copies per page Production Sides should not be confused with sides which are sections of scripts used for casting and which are generated by selecting the Dialogue option When you select this option then each page of your selection will be printed reduced in size and duplicated twice on a page so that you can then assemble and cut the pages in half and get two small copies of the script If you have Blocked Text when you choose this option it will typically print all non blocked text on a page in a grayed box with a big X across it settings for this option are found on the Printing Page of the Program Options Menu Run SmartCheck before this Print Job If checked SmartCheck checks your script for common formatting errors before printing If you ve set SmartCheck to always run before printing in Program Options under the File Menu it is checked here Turn it off for this print job only by unchecking the box Number of Copies Enter the number of copies of your print selection to print Acceptable values are between 1 and 99 Print Title Page If checked prints the title page at the head of the script Only available if you ve created a Title Page in the Title Page Publisher Selecting an Entire Script to print automatically checks this box and prints the Title Page Preview Click this button to see a Print Preview of the current selection in WYSIWYG format Click on
15. 3 INT HELMER S STUDY NIGHT INORA Then I vas certain that you would step forward and take all the blame on yourself and say I am the one who is 1 INT HELMER S STUDY NIGHT HELMER and NORA stand in the center of the study INORA Oh Torvald it hurts me terribly to have to say it because you ve always been so kind to me But I can t help it I don t love you any longer HELMER And you feel quite sure about this too HELMER Nora Nora walks to the large doll house and runs her hand along the tiny roof then turns to Helmer INORA Yes absolutely sure That s why I can t go on living here any longer Helmer turns from Nora barely able to 4 EXT HOUSE NIGHT B INT HELMER S STUDY SAME TIME Cold sleet slashes against the side of Nora pauses for a moment staring out house and runs down the window the window Then as if she has collected her thoughts NORA Controlling her emotions with 6 INT HALLWAY SAME TIME INora moves down the hall and disappears into her room INORA Torvald it was then it dawned upon me that for eight years I had heen living here with a strange man and had born him three children Oh I can t bear to think of it I could tear myself into little bits HFLMFR faadivi T see T see n shvu a 8 INT HELMER S STUDY MORNING INORA No 9 INT HELMER S STUDY MORNING HELMER Let me help you if you
16. 96 Current Variables 75 currently displayed script 18 Customer Service 92 Customizing Screenwriter 131 Cut 209 Cut z Paste importing 197 Cut amp Paste Quick Keys are 148 Cut and Paste 81 206 Cut and Paste Exporting 206 Cut and Paste Import 199 Cut to 20 62 Cut to 210 Cutting and Pasting with the Mouse 82 os Copying Pasting with the Keyboard Cybill 244 cybill scw 244 SCREENWRITER D Darken Courier New 105 147 Date 97 Date 98 DAY 62 Days Of Our Lives 244 Default to having PRINT SIGNATURE PAGE checked 108 Default User Lists 61 default watermark text 107 Default 640 242 Default 800 242 Delete 127 210 230 Delete a Block 83 Delete Block Button 83 Delete Left 83 Delete Left Word 83 148 Delete Right 83 Delete to End of Line 83 148 Delete Voice 125 227 Delete WITHOUT prompting 140 Delete Word 83 92 148 252 Delete Words 216 Deleting Text 83 Deletion Keys 148 de select 80 De Selecting Text 81 Dialogue 30 44 101 157 Dialogue 42 50 102 135 Dialogue Capitalization 109 190 Dialogue Cue 101 Dialogue Locking 223 Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts 102 189 Dialogue Numbering 223 dialogue numbers 109 191 Dialogue Spacing 109 190 Dialogue With Cues for Actors 101 Dialogue With Reference Page Numbers and Statistics 101 Dialogue 135 Dictedit exe 242 250 Direct Import 197 Disa
17. Allow 144 Allow any name to be selected for any Alt Key 132 Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses 144 Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line 163 Allow Swear Words in Thesaurus 144 Allow Transition as 1st Line on Page 162 Allow Transition on CONTINUED line 163 Allow Typeover 16 131 Allow Viewing Printing without Password Allow Words that are five or more letters long to extend 1 or 2 letters beyond the norma right hand margin 156 Alphabetically User List Order 134 Alt Ctrl Keys 148 alternative font for onscreen display only 133 Alt Key Character Names 43 Alt Keys 43 Always Compress PrintScript Files 106 147 Always Open in Script Directory 207 ANGLE BRACKETS 71 ANGLE ON 62 Animation 35 Animation Dialogue 190 Animation format 36 Animation Locking 191 223 Animation Locking 188 189 Animation Locking Setup Numbering Layout 223 Animation Production 36 188 Animation Production Features 223 Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only 102 189 Animation Recording Scripts 108 189 190 A Numbering 191 192 A Page 214 A Pages 102 219 Appendix A Troubleshooting 193 Appendix B Importing Scripts 197 Appendix C Exporting Scripts 204 Appendix D Main Menu Bar 207 Appendix E Command Keys 233 Appendix F Format Codes 239 Appendix G Files Installed 241 Appendix H Utility Programs 247 Apply 124 226 Applying Multiple Text Formats 87 Approximate of Lines o
18. Appendix G FILES INSTALLED dao 240 Screen Writer Files tesis ireren e E E E N 240 Television Templates iva e E E ween bs T EE E Beha EAE EEE AA 244 Appendix H UTILITY PROGRAMS sitas dia dian smear 247 Contig r tion Wizard vta A AS kee as Tees Tab ete 247 Top SpeedBar Editor sscsucssesdisssabeteseagasgest rs e SEE K ES D A TEIE STEES 247 A A A E E E E E 248 User Dichopary EMO ii e ie a a a A EL eS ea el a 250 INDEX Saved et A A Ned A AN O 253 SCREENWRITER BASIC INFORMATION Basic Information Windows Using Movie Magic Screenwriter and this manual assumes a basic familiarity with Microsoft Windows 3 11 Win95 Win98 Windows 2000 or Windows NT Teaching or supporting these operating systems is beyond the scope of this manual For help with Windows go to your Microsoft Windows manual Windows online Help or contact Microsoft Corporation Selecting Screenwriter Commands There is usually more than one way of performing a function in Screenwriter For ease of use this manual shows you how to select commands using the Mouse and the Main Menu Bar As you become more familiar with Screenwriter you many want to use Keyboard Shortcuts and SpeedBar Icons E Movie Magic Screenwriter C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts NONAME 1 SCW E Eile Edit Format Search Goto Spell Production Tools Window Help DEBAN XX BUT S N Action lt a To see what command a SpeedBar Icon represents use the mouse to move the curso
19. Cancel and Help Select a Push Button using any of these methods e Moving to it with the arrow or keys and pressing Enter e Clicking on it with the mouse e Pressing its underlined QuickSelect letter if any from the keyboard Selecting OK always exits a menu accepting all of the current settings Selecting Cancel always cancels a menu without changing anything CheckBoxes An example of a CheckBox displayed as a small box either blank or with a Checkmark in it is shown on the example Print menu above titled Run 14 SCREENWRITER BASIC INFORMATION SmartCheck before this Print Job A CheckBox can be checked or unchecked using one of these methods e Moving to it with the arrow or keys and pressing the Space Bar e Clicking on it with the mouse e Pressing the Underlined QuickSelect Letter from the keyboard in this example r for Run Radio Buttons There are many Radio Buttons displayed as a small circle either blank or with a dot in it on the example Print menu above The first two are Current Page and Forwards Radio Buttons are similar to CheckBoxes except that only one Radio button in any given group may be checked at any one time Text or Numerical Input Fields Text or Numerical Input Fields such as Selected Pages or Number of Copies on the example Print menu allow you to enter text or numbers as appropriate Depending on the particular field spaces may be allowed and text may be automatically capi
20. Loads all User Lists from another Screenwriter script e ASCII List Loads only Character Names or Scene Body Text Locations User Lists from an ASCII text file If there are more items to be loaded than the Screenwriter User List has room for only the first ones in the list load User Lists from an ASCII file must have a separate line for each Item ending with a Hard Return e Collaborator Same as ASCII e Dramatica Same as ASCII e Original Defaults Reloads Screenwriter s originally installed default User Lists At the Load User List from Script screen that displays select the file whose User Lists you want to load Click on Open to load the User Lists If you re loading User Lists from an ASCII file you ll see the following Menu Character Names C Locations sets X Cancel V Clear Qut List First Help Select the User List you want the ASCII file to be loaded into Clear Out List First If checked clears out any pre existing items in the selected User List Unchecked IT adds new items to the bottom of the existing list Click on OK to complete loading your User Lists or Cancel to exit Loading Locations Character Names or Transitions from Screenwriter scripts Frequently a script s Locations Scene Body Text and Character Names are not actually in the User Lists but are accessed from within the script itself To make these items available to another script s User Lists you must f
21. Puts you into a Scene Heading element and inserts INT CuiJ LJ SpellChecks the word preceding the cursor cuiJ 9 If you aren t in a Shot element it puts you into one CriJ CJ Displays a pop up list of all Existing Character Names for your If QuickType is on a pop up list of Initial Shot Text displays for your selection 234 SCREENWRITER COMMAND KEYS If you re already in a Shot then the list of Initial Shot Text displays regardless of the status of QuickType P Pops up the Print Menu R Forces a Repagination of your script crJ SJ If you aren t in a Scene Heading element then it puts you into one If QuickType is on a pop up list of Scene Heading Initial Text displays for your selection If you are in a completely blank Scene Heading it pops up the list of Scene Heading Initial Text regardless of the status of QuickType If you are in a Scene Heading with Scene Heading Initial Text but without a Location a pop up list of all existing Locations displays for your selection If you are in a Scene Heading with Scene Heading Initial Text and a Location a pop up list of Time of Day displays for your selection NOTE If you have checked lt Ctrl S gt saves file rather than Inserts Scene option in Program Options under the File Menu it will not perform the Scene Heading functions described above It performs the same function as the F7 key a PA If you aren
22. Shots Action Transitions Act Information Scene Information Margins in Inches Left 3 7 E Right 1 0 E Left Margin Right Margin Line Spacing in Lines 23 Lines Before fio E Interline 1 0 E distances measured from the left and right edges of the page le All Capitals Bold respectively in units of 1 10ths I Italicized T Underlined of an inch eri COURIER NEW 12PT LINES BEFORE are the number Fedi of lines before the element in units of 1 10ths of a line LEFT 4 RIGHT MARGINS are the I Center Character Names INTERLINE SPACING is the Character Continueds as spacing between lines WITHIN C No Automatic Character Continueds Script Notes the element in Units of 1 10th of i i a line thus pra spaced is 1 0 E Emension E Barenthesical Centered Title double is 2 0 and so on F Only when Extensions Match Continued Separator set style Page Breaks Locked Scripts M Sa for all New Scripts V Allow Words that are five or Cont d Text CONT D more letters long to extend ang 1 or 2 letters beyond the More Cont d CONT D normal right hand margin More Text MORE TF Use Current Font for All Elements C Reset Help Y OK x Cancel Down the right side are buttons for displaying the unique characteristics of individual Elements e Character Names e Dialogue e Parentheticals e Scene Headings e Shots e
23. Wperf60 xtd 243 Wperfect xtd 243 Write an Index Card 29 Writing the Script 39 Wrs32 dll 243 MOVIE MAGIC Wrspack dll 243 WYSIWYG 133 143 WYSIWYG 208 X Xena Princess Warrior 246 xena scw 246 xfiles scw 246 Xtdlink exe 243 Y yng amp rest scw 246 Z Zoom In 100 104 Zoom In and Zoom Out 250 Zoom Out 100 104 Zoom Screen Text 151 SCREENWRITER INDEX Notes INDEX MOVIE MAGIC Notes
24. click on the Apply button Screenwriter exits the SpeedBar Editor and returns to Screenwriter with your preferred SpeedBar loaded Pressing Cancel ignores any SpeedBar changes and returns to Screenwriter Pressing Save As opens the Save As dialog Use this dialog to save your custom SpeedBar layout Pressing Load opens the Open dialog Use this dialog to open a previously saved custom SpeedBar layout Pressing Reset to Default restores Screenwriter s default SpeedBar layout 153 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 154 Script Format Options The script formats supplied with Screenwriter for Screenplay Sitcom I Sitcom 2 Stage Play or Multimedia can be customized to your preference The changes affect the current script or can be saved as a default to affect all new scripts created using that format Formats for the Television Templates can also be changed to reflect the different format of a new TV show for example Rather than change an existing format permanently overwriting it you may want to save it under a different name as a User Defined Format See the chapter named Script Formats for details Change options for specific script formats by using the Edit Script Formats screen Under the Format Menu select Edit Script Formats SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER A screen similar to the following displays Editing Script Formats CHARACTER NAME Dialogue Parentheticals Scene Headings
25. infidel Ha ha ha lt lt lt ENDIF And you re trapped forever dying a slow and painful death by starvation GOTO DEAD 20 EE OTHERWISE You re smarter than you look GOTO HALLWAY 2 lt lt ENDIF lt ENDIF To make a Variable negative use the word NOT or any word ending in N T such as DIDN T or AREN T immediately before a variable You can also define a Variable to be TRUE or FALSE without conditional statements by using the SET statement in an Activity Line gt SET lt MET MARTIAN gt This instruction sets the Variable lt MET MARTIAN gt to TRUE Or gt SET DON T lt HAVE GUN gt This sets the Variable lt HAVE GUN gt to FALSE Activity Syntax Review You can type ANY text into an Activity element as long as 1 The activity starts with IF or SET or is ELSE OTHERWISE or ENDIF SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS 2 The Activity ends in a Period or the word THEN or AND 3 All Variables are enclosed in lt ANGLE BRACKETS gt If the variable is SUPPOSED to be false then it must be preceded by the word NOT or by any word that ends in N T such as DIDN T lt EAT CHEESE gt Writing a Multimedia Script Before you start writing a Multimedia script you need to open a new file and load the Multimedia script format If a script is already open when you load the Multimedia script format it is re formatted as a Multimedia script
26. 1 Select Shuffle Mode if it s not already selected 2 Click on the card you want to move 3 Go to the Index Card you want to move your card in front of using the Scroll buttons if necessary Click on that card and your shuffled Index Card is inserted in front of it All other cards shuffle accordingly The Scenes in the script are not renumbered until you exit Index Card View by pressing the Exit button To go back to your script without moving any Index Cards or scenes in your script click on the Cancel button Shuffle Multiple Index Cards 1 Select Shuffle Mode if it s not already selected 31 INDEX CARDS MOVIE MAGIC 2 To shuffle more than one Index Card make sure the first card is displayed onscreen 3 Hold down the key Using the mouse click anywhere on the Index Card you want to move The card turns a darker gray and the cursor changes to the Shuffle Cursor a hand holding a card 4 Still holding down the key click on the other cards you want to shuffle If you inadvertently select a card that you didn t want to click on it again while still holding down the key and it becomes unselected 5 Go to the Index Card you want to move your cards in front of using the Scroll buttons if necessary Click on that card and your shuffled Index Cards is inserted in front of it All other cards shuffle accordingly The shuffled cards are inserted in the same order they were selected For example
27. 1 to 5 Substitute Font Lets you print the Animation Recording Script using a different font than in the original script Print Script Notes If checked prints Script Notes in the Animation Recording Script with the following options Only Notes before selected Dialogue Prints Script Notes only if they appear directly before a dialogue speech Print Notes directly above Speeches If checked prints Script Notes on the line immediately above the Character Name Unchecked prints according to the line spacing set in Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches Print Boxes around Notes If checked prints Script Notes as they appear in the original script with boxes around them Unchecked no boxes are printed Print lt gt around Numbering lIf checked displays and prints angle brackets around the dialogue numbers to differentiate between them and page numbers scene numbers etc 109 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 110 Production Breakdowns Print Menu Selecting Production Breakdowns on the Print Menu and clicking OK or Fax displays the Production Breakdowns Print Menu which looks like the following Production Breakdowns x Sort Breakdown Primarily by Calculate Eighths by C Script Order C Standard 6 lines 1 8th e Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th Display Eighths Totals by aut C Total of All Rounded Eighths Characters Al Some True Total of All Lines C Movie Magic Scheduling File Mis
28. 172 177 214 Locked Scripts Options 163 172 Locking Current Revision Marks 188 Locking the Header Text 218 log outgoing scripts 106 Lois and Clark 245 INDEX Loop To 2 219 Loop To DOUBLE 219 Loop To SECOND 219 Lowercase 87 237 Lowercase Word 87 Macquarie Concise 215 Mad About You 245 madabyou scw 245 Main Menu Bar 12 Main Menu Bar 15 Make Selection When you Release the Right Mouse Button 149 Manual Overrides 196 224 Manual Revision Marks 170 Margins 155 margins 212 Mark Element following Complete Deletion 146 Mark One Character s Dialogue 213 Married With Children 245 Max Length 91 141 Maximize Window 231 Maximized 17 Maximum Lines on Page 162 Melrose Place 245 melrospl scw 245 Memory Available 231 Menu Selection 80 Menus 12 Merging Scripts 20 Mic 229 Minimize All 230 Minimum Action Lines on a Page 162 Minimum Dialogue Lines on a Page 162 Miniseries 35 Miscellaneous Options Page 143 Mm demo scw 77 MOMENTS LATER 62 More Cont d 157 More Text 157 MORNING 62 Mouse Blocking 81 Mouse Page 149 Mouse Selection 80 Mouse Selects Text by Whole Words 81 149 Move Mouse Cursor to Menu Default Button 149 Movement Keys 148 INDEX Movie Magic Budgeting 184 Movie Magic PrintScript 241 Movie Magic Scheduling 184 186 187 221 Movie Magic Scheduling 111 180 Movie Magic Scheduling Export 187 222 Movie Magic Screen
29. Action e Transitions e Act Information e Scene Information e Script Notes e Centered Title and options for e Page Breaks e Locked Scripts Click on a button to display that element s options Options common to all script elements though with different values for each are Margins Left and Right adjustable in units of 1 10th of an inch Line Spacing Lines Before and Interline between lines within an element adjustable in units of 1 10th of a line 155 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC All Capitals Bold Italicized and Underlined text formatting checkboxes A button to select a Font s Typeface Style and Size Justified Justified is a feature that appears in the text formatting section of the following menus Dialogue Parenthetical Action and Script Notes All Capitals J Bold Justified alicia J Underlined Fort Courier New 12pt When this option is enabled all words along the right side of the script will be aligned and even Animation scripts are the only scripts that actually use this format In addition the justified text will not display on screen but will print and display in Print Preview NOTE The Darken Courier New function will not work when justified is selected It will normally print Courier New instead You can find this function by going into the File menu clicking Program Options and then clicking the Printing button Allow Words that are five
30. AutoCapitalize Sentences Capitalizes the first letter in all Sentences in Dialogue Action and Script Notes Except Following Shots Shots also known as secondary Sluglines can be used to emphasize an object or person with the following Action giving more detail To have the combined Shot and Action read as one sentence with the Action sentence not capitalized check this box Auto Space Sentences to Spaces Ensures that every sentence has a consistent number of spaces after the period Set the value from 1 to 9 If you hit the space bar once the program will automatically put the set amount of spaces To prevent auto spacing a particular sentence enter Hard Spaces after the period instead of regular spaces Enter a Hard Space by pressing cr J roce 91 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 92 Treat as a Sentence End in Dialogue for the purposes of Auto Capitalization amp spacing Treats a right parenthesis in Dialogue as a sentence end in order to format the next sentence correctly Foreign Language SpellCheck With the installation of an optional Foreign Language dictionary SpellCheck can check the spelling of words in another language For more information call Customer Service at 818 843 6557 User Dictionaries The User Dictionary Editor allows you to add remove or change words in any of your User Dictionaries It can be selected under Screenwriter s Spell Menu as Edit User Dictionary or run as a st
31. Break For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc Dialogue Cont d Dialogue Shouldn t have Character Select this option to have Movie Magic Screenwriter hide all Character Names to which it applies automatic Cont ds If you have this option selected then these Continued Names will appear in the script in a GRAY color to identify that they will not print and they will be ignored by the pagination routines NOTE The ONLY format in which this is used in the professional world is in play writing and we HIGHLY recommend that you do not use this setting in a screenplay or teleplay Put Dialogue on the same line as Character Names Select this option to have Movie Magic Screenwriter put dialogue on the same line as the Character Names i e Radio Script Style so that it will look like the following MARK True but despite the fact that you read many plays printed in this format it is not the one used in the professional play writing world 157 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 158 NOTE When you are in the Radio Script format QuickType functions a little differently to accommodate the text flow in this format Typing in a known Character Name on a blank action line and then pressing the colon automatically takes you to Dialogue In addition pressing he key following a colon in an action line automatically takes you to Dialogue Parentheticals Outdent Parentheticals If che
32. Ctri lt Up Next Scene Heading Ctrl Alt Down Neta Next Forced Page Break Next Speech by Next Script Note Next Current Revision Mark Next Strikeout or Colored Text Shift F3 Next Hidden Text Last Position Alt Home Bookmark Ctr Alt B Top Takes you to the Top of the script Bottom Takes you to the End of the script Page Takes you to a specific Page Number or Scene Number Scene Displays a Scene Heading list allowing you to select the one to go to Act Scene Info In a Television or Stage Play format script displays an Act Scene list allowing you to select an Act to go to Takes you to that Act s first Scene Heading Previous Scene Heading Takes you to the previous Scene Heading in the script Next Scene Heading Takes you to the next Scene Heading in the script Next A Page Takes you to the next A Page Only available in locked scripts Otherwise it s grayed out Pressing L J 2J repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Forced Page Break In a Television or Stage Play format script takes you to the next Act Break or Scene Break Next Speech By Displays a Character Name list taking you to the next speech by the character you select Pressing 1 e repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Script Note Takes you to the next Script Note Pressing Lit J repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Current Rev
33. Fax Via Internal Spooler box ensures the most efficient faxing Printing Options Select to display the Program Options Printer page with the following options Print Bottom Continued at Fixed Line If checked the Bottom Scene Continueds print at the same position on each page one line below the page s Bottom Margin Unchecked the Bottom Scene Continueds are printed two lines below the final line of text on each page This results in the Continueds appearing in different positions on each page Print MORE at page end when dialogue isn t broken but character is first to talk on next page lIf checked the Dialogue of a character who has two speeches in a row separated by an Action element will have MORE printed when a page break separates the two Dialogue elements Substitute for Courier New when printing Allows you to substitute a different font for printing than the default Courier New which doesn t print as dark as some other fonts Darken Courier New TrueType Font Allows Screenwriter to overprint the default Courier New font for darker printing Use this font if your other fonts do not produce better results Experiment with the slide bar to get the best results Using this option slows down printing especially under Windows 95 Setup View as Index Card Printing Button Pressing this button displays the Setup Index Card Printing screen where you can define a default printing layout for Index Cards Prin
34. Increasing the Revision Draft Color to the next level e Taking you to Title Page Publisher to update the Revision Draft Color and Draft Date in the text boxes you ve created for this purpose previously This option is only available in a script with Locked Pages and Locked Scene Headings If you haven t saved the current revision you re prompted to do so before starting the next revision Set Revision Draft Color Order Displays the Revision Draft Color menu showing the order in which revision colors will be used the default is the industry standard Revision colors are displayed in a Color window on the left side of the screen See how the color looks by clicking on it This option is only available in a script with Locked Pages You can change these options y Setup Revision Draft Color Order MA xf WHITE Add New Color Delete Color Edit Color Name Edit How Color Displays After the last color is used it should Loop to DOUBLE y BLUE y IV Display Page Colors On Screen TT Set as Defaults for All New Scripts Y OK X Cancel Help Color Window The Color Window has the name of the color and the actual color in the background A color that is selected will have a black dot to the left of its name If you add a color to the list it will put it after the selected color Add New Color Allows you to add a New color for Revisions for example when all the existing Revision colors have been us
35. Numbering or from A Numbering to Unlocked Dialogue Numbering e Adjust Dialogue Numbering Adjusts overrides the numbering of the Dialogue speech that the cursor is currently in Production Solutions Explains the typical Production Cycle presents various Production related problems and offers solutions to them Merge Text into Script This item is ONLY available in a locked script and will allow you to merge text into this script while preserving the merged texts Scene Heading and Page Break types You d typically only 223 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 224 use this if you were taking a locked draft of a script and replacing a section with a re written scene from another file e General Techniques Walks you through the entire Production cycle helping you to avoid problems by demonstrating the proper procedure e Scene Headings Lists common problems encountered with Scene Numbers and Scene Headings in a production script and tells you how to solve them e Page Breaks Lists common problems encountered with Page Breaks in a production script and tells you how to solve them Headers Lists common problems encountered with Locked Headers in a production script and tells you how to solve them Manual Overrides Displays the appropriate Help screens for the Manual Override of Page Breaks Scene Numbers Locked Header Text Individual Character Continued Individual Page Length Total Script Length e Temporari
36. Optom rh ori AAA AA BG SS os as TE a 172 Locked Scene HeadiHgsiirr reiron yoan a a A ett Met e S aldo EAT Ea ei 172 Locked Page Breaks eiar irere aparin a aaraa ie ai eod ear ea ORTER delante caido 173 A Scene Numbering ch mie rosier rutte ares ias 175 A oaee elas r aee ap E Oe at O E PA Mas ee ea 175 Changing the Level of Locking ccccccocoooonconnnnononcononoconononnnnnonononnnnnnonononnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnanos 177 Overriding a Scene Number ainia odias 177 Fie or Flex A Pages iy ei o e AEE AA TEETE E AEE E EEE EE 178 Converting A Pa ses arena e E E ET a a r E shade 178 Production BreakdownS istar teinar rannin ndadar erie R Eea ie daei aieea iaia 179 Breakdown Tagging teresi n e dio En E A Lah esses Era REANO TRETE NEAKEN EI n N dedos 184 Breakdown Tagging Mod isiis serores ersero aet raa ea E O a ee N iae 184 A E e EEEa ae Aa A EREA AE E AE AA a AIEEE 184 Tag Items Globa lyar iee a rs aii aia 185 Ignore Selection for Bre kd WNS irei naa E AE EEE E EEA EERE REE TE E 185 Edit Breakdown Categori8S oooooocccccnnconononnnonnnnononnononononnnnnnnnonnononnnnnnnnnnonnnnonenaneninnno 186 Breakdown het a a 186 Setup Breakdown Sheets s cc c cscieedencsbecsseseabedeneadadsasbetvedenssdacoaeteaselanvada daaesetaedens 186 viii SCREENWRITER TABLE OF CONTENTS Export to Movie Magic Scheduling oooooocoocccccoonononncononccnnnnonononononnnnnnonnonononnnnnnanananns 187 Animation PLOAUCHON e seepe een re L aE ea eE taeda taaqn eth nee
37. Overwritten Format 38 Retrieve Last Script you worked on 18 137 Return to Voice Assign 126 227 Rev Color 97 Revision Draft Color 218 Add New Color 218 SCREENWRITER Delete Color 218 Display Page Colors On Screen 219 Set as Defaults for All New Scripts 219 Revision Draft Color 97 218 Revision Draft Color order 167 Revision Locking Count 188 Revision Locking Level 189 revision mark 177 Revision Mark 170 Revision Mark Level 223 Revision Mark Right Margin 176 Revision Mark Text 176 Revision Marks 170 218 Revisions Options Page 145 Rich Text Format RTF 203 Right 24 Right Click 80 Right Column 212 Right Element Buttons 151 Right Justified 24 Right Margin 236 Right Mouse 149 right parenthesis in Dialogue 92 143 Right Scroll Bar Moves by Screen 143 Right SpeedBar 16 40 150 151 Right Clicking with PowerPanel 79 Roll Up Down Button Bar 153 248 Roman Numerals 98 99 RTF 197 RTF Rich Text Format 197 Rtf xtd 242 RTPLAYER EXE 75 Ruler 151 Run SmartCheck 213 Run SmartCheck before this Print Job 104 140 Run 248 Rundown Sheets 223 Run Time Player 75 S Same Act 46 SAMEACT 46 62 SAMEACT 59 Sample Page 95 100 104 Save 207 236 Save All Open Scripts 208 Save As 33 Save As 153 236 248 Save as Default Voices 124 226 INDEX Save as Defaults for All New Scripts 96 156 Save as Defaults For all New Scripts 61 Save as the Default Layout 33 Save A
38. Page settings for this script as desired Cheat the Page s Header This option is only available in a script with Locked Pages and Locked Headers 1 2 Put the cursor anywhere on the Page to be cheated Under the Production Menu select Override then Page s Header Draft Color The Header Setup screen displays Change the Header settings for that page Click Preview to view the changes OK to save the changes or Cancel to discard the changes User Lists While you write Screenwriter can recognize certain text you ve typed as matching an item in one of its User Lists and format it as the appropriate element automatically To use User Lists the QuickType feature and the individual Pop Up lists must be enabled See QuickType in the Customizing Screenwriter chapter for more information For example typing ext on a blank line tells Screenwriter that you re starting a new Scene Heading It automatically formats your entry as EXT and pops up a Scene Body Text User List showing previous Locations in this script 56 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS These pop up menus or User Lists contain text items that can be entered by typing the first letter or two instead of typing the whole text saving you time and effort Selecting a Location from the Scene Body Text User List enters it in your script and pops up the Time of Day User List Typing the first letter or underlined QuickLetter of a Time of Day enters i
39. Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out 219 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 220 e Flex All A Pages Unlocks all fixed A Pages Combines any short A Pages that were locked and may combine any Double Locked Pages in the script Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Fix Lock All Headers Locks the Headers of all pages except Flexible A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Flex All Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages converting them to the Current Header Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Unlock Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages and turns Header Locking off for this script Only available in a script with Locked Pages Auto Revision e Marks Toggles current Auto Revision Marks on or off for the currently displayed script A checkmark appears next to Auto Revision Marks when they are on e Colors Shows options for Auto Revision Colors Any new text you add is automatically highlighted in the color you select Useful when you have different people working on the script and you want to show who s made what changes e Blue Highlights new text in blue e Red Highlights new text in red e Green Highlights new text in green e User Defined Color Highlights new text in a color of your choice Requires Screenwriter to convert certain characters which may be in your script to codes first
40. Print Selection should Print in 103 Print Separate full 146 Print Session 75 Print Set List 223 Print Tagged Items 113 183 Print The Title Page 26 Print Title Page 104 Print without prompting 128 Print without Prom mig requires you to insert entire script 48 102 Printer 105 Printer Options Page 146 Printer Setup 94 208 Printing a Multimedia Script 77 Printing a Title Page 26 Printing Index Cards 32 INDEX Printing Options 105 Printing the Script 94 100 printing TV Sitcom Scene Rundowns 222 PrintScript 248 PrintScript 106 147 Production 195 Production Breakdowns 102 111 179 Production Breakdowns Print Menu 110 Production Features 36 165 Production Menu 217 Production Problems and Solutions 195 Production Rewrites 165 Production Solutions 195 223 production strips 186 187 Program Options 40 43 104 131 209 235 Program Options 171 PROLOGUE 46 62 Prologue Text 46 58 62 Prompt on each Tagging 185 Prompt on Multiple Words 91 142 Publish to Internet 205 PushButtons 14 Put in 160 Put In Act Information As 98 Put in Date As 98 Put in Final Act as 159 Put in ONLY on 1st Scene of Act 159 Put In Scene Information As 98 Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to the right of it 145 Q Query when you fix Auto Corrected Words 142 Quick Bold and Uppercase of Previous Word 88 Quick For
41. SCREENWRITER TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Layla A A enearo lieit heks 95 Header Setpro ioe ee E E load aida aabt 97 Header Texty aiii tdi 97 Printing the Scripti arenes O O EE OE 100 Watermark A RN 106 MES OR 107 Signature LA ii A A Ao 108 Animation Dialogues coincido eh eS ta AAA VR dee ash cee eked 108 Production Breakdowns Print Menu oooooooccnccncconcononocononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnannananoss 110 OTHER SCREENWRITER FEATURES cooooococccocococococononccncnncononnco nono conc nn non nan cri ncn nano ca ncnnnns 114 o o sags eas tolySeaesateese scared 115 Speech extasiado aid id 123 Script Note Commander eii gecesi ii id as As Aita 126 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER iss cicrhicbsconsassdenisvinscarssi sted pubsessasdynencseineninnso sbeih sivbansee 131 Program Oplonsi italia 131 Text Entry Editina Pages is ars dd idad 131 QuickT ype Page iria tnlehasen dan ty ts cate hadeec stays s ieteh ages cexeaeasey 133 SEALU Pee EAA ek coe ten at Sa eit E Sais katate tes 137 Password Protect Scripts suosio irinen e a I ehia eet iaa eiii dada 139 SmartCheck Page anita fena Ii OAR ue a pi Da 140 E O T 141 Miscellaneous Options Pagen Cersei iiie re ein REE EEEE EEEE E REE e EEEE ETETE TRE 143 Revisions Options Page lsresrsn neser ii a ET a aA a r eE o e 145 Printer Options Paget eier dt rta 146 Keyboard Options Pag E A Gel a 148 Mouse Page ivi a dae eE 149 Multimedia Page unitat o pia 150 Display Options audi oia dia 150 Seript Format O
42. Screenwriter s own format Clipboard text cut copied from other Windows programs can be imported by Screenwriter whether this box is checked or not Display Headers Footers On Screen WYSIWYG If checked the onscreen display represents the printed page Shows Headers Footers Page Numbers Top amp Bottom Continueds etc with less screen space for text Unchecked these items print but don t display onscreen Display Page Break Type on Screen If checked displays page break lines with descriptive text e g FORCED PAGE as part of the line itself Unchecked the lines display but carry no onscreen description Clicking on Right Scroll Bar Moves by Screen If checked clicking anywhere above or below the right vertical scroll bar s thumb moves up or down in your script by one full screen of text Unchecked the further above or below the thumb you click the greater the distance moved backward or forward in the script nm 4 4 Don t put and at end start of broken action With this option enabled if you have action in parentheticals and Movie Magic Screenwriter breaks an action line over a page break it will not put in an ending parenthetical on the half left at the bottom of a page nor a starting parenthetical on the half that starts the new page 143 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 144 With this option NOT enabled if you have action in parentheticals and Movie Magic Screenwr
43. Screenwriter print the notes that match one of the selected colors on the backs of the facing pages lined up with the element which the note preceded Thus if you have a note half way down the page on page 4 of the script and you select this option it will print the note on the back of page 3 several inches 127 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 128 down the page so it lines up with the element which follows the note in the script Any notes on page 1 will be printed on the back of the Title Page When you select this option you have access to two additional options which allow you to specify whether you want to be prompted to insert each page as needed or have it print all the notes automatically Have it prompt you to insert each page as needed This option will ONLY be available if you have selected to have Movie Magic Screenwriter print the Script Notes on the backs of the facing pages It is generally the option you ll want to choose if you don t have that many notes as it will simply prompt you to insert whichever pages are needed Print without prompting This option will ONLY be available if you have selected to have Movie Magic Screenwriter print the Script Notes on the backs of the facing pages It is generally the option you ll want to choose if you have a LOT of notes in the script as it will allow you to insert the entire printed script so that the title page is the first page to be fed and Movie Magic Screenwriter will th
44. Screenwriter will automatically handle Revision Marks for you To work with Revision Marks manually use the following instructions Manual Revision Marks Pressing the Asterisk key Manually enters a Revision Mark on the line the cursor s in If the line already has a revision mark pressing the asterisk key manually removes it NOTE The Asterisk key is still used to type Manual Revision Marks even if the Revision Mark has been re defined as a different character Auto Revision Marks Auto Revision Marks are revision marks which are automatically entered for you as you edit your Locked script When you change a line Screenwriter gives it a revision mark Even if you change it back the way it originally was that is still a change to Screenwriter as far as Auto Revision Marks go Activate Auto Revision Marks To activate Auto Revision marks Under the Production Menu select Auto Revision then Marks A checkmark displays next to Marks to indicate that Auto Revision Marks are activated Remove an Auto Revision Mark To remove an auto revision mark from a line put the cursor on the line and press the asterisk key Removing All Current Revision Marks After issuing any new revised pages you ll usually want to remove any existing revision marks That way the next set of revisions will only have new marks reflecting only the latest changes 170 SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES To remove Current Revision
45. Straw is strewn on the floor Nothing else is visible lt ENDIF gt IF YOU ENTER SECOND CELL THEN The door slams behind you and locks A lunatic s LAUGHTER surrounds you DISEMBODIED VOICE I ve got you now infidel Ha ha ha lt ENDIF Activity lines aren t limited to simple IF THEN statements as used in the sample above They can also check and set Variables Variables Variables are surrounded by angle brackets and are words that are capable of being either TRUE or FALSE How can a word be true or false Well take the variable lt APOLOGIZE gt in the following activity gt IF YOU SAY YOU RE SORRY THEN YOU lt APOLOGIZE gt Note that there are two parts to this Activity The ACTIVE part consists of the words between IF and THEN YOU SAY YOU RE SORRY The REACTIVE part consists of everything following THEN YOU APOLOGIZE SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS gt IF YOU SAY YOU RE SORRY THEN YOU lt APOLOGIZE gt ACTIVE REACTIVE If the active part is true you say you re sorry then the reactive part in this case the variable lt APOLOGIZE gt is also set to true If the active part is FALSE you don t say you re sorry then the reactive part is also FALSE Variables can consist of any text up to fifty characters long enclosed in angle brackets The only pre defined variable lt RANDOM gt Allows you to cre
46. This is the Screenwriter default It s similar to the Command keys used in Apple Macintosh software Alt Ctrl Keys Here you can choose an Alt key or Control key combination to override Screenwriter s defaults for Text Editing keys Element Shortcut keys or Cursor Movement keys Select the key combination in the left window and the function to reassign to it in the right window Clear Out all Alt Ctrl Key Override Pressing this button clears all your reassigned keys and restores Screenwriter s default key settings SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER If you choose the same key combination for two different options for example Control Home for Delete Word and for Goto Top of Script the results may be unpredictable Change one of the key combinations to avoid conflict lt Ctrl S gt saves file rather than Inserts Scene Ctrl S puts you in a new scene unless this is enabled When activated Ctrl S will save your script like a File gt Save Mouse Page Drag n Drop should break Elements in the Middle If checked dragged text is dropped at the cursor location If the dragged text is the same style as the element it is dropped in it is inserted as part of that element If the dragged text is of a different style it breaks the element it is dropped on into two elements before and after the dragged text Unchecked dragged text is dropped before the existing element if the drop cursor is in the fir
47. Timed Backup 18 Timed Backup 138 Timed Backup Frequency 138 Time of Day 41 58 62 110 112 180 182 Time of Day 235 Time of Day Dashes 158 Time of Day List 136 Time of Day List after Location Selection 136 Time of Day Normalization 111 180 title 23 Title Centered 46 Title Page 23 24 25 26 104 Title Page Publisher 23 100 104 208 218 Top Continueds 146 Top Margin 95 Top of Pg 159 Top SpeedBar 15 150 Top SpeedBar Editor 16 195 241 247 Top to Bottom 25 Top Bottom 33 Tops 25 Totals of All Rounded Eighths 112 182 Transition 30 45 49 134 235 Transition 40 Transitions 58 62 136 159 Transitions 57 Transitions are FLUSH RIGHT 159 Treat 92 143 Trouble Shooting 228 True Total of All Lines 113 182 Turn off Block 80 211 Turn Revision Color Off 220 TV Template 36 two column simultaneous dialogue 212 Type a Script Note 47 Typeover 85 131 Typeover 16 Typeover mode 85 U Umlaut 88 Uncheck All Colors 127 230 un delete 83 84 Un Deleting Text 84 Underline 86 132 239 Underline 24 236 SCREENWRITER nderline Button 86 nderlined 156 nderlining 235 nderlining Text 86 ndo 84 209 ndo Alignment 25 ndo Level 84 ndo Levels 132 209 nique Character Extensions List 136 nique Locations List 102 136 nique Shots List 136 nique Transitions List 136 nlock Dialogue Numbering 223 nlock Headers 220 nlock One Rev Mark
48. Type NEWACT at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter centers it and changes it to ACT where is the new Act Number A forced page break will not be entered Or press Enrere at the beginning of a blank Action element Type c for Start New Act A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate New Act info Same Act To continue the Same Act type SAMEACT at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter centers it and changes it to ACT where is the same Act Number End of Act To end an Act press Exe in a blank Action element Type a to select End of Act Info at the Scene Heading Initial Text Pop up List A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate End of Act info If you would like to change End of Act to say something different you can change this line by selecting Format gt Edit User List to open the Edit User Lists window Then click on the End Of Act Text button and follow the on screen instructions to change the text You can also use this same window to change the way Screenwriter ends the document Instead of End of Show you can insert a different word for Show in the B field SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS NOTE Screenwriter inserts End of Show in your document only if you have specified the last act You set the last act by selecting Format gt Edit Script Formats to open the Edit Script Formats window then click on the Act Information button At the c
49. and type in the word as desired and uncheck Pause Autocorrection If it is a word that you ll be using elsewhere you may want to run the spellcheck and tell the program to learn it OR alternatively put the cursor at the beginning of the word and press lt CTRL DASH gt which will put in a hidden code to tell the program not to autocorrect this word Q Cut and paste is slow on my machine Can I speed it up at all A Yes Go to the File Menu select Program Options then click on the Misc Page and uncheck Share Clipboard with Other Windows Programs This will speed up cut and pasting by approximately 33 but will make it so that you cannot cut text in Screenwriter and paste it into another Windows program Q I have Screenwriter for Windows on two different computers and when I load exactly the same script on both of them the page breaks are slightly different what s going on A The computers have different printers selected and since Screenwriter bases the page breaks on the selected printer s page size and printing resolution different printers can produce different results Simply select the same printer driver on both machines even if one or the other is not hooked up to that printer and then they will match Q I want to move my scenes around in a locked production script is there an easy way to do it A Switch to Index Card View mode and shuffle your scenes as desired Q Our locked production script was broken into two part
50. another by itself why does this happen A Most likely you accidentally tap on your touch pad which causes the cursor to jump Q I decided to change a name of one of the characters in my script that I have just written where can I find change character name feature A Use Search amp Replace under Search menu to change character names 193 TROUBLESHOOTING MOVIE MAGIC 194 Q Can I edit my pop up character name list so that character that rarely speak do not clutter the menu A Select Hide Names in Pop Up List under Format menu Q lTaccidentally put in a forced page break how do I get rid of it A Put your cursor under the forced page break and press Back Space key or select Remove Forced Page under Edit menu Q Ina locked script I have deleted several pages in a row Now Movie Magic Screenwriter prints blank pages Is there a way to consolidate all the blank pages on one with the appropriate indication in the header A First ensure that the option PRINT SEPARATE FULL PAGE OMITTED PAGES on the revision page of the Program Options Menu is not checked and then delete all the text including the word OMITTED from the pages that you don t want to print Non printing omitted page sign will appear page numbering will change accordingly Q The program is correcting a word that I m typing in What can I do about that A Simply pause the AutoCorrection by going to the SPELL Menu and choosing Pause Autocorrection
51. asks you if you want to save then to exit Now follow the Direct Import instructions above Importing a Movie Master script Screenwriter can directly read files from most versions of Movie Master without any conversion Try this method first explained in Direct Import above If that doesn t work satisfactorily follow these instructions 1 Open Movie Master and open the script you want to import to Screenwriter 2 In your Printer Configuration select a TTY printer 3 Under the File Menu select Print Enter the name s of the file s that make up your script 4 Select Export from the Print Menu Enter a filename specifying the C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts subdirectory if it lets you 5 Exit Movie Master Now follow the Direct Import instructions above Importing a Windows Word Processor script If the Cut and Paste method doesn t import satisfactorily try this method Also if the Windows Word Processor script you want to import is on a different computer than Screenwriter you can t use the Cut and Paste method Instead 1 Open the Windows Word Processor and open the script file you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under the File Menu choose Save As Save the script under a different name C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts lt ScriptName gt Save to a floppy disk if importing from a different computer 3 On the Save As Menu there should be an option to save the script in a different for
52. be set to True and Will be set to False windows Horizontal without a checkmark next to Vertical displays them side by side Vertical with a checkmark next to Vertical displays them one above the other 4 Move the floating window around by dragging it using the mouse Select Display Font Allows you to display the multimedia script s text in a different font or different size Main Window The Multimedia Run Time Player displays the current lines of the script in its Main Window If there is more than one screen of text a prompt at the bottom of the window informs you and an up down scroll bar displays Control Buttons Below the main window are four Control Buttons using icons similar to those on your audio system or videocassette recorder Play The leftmost one a green right pointing triangle plays the script It asks if you want to restart at the top of this Branch Target Answer No to play from the current position Yes to restart at the top SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Pause The next button with two yellow vertical bars pauses the script in order to change variable values You can resume playing either at the current position or at the top of this Branch Target Stop The next button a red square stops the playing of the script It resets all Variables to false and allows you to select a specific position to start playing from Display Source The rightmost button with two pages as its icon shows the opt
53. before each color in turn then TRIPLE etc Loop To SECOND This will function exactly the same as Loop to DOUBLE but will use the words SECOND THIRD FOURTH etc e Loop To 2 This will function exactly the same as Loop to DOUBLE but will use the words 2ND 3RD 4TH etc The second drop down menu allows you to select which color the program should start with when it loops to a DOUBLE or SECOND 2ND color You have the choice between the first and second colors on the Revision Color List Display Page Colors On Screen If checked displays the Revision Colors in a Sample Text Box to the right of the Colors window Unchecked clicking on a color s Name does not show its corresponding color In 256 color mode on your monitor only 16 colors are available for Revision Draft Colors These may not be enough for a list with extensive Revision Colors Setting your monitor to display in more than 256 colors is recommended if possible Set as Defaults for All New Scripts If checked uses the Revision Draft Colors you set here to be the default colors in all New scripts Help Displays a graphical representation of this window and allows you to click on a button for a definition Setup Draft Information Selecting this menu item will take you to the Draft Information Menu used by the Watermark Serialization function You will only need to use this menu if you are using Watermarks Fix or Flex e Fix All A Pages Locks all A
54. but the space it occupied prints as blank lines Ignore printer resolution when calculating the script s pagination With this option enabled the program will calculate all page breaks and pagination as if you were printing to a 600dpi printer regardless of that actual printer s resolution This will ensure that if you are taking a script among multiple printers that the page breaks will not change When printing the List of Unique Characters include ALL names in the user list regardless of whether that Character speaks in the script With this option enabled when you choose the option Character List All Unique Characters in Script on the Print Menu it will include all names in the Character Name User List regardless as to whether that Character speaks in the script With this option NOT enabled when you choose the option Character List All Unique Characters in Script on the Print Menu it will only include Characters who actually speak Print all Non Selected Text that s on the page with selected text in a box with a big X across it This option is used only if you have chosen to print Production Sides 2 copies per page When you select a specific portion of text Screenwriter prints the entire page but will surround the area that is not selected with a box and cross it out Gray out the Non Selected Text Box This option is used only if you have chosen to print Production Sides 2 copies per page In addition Print all N
55. button to delete them Check Forwards Click this button to perform a homonym check from the current cursor position downwards When it finds any one of the words listed it will point it out and ask you if this is the correct usage If you say NO and there is only ONE other option such as in the case its it s then it will simply replace this text with the other option otherwise it will pop up a list of alternatives and you can select the correct one Check Script Click this button to perform a homonym check for the entire script When it finds any one of the words listed it will point it out and ask you if this is the correct usage If you say NO and there is only ONE other SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR option such as in the case its it s then it will simply replace this text with the other option otherwise it will pop up a list of alternatives and you can select the correct one Close The Close button closes this window Pause AutoCorrection Pauses the real time SpellChecking or AutoCorrection features if they re on When paused there ll be a check mark next to this menu item Clear Ignore List Clears from memory all the words that you ve told SpellCheck to Ignore this writing session Change Dictionary Displays a Menu where you can select a different user dictionary for the currently displayed script Select Language Shows options for changing your SpellChecking to a different language Use o
56. categories Female Voices and Male Voices Play Sample Clicking this button plays the voice that you selected in the Voice window The voice will say a brief introduction Select Voice Clicking this button will assign the voice the user selected in the Voice window to a particular element Speak Silently Clicking this button mutes the voice of this character even though Screenwriter will still read it This creates an appropriate pause to allow a human actor character to read that part aloud The purpose of this feature is to allow a particular actor character to read interactively with the program to help them rehearse and memorize their lines Do NOT Read Clicking this button will not assign a voice to the chosen element SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Setup Available Voices Clicking this button changes the configuration of the window by adding options that allow you to add or modify available voices Edit Vocal Characteristics Clicking this button displays a window that allows you to control the Pitch and Speed of the voice you selected from the Voice window Edit Pronunciation Clicking this button displays a window that allows the user to alter the pronunciation of the voice that was chosen from the Voice window Based on the word you enter in the blank field the Edit Pronunciation window gives you four choices of what you can do with it e Add this word to the dictionary e Change the pronunciation of this
57. def ooooniconoccconnccnnccnnncnnnoc n South Park Spin City Def esr aoro aar EA ERKA Spin City Star Trek DS9 def oocoococoncoccccocnooccoooconooss Start Trek Deep Space 9 Star Trek Voyager def oooocoonccconnccoonccoccccnoo Star Trek Voyager Style and Substance def ooooconccoccccccccnccns Style and Substance 245 FILES INSTALLED MOVIE MAGIC 246 the Nanny def ooococononccnccooccononccncnnconaninonanoss The Nanny Touched By an Angel def ooooooomocoooo Touched by an Angel Veronica s Closet def 0 ccc eee eee eens Veronica s Closet Walker Texas Ranger def 000000008 Walker Texas Ranger AE A Ghee gee Xena Princess Warrior X Files debia ii ios The X Files Young amp Restless def oooooooncconoo c The Young and the Restless SCREENWRITER UTILITY PROGRAMS Appendix H Utility Programs Movie Magic Screenwriter for Windows comes with the following useful utilities Configuration Wizard CONFIGWZ EXE The Configuration Wizard is a guide to customizing how Screenwriter functions It may be run from the Help Menu within Screenwriter or separately by double clicking on its icon in the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window For more information see Customizing Screenwriter in the Advanced Features section of this manual Top SpeedBar Editor SETUPBAR EXE This utility allows you to change which buttons display on the Top SpeedBar and their
58. ecrinty Shot List Scene Heading List C Unique Locations C Production Breakdowns C ScriptNotes Asterisked Pages Print Selection should Printin Normal Order Forwards y F Run SmartCheck before this Print Job Number of Copies fi I Create PrintScript File instead of Printing Directly J Print Title Page E Preview Fan 1x Cance Help Current Page If checked prints the page that the cursor is currently on Forwards lIf checked prints from the current page through to the end of the script Entire Script lf checked prints the entire script If you ve created a title page in the Title Page Publisher it is also printed Blocked Text If checked prints the text block you ve selected in your script If no text is selected this option is grayed out and unselectable Selected Pages If checked prints the Pages you select Enter the page numbers in the same order they appear in the script i e lower numbers first 100 SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Enter individual page numbers separated by commas 1 3 32 Enter a section of consecutive pages using a dash between the first and last page 45 78 or 89 end Or combine the two methods 1 3 32 45 78 89 end Selected Scenes If checked prints the Scenes you select Enter the scene numbers in the same order they appear in the script i e lower numbers first Enter individual scene numbers separated by commas 1 3 32 Enter a section of consecutiv
59. fingers need never leave the keyboard unlike using a Control key shortcut or using the mouse enabling you to stay in the flow of writing your script Based on which Element the cursor s in Screenwriter makes an informed guess as to what you d like to do next It places you in the logical next Element and pops up a menu of possible choices For example if the cursor s in a blank Character Name element and you press Enter a list of all the Character Names in your script pops up for your selection For Tab amp Enter to work QuickType must be enabled To turn QuickType on 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 At the Program Options screen click on the QuickType button 3 Check the Enable QuickType Entry box The following element instructions use the Tab Enter method with QuickType enabled Fade In On the first line of a new script press Enter A pop up box displays asking you if you want it to start your script with FADE IN e Click on the Yes button to put it in e Click on the No button to start your script without it Next a Scene Heading element is automatically created Scene Heading A Pop up list displays with Initial Scene Heading Text options 40 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS INT EXT POW FULL SHOT FADE IN lt No Initial Text gt lt End of Act Info gt lt Start New Act gt lt Make this a Shot gt lt Make this a Transition gt Nevermind Es
60. help within the various Speak Text Menus for more details Setup Voices Clicking on this feature activates Microsoft s Speech Engine and displays a window that allows you to assign voices to elements of the script Assign Voices to Names and Categories Unassigned Character Act Information Action Scene Headings Scene Information Script Notes Shots Titles Centered Transitions Clear All Associations To Assign a Voice to any Name or Category simply double click on it in the list to the left Character Name Options Do not read Read in Character Voice Read in Action Voice Parenthetical Options Do not read Read in Character Voice C Read in Action Voice Load Voice Association File Save Voice Association File I Save as Default Voices Apply Cancel x Character Name Options This area allows you some choices on the way Character Names are read in the script Do not read When selected the Character Names will not be read Read in Character Voice When selected will read Character Names in their assigned voices Read in Action Voice If selected will read Character Names in the voice assigned to the Action element Parenthetical Options This area allows you some choices on the way Parentheticals are read in the script 225 Do not read When selected the Parentheticals will not be read Read in Character Voice When selected will read Parenthe
61. iPartner on a Network System with a Firewall if you are having trouble making or receiving a connection using iPartner but you are able to access other sites on the Internet your system may be behind a network security system called a firewall If you are connected directly to an Internet Service Provider ISP like America Online or Mindspring you are probably NOT behind a firewall If you are connected to your company s internal network however there is a good chance you are behind a firewall Solution In order to use iPartner behind a firewall your network administrator will need to change your firewall configuration Here is the information your administrator will need 121 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 122 Firewall Configuration Information iPartner can communicate over any of the following TCP port numbers 2200 2136 2184 and 2245 At a minimum the firewall will need to allow outbound connection on at least one of these ports The user can select the port number to use so if you only open one port number let the users know which one has been opened iPartner can also accept incoming connections on these same port numbers Although it is not absolutely necessary to allow incoming connections it will be more convenient for the users to allow incoming connections on these ports The optimal configuration for iPartner would be Outgoing and Incoming connections allowed on ports 2200 2136 2184 and 2245 A mor
62. in the Script Formats Menu Editing User Lists If you d like Screenwriter to auto format a text item that you type put that text in the User List of the Element it should be formatted as Existing User List text can be changed or deleted Under the Format Menu select Edit User Lists You ll see the Menu below Edit User Lists Initial Scene Heading Text x Alias A INT Character Names Alias B EXT Extensions Alias c P 0 v Initial Scene Text Alias D FULL ESHOT ss i iti S Scene Body Text Alias E PO Shot Text aiar E A Times of Day ias G E Transitions Alias Jap Act Scene Info A PrologueT ext Tag Text End of Act Text FADE IN Text Substitution Text TF Save as Defaults For all New Scripts 7 Help Y OK X Cancel Click on a button in the right column to select a User List to edit Available items for that User List with defaults display ii Select the text in a lettered Item for example FULL amp SHOT in Item D and edit it as desired If you delete an item the list is updated when you exit the menu 59 MOVIE MAGIC Loading User Lists User Lists can be loaded from other Screenwriter scripts or from ASCII Files created in other programs Open the script you want to load the User Lists into Under the Format Menu select Load User Lists from then one of the following formats e Movie Magic Screenwriter Script
63. into a Scene Heading with INT and a space already typed in for you CTRL O If you aren t in a Shot then it puts you into one CTRL R Forces a refreshing of the screen CTRL S If you aren t in a Scene Heading then it puts you into one CTRL T If you aren t in a Transition then it puts you into one CTRL U Turns Underlining on off CTRL Y Turns Italics on off CTRL ENTER Puts you into Action SHIFT ENTER Puts in a Forced Page Break ALT ENTER Puts in a Hard Return CTRL Puts in a Soft Hyphen CTRL SHIFT Puts in a Hard Dash CTRL SHIFT Puts in a into Dialogue without making it a Parenthetical CTRL ALT SPACE Puts in a Hard Space Revoking Slaves editing privileges The master can revoke the slave s ability to edit the script only by turning off the show partner feature The Master can permit the Slave to still view the script by simply turning the Show Partner Feature back on Ending the session Either side can end the Partner session by clicking the disconnect button If you are in Showing Partner mode when you disconnect Partner SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES will ask if you wish to synchronize your script with the script that has been edited by your partner If you select yes it overwrites the copy of the script you currently have open in your program with the edited changes in your partners If you say no then the script in your program will not reflect an
64. is done for you by Screenwriter as you write e g type int at the beginning of any blank line and Screenwriter automatically formats that as a Scene Heading Cursor Movement Keys Use the following keys to move the cursor around the script quickly at ME ei aa Previous Element J AAA AAA Next Element c Sen A eee Previous Scene Ci j TE EE ETE Next Scene Ctr Pave PEE EEEE Previous Script Page Ctr P AAA AAA Next Script Page 233 COMMAND KEYS consa ef Goto Top of Script cet ft eed eee eee Goto End of Script culJ RT O Goto Page Menu EJ ri Next character A EN Previous character cu EAE PREE EAE AOTT Next Word cu de teem aan Previous Word cs Peres re eee cae erence Beginning of current line cd I ocak tt Seay etna hadi teen eee ahaa End of current line CJ TC ets Previous Line E SR VIE Next Line Pave da Previous Screen ro REN CNE Next Screen MOVIE MAGIC Asterisked items are the default keystrokes They can be changed under the File Menu by selecting Program Options then the Keyboard tab Control Keys The following keys are optional Quick Keys to use for text input Most of them also have a Menu or Speed Button equivalent cuiJ 8 Toggles Bold on off selection unless you ve assigned it to Copy Text cuiJ E Puts you into a Scene Heading element and inserts EXT cuiJ S Pops up the Goto Page Menu culJ 11
65. lines of Header Text Type in any text in the appropriate Line window Headers for Spec Scripts normally contain the page number only flush right and followed by a period To insert codes at the cursor position for the following items click on their buttons Pg Inserts the code representing the Page number To have the page number appear with a period following it e g 119 type a period after this code Act Info Inserts 0 the code representing the Act number for TV shows and Stage Plays To have the act number appear as Act 2 put Act in the Header Scene Info Inserts the code representing the Scene number for TV shows and Stage Plays To have the scene number appear as Scene 2 put Scene in the Header Date Inserts the code representing the current date Rev Color Inserts the code representing the Revision Draft Color for revised pages 97 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Flush Right Inserts the code telling Screenwriter to align the text following it flush with the Right Margin To have some items align flush left and others align flush right insert this code between them for example Act Page would place Act 2 flush left and Page 3 flush right Underline Insert to start underlining and to end underlining Bold Insert lt to start underlining and gt to end und
66. location size and placement To use the Top SpeedBar Editor double click on its icon in the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window Or under the File Menu select Display Options then Edit Top Speed Bar You ll see a window like the following E a Sel ad ee a ly 247 UTILITY PROGRAMS MOVIE MAGIC 248 The program comes with two pre defined bar setups which can be loaded by clicking on the Load Button FULL800 BAR is optimized for a 800x600 display FULL640 BAR is optimized for a 640x480 display You can create many custom bar layouts Customize the bar the way you prefer then save it under a new name using the Save As button Edit the SpeedBar First choose an Icon size and whether you d like 1 or 2 rows To set up a 2 row bar that can roll between one amp two rows select 2 Rows of Icons To switch between displaying 1 and 2 rows use the Roll Up Down Button Bar shown at top right of the above menu example You ll need to add this button to the top row of the SpeedBar Add a button to the SpeedBar Select the appropriate Category in the Speedbar Editor With the mouse drag the button from the Commands window up to where you d like it to display on the top SpeedBar Remove a button from the SpeedBar Use the mouse to drag the button from the SpeedBar to anywhere off the bar and release it The Current Element window is the one item that cannot be removed from the SpeedBar Once the SpeedBar is set up t
67. not click on the Start Button select Run and type in SCWPRINT specifying the path For example to run PrintScript from the A drive type in A SCWPRINT Click on OK PrintScript initializes and displays the following screen All PrintScript files the ones with numbered extensions are shown Change the drive or file path as needed by clicking the drive directory trees Double click on the file you want and you ll be taken to the following screen pe a The Top Bar has several buttons on it From left to right they are Print Allows you to select a range of pages to print Prev and Next Displays the previous or next page 249 UTILITY PROGRAMS MOVIE MAGIC 250 Zoom In and Zoom Out In single page view only zooms the display appropriately You can also zoom in by left clicking on the page and zoom out by right clicking on the page Edit Allows you to temporarily edit the current page for printing As changes you make are stored in RAM they are not saved Close Exits view mode and displays the PrintScript file selection menu 1 and 2 Switches between one page and two page view Arrow Buttons The next four page icon buttons allow you to temporarily alter the page margins to improve appearance on a specific printer Font Window Allows you to select an alternative display font Select from all available fonts on the current system The Bottom Bar has these buttons is goes to the First
68. onscreen display only from a list of fonts available on your system The onscreen display is no longer WYSIWYG but may be easier for some people to read QuickType Page The secret to the simplicity of pressing Tab and Enter to go from element to element in Screenwriter is its intelligent feature QuickType Based on which Element the cursor is in QuickType makes an informed guess as to what you d like to do next It places you in the logical next Element and pops up a menu of possible choices For example if the cursor is in a blank Character Name element and you press Enter a list of Character Names in your script pops up for your selection When Entering Character Names sort the list By Last Name used SmartTab If checked this allows the quick entry of recently used Character Names using the key Press followed by a letter and the last Character Name you used starting with that letter is highlighted in the pop up Character Name pop up list Press Eve J to enter the name in your script For example you have characters named MICHELLE LARRY LISA and LAURA in your script and the current scene features LAURA and MICHELLE When you press then L the first time in this scene the pop up menu might have the name LARRY highlighted Type A then U to highlight LAURA then press Ene to have SmartTab finish entering the name for you 133 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC Without SmartTab enabled you ll have to do th
69. page in the PrintScript file Erro goes to the Previous page ibid goes to the Next page As goes to the Last page Pot bras brings up a Go To Page menu NOTE The page numbers referred to by PrintScript s Go To function are the physical pages in the PrintScript file and may not agree with the internal page numbering of the PrintScript file for example PrintScript counts a title page as page one your first page as page 2 etc User Dictionary Editor DICTEDIT EXE The User Dictionary Editor allows you to add remove or change words in any of your User Dictionaries It can be selected under Screenwriter s Spell Menu as Edit User Dictionary or run as a stand alone program by clicking on it in the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window The SpellCheck Language Selection screen appears asking you to select the language of the dictionary you re going to edit American English is selected as the default Editing of other languages requires installation of optional Foreign Language Dictionaries Select a language and click on OK Next you re asked to Select User Dictionary SCREENWRITER UTILITY PROGRAMS Select User Dictionary to Edit 2 xi File name Folders OK c moviem 1 E sa Eyes Cancel user_us lxa E moviem 1 Tl Read only List files of type Drives User Dictionary y Bc y User Dictionary files end with the extension lxa User_us lxa is selected as the default Select a dictionary a
70. parenthetical like turning to John and pulling out a gun and you decide you want to move that to an action element Simply cut the parenthetical element as you would normally then use the Paste into Current Element to paste it into a blank action line Copy to This menu item is only available if you have selected i e blocked text in your script If this is the case Screenwriter takes you to a sub menu with the following options New File Copies the selected text and saves it as a New file with the name you enter in the Save As Menu Existing File Copies the selected text and places it at the end of the existing file you select in the Open Menu Scrap File Copies the selected text and places it at the end of an automatically generated Scrap File which has the same name as your script but which ends with Scrap This file is a great place to put text and scenes you want to remove from your script but might want to go back to later Cut to This menu item will only be available if you have selected i e blocked text in your script If this is the case Screenwriter takes you to a sub menu with the following options New File Cuts the selected text and saves it as a New file with the name you enter in the Save As Menu 210 SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Existing File Cuts the selected text and places it at the end of the existing file you select in the Open Menu Scrap File Cuts the selected text and place
71. pre defined formats Screenplay Sitcom I etc to accept the settings you prefer Or you can create a new User Defined format with your preferred settings naming it Screenplay I for example 1 2 Display the script with your preferred settings and format Under the Format Menu select Save Script Format Select User Defined to create a new format Or select All New Scripts to save a default format for new scripts you create Or select an existing format to re define Enter a new filename if necessary Click on OK to save the format 37 SCRIPT FORMATS MOVIE MAGIC Restoring an Overwritten Format There are two ways to restore a previously defined format you ve overwritten e Uninstall and then reinstall Screenwriter This restores all the pre set template formats to their Screenwriter defaults e Open the appropriate Example script file and save its format under the format name you overwrote If you mistakenly re define Stage Play format for example here s how to restore it 1 Under the File Menu select Open 2 Select the file play scw an Example of a stage play and click on OK to open it 3 Under the Format Menu select Save Script Format then select Stage Play 4 Screenwriter asks you if you want to Overwrite Previously Saved Formats Click on Yes to save the format settings for play scw as Stage Play in effect restoring it because the script play scw was formatted as Stage Play fo
72. purposes the Alias Auto Recognition Text Menu for Substitution Text has three additional options Alias for Council on Aging Alias Auto Recognition Text Auto C As Entered C ALL CAPS p x Cancel Help Auto Capitalization matches the way you type the Alias Text e If you type coa it expands to council on aging e If you type in Coa it expands to Council On Aging e If you type in COA it expands to COUNCIL ON AGING As Entered Capitalization matches the Substitution Text exactly as it appears in the User List unless you re in an element defined as all caps in which case it is put in all caps ALL CAPS Capitalization is ALL CAPS Character Name Capitalization for Character Name Alias Text uses the Auto capitalization method Auto Capitalization matches the way you type the Alias Text e If you type coa it expands to council on aging e If you type in Coa it expands to Council On Aging e If you type in COA it expands to COUNCIL ON AGING 64 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Multimedia Interactive Introduction A script for a Multimedia project has to solve a difficult problem putting a non linear structure into a linear format Screenwriter accomplishes this using three special element types Branch Targets Similar to a Scene Heading it s used in Multimedia scripts as a place marker tha
73. t in a Transition element then it puts you into one If QuickType is on a pop up list of Transitions displays for your selection If you re already in a blank Transition a pop up list of Transitions displays for your selection regardless of the status of QuickType c EAT Toggles Underlining on off Cnt Toggles Word Processor mode on off CoH DJ Toggles Italics on off Crit Enter Puts you into an Action element shit J Entera In an Unlocked script inserts a Forced Page Break Ina Locked script displays a list of Page Break types shift J Beletef n Cuts highlighted text So a CO Peer ee Copies highlighted text ht fe Pastes text from the clipboard c Inserts a Soft Hyphen Cilf shit J EJ Inserts a Hard Dash 235 COMMAND KEYS 236 MOVIE MAGIC cuj Lat J J Mserts a into Dialogue without changing to a Parenthetical element cm a1 becce Inserts a Hard Space cu fe J Cheats the Right Margin increasing it by one letter c le 0 Cheats the Right Margin decreasing it by one letter Function Keys Function Keys give you another way to access features also available through Pull Down Menus or other keystrokes ck AAA Pops up the Help Menu 2 eres Pops up the Search for Text box CV EJ Pops up the Search Replace Text box Cat J RN Continues the last Search or Search Replace
74. the card press to go there To be recognized as elements in your script text needs to be entered in Index Card mode obeying the following guidelines Script Element Enter in Index Card as Action Normal paragraph with one blank line before and after it 29 INDEX CARDS MOVIE MAGIC Character Name Formatted as ALL CAPS and followed by a colon and 2 spaces Dialogue Immediately following the Character Name after the colon and two spaces and on the same line Should word wrap normally without any special indentation Parenthetical Part of the dialogue on the same line but text is enclosed in parentheses with a space before and after as appropriate Transition Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Transition text must end in TO Transition text should be surrounded by two carets like the following AACUT TO Shot Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Shot text should be surrounded by two square brackets like the following ANGLE ON SIGN Centered Title Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Centered Titles should be surrounded by two equal signs like the following No Trespassing Script Note Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Act
75. the script in the previous default color to the new color SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES To change the Note Color for ONE SPECIFIC Note Step 1 Put the Cursor anywhere in the Script Note whose color you wish to change Step 2 Select the Format Menu Step 3 Select Cheat Step 4 Select Element Step 5 Click the button Cheat Script Note Color Step 6 Select the New Note Color as Desired Step 7 Click OK to accept the changes 129 MOVIE MAGIC 130 SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Customizing Screenwriter Screenwriter comes with a set of program option defaults As you become more familiar with Screenwriter s features you may want to customize these default settings to the way you work You can make changes to e Editing Options e Startup Files Options e SmartCheck Options e SpellCheck Options e Miscellaneous Options e Revisions Options e Printing Options e Keyboard Options Mouse Options e Multimedia Options e Display Options e Script Format Options NOTE A simple way to change Screenwriter s most commonly used option settings is to use the Configuration Wizard program under the Help Menu Most of Screenwriter s program settings are found on the Program Options Menu Program Options Under the File Menu select Program Options At the Program Options screen go to one of the following option screens by clicking on its Page button Text Entry Editing Allow Typeover
76. this button to see a Print Preview of the current page showing your Header Text Click on the appropriate button for Print Sends the onscreen page to the printer formatted exactly as it looks but at 100 size Prev Goes to the previous page in the script Next Goes to the next page in the script Close Exits the Print Preview screen 99 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 1 Page Displays one page at a time onscreen 2 Pgs Displays two pages at a time onscreen Setup Page Layout Goes to the Page Layout screen see above displaying your actual script page instead of a Sample Page Zoom In Displays the script page larger onscreen Cycles through 53 93 133 173 213 253 of actual page size Zoom Out Displays the script page smaller onscreen Cycles through 53 93 133 173 213 253 of actual page size Click on OK to exit and save your Header Text Cancel to discard the changes Printing the Script Printing in Screenwriter is accessed through the Print Menu Under the File Menu select Print You ll see the following Menu Check one of the print selection radio buttons on the top half of the screen Screenwriter s default is to select Current Page Printing to HP LaserJet 5000 Series PCL 6 on Moviemagic eng_hp_5000n Setup CurrentPage C Forwards C Entire Script Blocked Text Selected Pages C Selected SCENES izi C Dialogue C Character Met AlliUnigue Characters in
77. to emphasize an object or person with the following Action giving more detail To have the combined Shot and Action read as one sentence with the Action sentence not capitalized check this box Character Names If checked capitalizes the first letter of all Character Names in Dialogue Action and Script Notes To be capitalized by Auto Correct a character name must either have been used previously in the script or exist in the Character Name User List When using names such as Mark or Art in your script Auto Correct also capitalizes the words mark and art To avoid this Pause Autocorrection under the Spell Menu Type the word with your desired capitalization move past the word then resume Auto Correct by clicking on Pause Autocorrection again All Caps Makes Character Names ALL CAPS wherever they appear Auto Space Sentences to Spaces If checked ensures that every sentence has a consistent number of spaces after the period Set the value from 1 to 9 To prevent auto spacing a particular sentence enter Hard Spaces after the period instead of regular spaces Enter a Hard Space by pressing crcl e ees SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Treat as a Sentence End in Dialogue for the purposes of Auto Capitalization amp spacing lIf checked treats a right parenthesis in Dialogue as a sentence end in order to format the next sentence correctly Correct Capitalization Spacing whe
78. to point out words and formatting that it identifies as unknown or incorrect P With this option NOT enabled the Spell Check and SmartCheck will use a ScriptThing for Windows style claw to point out words and formatting that it identifies as unknown or incorrect Use Configuration Wizard style humor on prompts With this option enabled Movie Magic Screenwriter s prompts will use humor to convey their information For example if you attempt to set the margins to a value that is not legal it would say It is my sad task to inform you that the Margins which you ve most skillfully selected leave less than 1 Inch SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER between them and that due to my own poor limitations I must reset them to their previous values With this option NOT enabled Movie Magic Screenwriter s prompts will use the more standard plain informative style In the same case as described above should you attempt to set the margins too narrowly you would be prompted The Margins which you ve selected leave less than 1 Inch between them so I must reset them to thelr prev ous values Revisions Options Page Options on this page allow you to change certain Production Features Revision Marks mentioned in the following section refer to Current Revision Marks not Locked Revision Marks See the Production Features chapter for more details After Revision Marks on the Page put a Revision Mark on the Header Lets yo
79. with the following options Only Notes before selected Dialogue Prints Script Notes only if they appear directly before a dialogue speech SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Print Notes directly above Speeches If checked prints Script Notes on the line immediately above the Character Name Unchecked prints according to the line spacing set in Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches Print Boxes around Notes If checked prints Script Notes as they appear in the original script with boxes around them Unchecked no boxes are printed Print lt gt around Numbering lIf checked displays and prints angle brackets around the dialogue numbers to differentiate between them and page numbers scene numbers etc Print Period after Numbering If selected the Dialogue numbering will be printed with a period following them e g 25 Displaying Numbered Dialogue To Display and Print the dialogue speech numbering in the script as well as in the Animation Recording Script report Under the Production Menu select Animation Locking then Print Numbering in Script A checkmark displays next to Print Numbering in Script To turn the display of Numbering off click on it again Locking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be locked numbering new speeches as A Speeches while reordered speeches maintain their original numbers You might want to do if you re using these numbers to relate to story boards or cells Under the P
80. word e Remove this word from the dictionary e Change capitalization or spelling Once the user makes their choice clicking Next will take them to the next stage of modification The Change the Pronunciation of this word feature is more extensive and allows you to change the way a voice says the word To modify the way a word is pronounced the user would type in a spelling that sounds more like the word or the phonetic symbols Add New Voice Clicking this button allows the user to add a voice You can choose if the new voice is male or female Whichever selection you choose male or female will determine what the default voice this new voice is based on For example if you choose female the voice will default to Mary You can change the default voice by clicking on the Edit Pronunciation button Delete Voice Clicking this button allows the user to delete any voice that he has created Voices that come with the program cannot be deleted Edit Voice Name Clicking this button allows you to change the name of any voice Return to Voice Assign Clicking this button will return the window to its original configuration by showing all original buttons Cancel Clicking this button removes any changes and returns you to the Setup Voices window e Read Script This function displays the Table Draft Player window From this window you can play the voices that are assigned to the script 227 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 228
81. x Cancel Help To import a script file Import in Script Format should be checked To import an outline or some other non script text check Import Text as Action Only Text Only Non RTF Checking this CheckBox if available imports the file slightly faster and may improve the accuracy of the import It also loses any bold italic or underline formatting If you re importing a file with Embedded Style Sheets in Rich Text Format such as a Final Draft script a Use Style Sheets checkbox displays on the menu Check it for better interpretation of paragraph elements If Screenwriter has difficulty interpreting any style sheet it prompts you to identify it Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Causes Screenwriter to normalize inconsistent line spacing and margins In most cases this produces the most accurate import However it may cause Shots to be misinterpreted as Character Names and vice versa Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification Some word processors lose Capitalization Information when exporting files Checking this box tells Screenwriter to ignore Capitalization when identifying Elements SCREENWRITER 5 6 IMPORTING SCRIPTS Ignore Margins for Element identification Some script files have their script elements defined by their margins others by codes or Hard Returns If a script file is being imported incorrectly due to its margins not being what Screenwriter exp
82. you do not have the dictionary you want already installed it can be purchased by calling Screenplay Systems at 818 843 6557 Help Clicking on this button takes you to a graphical representation of this window and an explanation of each feature 89 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Start SpellCheck As SpellCheck begins checking relative to the cursor position it s not necessary to select the text to check 1 Position the cursor in the word or Element you d like to check or directly before the word to start spellchecking at 2 Under the Spell Menu select the checking method to use Word Spellchecks the Word that the cursor is currently in Element Spellchecks the Element that the cursor is currently in Page Spellchecks the current Page Forwards Spellchecks from the cursor position to the end of the script Entire Script Spellchecks all text in the script When SpellCheck finds no misspelled words it displays a window telling you how many words it checked Click on OK to exit When SpellCheck finds a word it doesn t recognize it points to it onscreen with a large Red Arrow It also displays the Found Unknown Word window This shows the unknown word in the Word window and offers a list of suggested alternatives in the Suggestion window Option Buttons down the right side are Replace If you find the correct spelling in the Suggestion window click on it and it appears in the Word window replacing the unknown s
83. you select any Primary sort other than Script Order Time of Day Normalization is performed any scene that ends with CONTINUOUS LATER or SAME TIME is automatically given the previous Scene Heading s Time of Day Movie MagicScheduling File Prints a breakdown to disk saving it as a Movie Magic Scheduling import file It contains the Scene Number Scene Heading and Starting Page Number and page count in Eighths of a page Options under Secondary Sort and Miscellaneous is grayed out and unselectable Script Breakdown Sheets Prints breakdown sheets that include any items you ve tagged in Breakdown Tagging Checking this radio button and clicking on the OK button displays the Production Breakdowns scene selection screen here you can enter the Production Company name and Production Title No to print on the breakdown sheets and select which scene breakdowns to print Selected Scenes ONLY If checked only breakdowns for the scenes you select by clicking on them are printed All Scenes If checked breakdowns for all scenes in the script are printed All Scenes except OMITTEDs lIf checked breakdowns for all scenes except those deleted and marked with an OMITTED are printed Setup Breakdown Sheet Clicking on this button displays the Breakdown Sheet Layout screen Category headings on the windows can be renamed by highlighting the name CAST STUNTS etc and typing in your preferred name Categories of tagged items C
84. 1 3 lt FileName gt 209 1 9 lt FileName gt 231 100 sup 241 171 lex 241 256 color mode 219 3rdrock scw 244 640x480 display 153 248 800x600 display 153 248 90210 scw 244 A A Numbers 223 AA Numbers 223 AA Numbering 192 abbreviations 57 About 231 Accent Aigue 88 Accent Grave 88 ACT 62 ACT 1 160 ACT A 160 Act Break 214 ACT I ROMAN 160 INDEX Index Act Info 47 97 177 Act Information 98 159 Act Information TV and Stage Play Format 46 ACT ONE 160 Act Scene Info 58 62 150 Act Scene Information 97 Action 29 42 49 134 159 235 Action Indention 159 Action is in Parentheticals 199 200 Activate Auto Revision Marks 170 ACTIVE 67 Activity Syntax 70 Activity Window 77 Add a Script Note 47 Add an Index Card 29 Add as Text 44 Add Dialogue Paragraph 211 Add Forced Page Break 51 179 211 Add Hard Return 52 211 Add New Voice 125 227 Add this word to the dictionary 227 Add Word 92 251 Add Words 216 Add Words to 89 Adjust Dialogue Numbering 223 Adjusted 112 182 Adjusting the Block Selection 81 Advanced Locking Features 177 After Revision Marks on the Page 145 After the last color is used it should 219 AFTERNOON 62 Alias 51 Alias 59 Alias Text 57 58 63 64 Align Headers 99 Align Horizontally 24 Align Vertically 25 All Capitals 156 All Caps 91 INDEX All Scenes 187 All Scenes except OMITTEDs 187
85. 1 Except immediately Following Shots 142 Existing Character Names 234 MOVIE MAGIC Existing File 19 20 Exit 75 209 236 Exit Index Card View 33 Export 204 221 export 184 187 Export Format 204 Export to Final Draft RTF 205 Export to Formatted ASCII 205 Export to Movie Magic Scheduling 187 Export to MS Word for DOS 5 5 205 Export to MS Word for Windows 205 Export to Old ScriptThing Format 205 Export to Rich Text Format Mac 205 Export to Rich Text Format Win 205 Export to ScriptThing DOS 204 Export to Scriptware Tagged 205 Export to WordPerfect 5 1 6 x 205 Export to WordPerfect w Styles 205 EXT 61 234 EXT 110 180 ext 40 Extend Block 80 Extend Selection 80 Extension 157 Extensions 58 61 EXTERIOR 111 181 F FADE IN 16 40 46 49 62 134 FADE IN Text 58 62 FADE OUT 62 Fax 105 Fax Modem 105 File History List 209 File Menu 23 207 File Type 204 Files 241 Files Page 137 Filmed Sitcom format 35 Filmterm _us 242 Final Act 159 Final Draft 198 Final Draft RTF 197 Final Draft RTF with Style Sheets in Rich Text Format 197 Firewall Configuration 122 first names 225 Fix Lock All Headers 220 Fix All A Pages 219 Fix or Flex A Pages 178 SCREENWRITER Fix or Flex 219 Fixed A Page 178 Fixed A Page Break 179 Fixing All A Pages 218 Flex All A Pages 220 Flex All Headers 220 flexible A Page 178 Flush L
86. 16 Goto Top 214 Grace Under Fire 244 grace scw 244 Graph 236 Graph Branch Points 73 Graph Breakdown 113 Graphically Gray 107 Grid 25 H Hard Return 52 195 239 Hard Dash 52 235 239 Hard Space 52 91 142 236 239 Hardware Software Problems 193 Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed 48 102 128 Header Line 2 98 Header Setup 97 208 Header Text 97 98 99 100 Header Text 99 Headers 196 224 Help 89 217 219 Help 236 Help Menu 11 231 Hercules 245 hercules scw 244 Hidden 214 Hide Elements on Screen 209 Hide Format Codes 85 Hide in the Script 127 230 Hide Mouse Cursor 149 Hide Names in Pop Up List 212 Hide Show a Script Note 48 Highlight Color 152 Highlighted Text 152 INDEX Homicide 245 homicide scw 245 Horiz 29 Horizontal Index Cards 29 HP DeskJet 103 193 icons 230 Ignore 90 Ignore 217 Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks 141 Ignore Capitalization when checking Words 143 Ignore Margins for Element identification 199 200 ignore non speaking character in Action 183 Ignore Printer resolution when calculating the script s pagination 147 Ignore Selection for Breakdowns 185 Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT match 141 import a Script from another Windows program 199 Import File Type 198 Import in Script Format 198 200 Import Text as Action Only 198 200 Import Text On
87. 4A1 for example renumbered to be normal A Scenes uncheck Multi Locked Scene Numbers by checking Locked Scene Numbers NOTE If you unlock either a script s Page Breaks or Scene Headings all of the appropriate A Numbering is completely and permanently lost That s why it s important to make backup copies of your scripts at least daily Overriding a Scene Number To manually override the number of an individual Scene Heading or Scene Info or Act Info Put the cursor anywhere in that element Under the Production Menu select Override then Element s Numbering 177 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC A menu displays showing your options for renumbering that element Check the radio button of the numbering you d like the scene to have No Numbering lIf checked converts a Scene Heading to a Shot element Scene numbers are removed e Normal lIf checked converts a Scene Heading to normal numbering without any A numbering scheme e Locked If checked converts a Scene Heading to A Scene numbering e Flipped Locked lIf checked converts a Scene Heading to A Scene numbering with the number and A letter reversed e Multi Locked If checked converts a Scene Heading to a Multi Locked Scene Heading taking its numbering scheme from the scenes before and after it e Specify Manually If checked displays a box in which to enter the specific number you want the Scene Heading to have Based on the number yo
88. 6 Set Color 152 Set Column Margins 54 Set Revision Draft Color 218 Set Screen Colors 152 Set Style 157 Sets 223 Setup Available Voices 125 227 Setup Backup Drive 138 Setup Breakdown Sheet 111 181 186 Setup Breakdown Sheets 186 Setup Font for Menus 153 Setup Options 89 105 Setup Page Layout 56 100 104 Setup Script Directory 137 Setup View as Index Card Printing Button 105 147 Setup Voices 123 225 setupbar exe 242 247 Share Clipboard with other Windows Programs 143 194 195 206 Shooting Script 166 short 96 short A Page 173 Short by a min of lines 96 short page 173 short pages 96 shortening 95 Shot 30 45 234 Shot Text 58 62 Shots 136 159 Shots 91 142 Show Cut and Paste Progress 143 Show Format Codes 85 152 189 239 Show Format Codes 236 SCREENWRITER Show Grid 25 Show Hints 152 Show in script 127 Show in the Script 230 Show Open Save Progress 143 Show partner 117 Show Running Shot Lists for entry of the following 136 Show Status Bar 150 Show the Color as the Background 152 Show to Partner 229 Shuffle 31 33 Shuffle an Index Card 31 Shuffle Cursor 32 Shuffle Mode 31 Shuffle Multiple Index Cards 31 Signature Page 108 simpsons scw 245 Single Click Turns Off Block 149 Single Starting Blank Space 140 sitcom 213 Sitcom Breakdowns 222 sitcom format 35 Sitcom Version I 35 Sitcom Version II 35 Sitcom 1
89. 8 nwsradio scw 245 nyunder scw 245 O O S 61 O S 44 OMITTED 174 Omitted 174 187 Omitted Scenes 174 Online Help 11 195 231 Online Help Index 231 ONLY display Matching Elements on Lists 136 Only Display Print ONE Rev Mark per 145 Only Show Top Menu 150 Only when Extensions Match 157 onscreen display 133 On Screen Underlining of Unknown Words 142 Open 33 75 207 Open File 137 Opening a Previously Saved Version 17 Opening a Script 17 Opening a Script automatically at Startup 18 Opening a Timed Backup 18 Opening Multiple Scripts 17 OPTION MENU 14 Other Formats 36 Outdent Parentheticals 158 Outline 29 33 SCREENWRITER Outline Mode 29 Outlining with Index Cards 27 Override Page Break Type 221 Page s Header Draft Color 221 Scene Heading s Numbering 221 Override 56 177 183 Override this Speech s Numbering 192 Override 221 Overriding a Scene Number 177 Overriding Dialogue Numbering 192 P P O V 61 Page Break 55 Page Break Options 161 page breaking 96 Page Breaks 195 224 Page Header 95 Page Layout 95 96 100 104 208 page layout 186 Page Margin Settings 33 Page Number 16 214 Page Numbers 97 Page s Header Draft Color 56 Pagination Delay 144 Parenthetical 30 45 50 135 157 Parenthetical 133 Parenthetical Options 123 225 Parentheticals 158 Parentheticals are Separate Element 158 Party of Five 245
90. 95 Bottom Status Bar 16 150 Bottoms 25 Branch Point 72 73 74 Branch Points 65 74 Branch Target 72 73 74 150 Branch Target 73 Branch Targets 72 74 Branch Targets 65 72 74 Break After a Single Sentence 162 Break two One line Sentences 162 breakdown 181 breakdown 180 183 Breakdown categories 184 221 Breakdown category 184 breakdown reports 186 Breakdown Scene Selection 181 Breakdown Sheet 186 Breakdown Sheets 184 186 187 Breakdown Tagging 181 184 185 186 187 221 239 Breakdown Tagging Mode 184 Breakdowns 179 180 Breaking Elements 83 Btm of Pg 159 Build And Perform Branch 72 Build The Branch Point 72 C Movie Magic ScreenwriterYWWScripts 37 137 197 201 202 207 Calculate Eighths by 112 Calendar 225 Cancel 124 126 226 227 228 Canon BubbleJet 103 Cap amp Bold Word 87 Capitalization Information 198 200 Capitalization of Alias Text 64 Capitalize 237 Capitalize Word 87 Caroline in the City 244 INDEX caroline scw 244 Cascade 230 Cascade 17 case 87 Category 153 248 CD ROM 65 Cedilla 89 Center 236 Center Act Info 159 Center Character Names 156 Center on page 25 Center S Info 160 Centered 24 Centered Title 30 46 161 Centers 24 25 Change a Voice 126 228 Change capitalization or spelling 227 Change Character Name 213 Change Dictionary 217 Change Element Type 212 Change Element Type 54 Change Te
91. A numbered Dialogue to Normally numbered Dialogue Set this Dialogue s numbering to A Numbering Changes the current AA or Normally numbered Dialogue to A Numbering Set this Dialogue s numbering to AA Numbering Changes the current A or Normally numbered Dialogue to AA Numbering Only available in scripts where the dialogue numbering has been Multi Locked Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable Override this Speech s Numbering Specifies which Normal number this speech should be given Accepts a number between 1 and 4096 Only available when the cursor s in a Normally numbered speech in a script that has Locked or Multi Locked Dialogue Numbering Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable NOTE If you change the Normal Dialogue Numbering order either by switching a Normally numbered speech to an A or AA speech or vice versa you ll be given the option to adjust all following speeches so that two speeches aren t assigned the same number 192 SCREENWRITER TROUBLESHOOTING Appendix A Troubleshooting Known Hardware Software Problems HP DeskJet printers These printers have an unprintable bottom margin of 3 4 of an inch Due to this anyone using this printer will probably get the top portion of the bottom continueds cut off in the print job To correct this INCREASE the bottom margin by 1 or 2 lines in the Page Layout option under the FILE Menu Font managers The presence of some font manag
92. A LAA AAA EA OEE 65 Branch Points us e dd la EKSS A di ld di 65 US Cr LA COVES A tet Ae A E A IAEA EA E 65 E O A A EE A 66 Writing a Multimedia Script eose rieien irene ar S sea AE aea Ea AE Eee EE 71 User Activity Wizarde ehenta i naene e ae e a A Ee E Epea i 71 Graph Branch Poldts oia osea ia 73 Adding New Branches Branch Targets ninas code de 74 Renumbering Branch TargetS oooooocccccnonononoconnnnnnonnononononnnnnnnnonnonononnnnnnnnnnonnanonannnnnnos 74 Multimedia Run Time Pla yet moriren eaaa E AEEA A aE a A EEA 75 Multimedia Dem evud tepuioio tenio nien EE Es KEEN TEANA ves Ub OREA Roda beto EEAS Eaei 77 TEXT EDITING A Gea a ea whey ahh clan abe A A fan aa ied 78 Moving the Cursor ich erat IA 78 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOVIE MAGIC Right Clicking with PowerPanel oooooooooccnnoncconcononocononcnonnonnononnnnnnnnnnonnonononnnnnnnnnnannanonoss 79 Selecting TEX tise ss hols di rider deed tad aid ntc iaa a 80 Memu Selection aaa naci 80 Select All AAA A AA AAA AAA i 80 NE 80 A de vadea dbats te sce vadeaietags Cotesia dan ete adden sdondaann AAN 80 Mouse Selec it di discs tet Bene cd th dali esas Becta Tarte A id tect 80 LESLt C Cis dees A sha sees EA ia oca 80 DOubLe Ce cocino ies e eea E o EETA a aa nia init 80 Right Clicks a R AO 80 Moise Bloch it AA AA Ose Sess AA OEE E E 81 Keyboard Select On srera e a e n A e S e E a 81 Moving Texte ieira e aieia aiii aiii 81 Cutting and Pasting with the MOUSO oooooooooccncccnconcononoconononnn
93. AP Seite ess Title Page Publisher Template Files Television Templates if you installed them are also located in your Scripts subdirectory 3 Rock from the Sun def Third Rock from the Sun Ally McBeal def 0cccccceee ees Ally McBeal Beverly Hills 90210 def Beverly Hills 90210 Babylon5 def ooooccccoonocccocooccncnonos Babylon 5 Baywatch def ooooooncccocccocncoccccoccnonnss Baywatch Boy Meets World def oooonoonnncnnnnc Boy Meets World Buffy the Vampire Slayer def Buffy the Vampire Slayer Caroline in the City def o Caroline in the City Chicago Hope def oooocoocccocccicccnccnns Chicago Hope Cybill def Cybill Dawson s Creek dSf oooonomonccocccoccc Dawson s Creek Dharma and Greg d0Sf ooonconnccicccncccs Dharma and Greg Days of our lives def oooooccooo Days Of Our Lives Drew Cary Show def oooooccoocccooncco The Drew Carey Show Doctor Quinn def oocoooccccncccccccccccnc Dr Quinn Medicine Woman Early Edition def ooomccooncconncoccccos Early Edition Ellen defi oia Ellen ER A O gd no e a Sauceeet ott ats ER Everybody loves Raymond dsf Everybody Loves Raymond Frasier A Saar eect Frasier Eriends def Friends General Hospital def oooonoocconcoo General Hospital Grace Under Fire def ooocoonconnccoc
94. AY NIGHT etc End of Action Add another Action Element Character Name Add a Dialogue Element If the next element is Dialogue or Parenthetical it moves to the beginning of that element End of Dialogue Add an Action Element Middle of Dialogue Break the Dialogue and insert an Action Element Parenthetical Add a Dialogue Element if the next element is Dialogue it moves to the beginning of that element If Enter in Dialog takes you to Character is checked on the Editing page of the Program Options Menu under the File Menu a Character Name element will be inserted instead 50 If QuickType is not enabled these pop up menus can be displayed manually by pressing the appropriate Control key combination If you Press eni i e e o c While in Any element Blank Scene Heading Scene Heading with Initial Text Scene Heading with Initial Text and Location Any element Blank Shot element Any element QuickType will Add a Scene Heading element Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT EXT etc Display a List Menu of all unique Locations already in the script Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY NIGHT etc Add a Shot element Display a List Menu of Shots ANGLE ON etc Add an Action element SCREENWRITER ose J ex E D eHO co Action or Dialogue element Any element Charact
95. Character Names are read in their assigned voices Read in Action Voice lIf selected Character Names are read in the voice assigned to the Action element Parenthetical Options This area allows you some choices on the way Parentheticals are read in the script Do not read If selected the Parentheticals are not read Read in Character Voice If selected Parentheticals are read in their assigned Character Name voices Read in Action Voice If selected Parentheticals are read in the voice assigned to the Action element Load Voice Association File If you have assigned voices to a previous script and saved them you can load the voice association file vaf and use it on your current script 123 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC Save Voice Association File This option allows you to save your current voice allocation settings Clicking this button saves your voice settings to a voice association file vaf The voices that are assigned to this script can now be used for other scripts Save as Default Voices You can save your current voice associations for use on all your future scripts by clicking this check box Clear All Associations Clicking this button removes all assigned voices to your elements Apply This saves all changes and returns you to your script Cancel This removes all changes and returns you to your script You can assign a voice by double clicking on an element The window below will appe
96. Check Show Grid to display it Saving a Title Page As the Title Page is saved as part of the script itself there s no need to save it separately To save it as a template for use with other scripts simply click on the Save button and give ita name A file extension of TPG is automatically added to a Title Page Template file you save 25 TITLE PAGE MOVIE MAGIC Loading a Title Page You can load a title page that is part of another Screenwriter script or was saved as a Title Page Template file Click on the Load Button On the Open Title Page Menu load an existing Title Page Template file by selecting a file ending in TPG and clicking OK To load a title page that is part of another Screenwriter script click the Load Button then change the List files of type from Title Page to Screenwriter Scripts Select a file ending in SCW and click OK Printing a Title Page From within Title Page Publisher print the Title Page by clicking the Print The Title Page Button To print from outside Title Page Publisher under the File Menu select Print On the Print Menu select page or scenes to print and check Print Title Page Selecting Entire Script automatically checks the Print Title Page box 26 SCREENWRITER INDEX CARDS Index Cards Outlining with Index Cards Many writers use index cards or 3 by 5 cards as an organizing tool before writing their scripts Using a separate card for each scene they jot down what
97. E EEEE RE Pops up the Cheat Element Menu V Toggles Show Format Codes on off AE Drops down the Switch Element Menu J ON Exits Screenwriter cm r3 Closes the currently active open script AA Pops up the Thesaurus laa ds Toggles Bold on off crt re Switches between a number of open Scripts sun J re TREATS Centers current element changes to Title 1 A Saves the script without prompting for a file name 0 AA Toggles Underline on off A Toggles Italics on off HO ococononononenenenono Pops up the Save As Menu El E Toggles Strikeout on off EJHEJ oo Switches between Script and Graph mode in a Multimedia script SCREENWRITER COMMAND KEYS La AAA Capitalizes the word preceding the cursor cm Ge Capitalizes amp bolds the word preceding the cursor ar J o Lowercases the word preceding the cursor 237 MOVIE MAGIC 238 SCREENWRITER FORMAT CODES Appendix F Format Codes The following Format Codes are embedded in the text of your script by Screenwriter To display them Under the File Menu select Display Options then Show Format Codes If your script is going into Production and you perform Breakdown Tagging on it Tagging Codes are placed around each word you tag See the Production Features chapter for more details E CI CI ECOS ANI ACI ECC PEI AI C AE ECC IN ET CN 239 MOVIE MAGIC 240 SCREENWRITER FILES INSTALLED Appen
98. E MAGIC Buttons amp Menus Show Hints If checked helpful hint text boxes display when you move the cursor over SpeedBar icons More help text displays at the right of the Bottom Status Bar If unchecked helpful hints do not display Scroll Hints when Needed If checked helpful hint messages on the bottom Speedbar scroll to the left if there is not enough space to fit the entire message If unchecked messages are cut off if they are too long to fit on the bottom Speedbar Restore Program Hints If checked all helpful hints that appear throughout the program are activated For example if you go to the Edit menu and click Edit Scene Description a hint will appear before you can begin editing If you choose not to show this hint next time it will never display a suggestion again However clicking Restore All Program Hints will return this hint next time you use Edit Scene Description Always Show Boxes around Buttons lIf checked all the icons on the SpeedBars are turned into buttons Show Format Codes If checked displays the hidden format codes embedded in the text of your script by Screenwriter to enable Bold Underline Italics Strikeout In normal use you won t need to be aware of these codes Unchecked the format codes are hidden and do not display onscreen Clear File History List Clears the file history list which shows your three most recently saved files under the File Menu Set Screen Colors Displ
99. EX It contains the Scene Number Scene Heading Starting Page Number and page count in Eighths of a page 180 SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES and all items Tagged with Breakdown Tagging Options under Secondary Sort and Miscellaneous are grayed out and unselectable Script Breakdown Sheets Prints breakdown sheets that include any items you ve tagged in Breakdown Tagging Checking this radio button and clicking on the OK button displays the Breakdown Scene Selection screen Enter the Production Company name and Production Title No and select which scene breakdowns to print Selected Scenes ONLY If checked only breakdowns for the scenes you select by clicking on them are printed All Scenes If checked breakdowns for all scenes in the script are printed All Scenes except OMITTEDs lIf checked breakdowns for all scenes except those deleted and marked with an OMITTED are printed Setup Breakdown Sheet Clicking on this button displays the Breakdown Sheet Layout screen Category headings on the windows can be renamed by highlighting the name CAST STUNTS etc and typing in your preferred name Categories of tagged items Cast Members Greenery Vehicles etc can be moved between Category windows by dragging and dropping Click on OK to exit and save your changes Cancel to discard changes and exit Secondary Sort by Secondary sort order allows you to specify how you want the scenes sorted within the Primary gr
100. Grace Under Fire Hercules def iii ica ito dad Hercules SCREENWRITER FILES INSTALLED Home Improvement def 0 06 Home Improvement Homicide d finis ee ie tices aise Homicide Just Shoot Me def ceceec een Just Shoot Me King of the Hill def ooooooncconcconn o King of the Hill La Femme Nakita def ooomcconnconnnonionono Le Femme Nakita Larry Sanders def oooooncconcccoccnoconccnnnonns The Larry Sanders Show Law amp Order def issininieninie ieii Law and Order Living Single def ooooommccnoncnioonnonionnnos Living Single Mad about You def ocooonocccoconccccnonn Mad About You Melrose Place def ooocononccoonccnocnccoono Melrose Place Men Behaving Badly def oooooo Men Behaving Badly Millenium def 0 0 cece eee ee ees Millenium Nash Bridges def ooooomcccoocncoccococonononss Nash Bridges Murphy Brown def 00 cccseeees Murphy Brown News Radio Def oooncconnccocccocccnocccncccns News Radio NY Undercover def sions aiir eisai New York Undercover NYPD Bloodless icce ri a NYPD Blue Party Of 5 de aia dios Party of Five Sabrina det iii Sabrina Suddenly Susan def ooomcocooonccccnonncnnononos Suddenly Susan Simpsons ke ooooooooooccccnnccnonoconnnnonanonnaninonos The Simpsons Slider deL coria Sliders Smartguy def oouoncconnccincccnocnnncccniccnnncnnns The Smart Guy South Park
101. Level 223 nlock The Script 217 nlocking Dialogue Numbering 191 nselect All 128 Untag All Items 185 221 Untagging Items 184 Uppercase 87 Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Mark 145 Use arrows instead of claws for Spell Smart Check 144 se Configuration Wizard style humor on prompts 144 se Current Font for All Elements 156 se most aggressive interpretation of the source text 198 se Scene Information in Script 47 160 U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U E EE se Smart Activity Arrows 150 se Style Sheets 198 se the following Scene s Number 174 se Windows Colors 153 ser Activities 65 75 ser Activity 73 ser Activity Wizard 71 ser Defined 36 ser Defined Format 37 154 ser Dictionaries 92 ser dictionary 217 ser Dictionary Editor 241 250 ser List 59 60 61 134 ser List Order 113 183 ser Lists 56 58 60 61 63 212 ser_us lxa 243 V E EEE Eo EE E EEE EE EE V O 61 V O 43 INDEX Variable 71 Variables 66 72 75 Variables 77 Variables to Be Set 76 Variables to be Set Window 76 Variables which are False 76 Variables which are True 76 Vertical 29 Vertical Index Cards 29 View as Index Cards 28 231 Voice 121 W Watermark 106 108 Watermark Density 107 Watermark text 106 107 Web Resources 231 What s This 231 E colored text within the script When Entering Charac
102. Location First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Locations alphabetically within each group Time of Day First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts alphabetically by Time of Day within each group Calculate Eighths by Specifies how Screenwriter should define an 1 8th of a page Historically an 1 8th of a page was one inch 6 lines Nowadays writers are allowing more than 48 lines on a page so Screenwriter gives you a choice between the standard 1 8th or a truer 1 8th Standard 6 lines 1 8th of a Page If checked defines an eighth of a page as 1 6 lines If you have more than 8 of text on a page however it s possible for a page to calculate as longer than 8 8ths giving inaccurate page counts Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th of a Page If checked defines an eighth of a page as the total allowable lines on a page divided by eight When rounded this equals 7 lines Display Eighth Totals Specifies how Screenwriter should calculate the totals for each Sort grouping If the displayed totals for each scene are added their rounding accumulates too leading to an inaccurate total Totals of All Rounded Eighths If checked rounds the displayed totals for each scene into eighths before adding them For example a group has Scene 5 with 39 lines and Scene 7 with 50 lines in it You ve specified 6 lines per eighth For Scene 5 it calculates 39 divided by 6 6 5 8th
103. Locked Scripts Options The options on this page are only used during production Locked Scripts are covered in the Production Features chapter 163 MOVIE MAGIC 164 SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Production Features Production Rewrites After the final draft of a script is turned in by the screenwriter and the decision to go into production is made copies of what is now the shooting script are distributed to cast and crew Each time a change is made to the script after that everyone needs a copy of the changes Instead of sending out the entire script to everyone again only those pages with changed text are sent the revised pages Revised pages have revision marks next to those lines that have changed or revision marks in the header if most of the page has changed Added A and B and deleted Omitted scenes and pages are indicated also Each time a set of revised pages is distributed they re copied on a different color of paper to instantly distinguish them from other revisions Screenwriter can automatically generate all A Pages A Scenes and revision marks for you and gives you a lot of flexibility over how you d like your revisions to appear To begin generating revised pages you must first Lock the Page Breaks of the script Otherwise any addition or deletion to the script would change the page numbers of the pages following it and everyone would no longer have the same text on the same pages Subsequent
104. MOVIE MAGIC Screenwriter User s Manual for Microsoft Windows The software described in this book is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such license Disclaimer Screenplay Systems Incorporated Ken Schafer and ScriptPerfection Enterprises make no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Movie Magic Screenwriter for Windows is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied Screenplay Systems Incorporated Ken Schafer and ScriptPerfection Enterprises shall have no liability or responsibility to you or any other person or entity with respect to any loss or damage caused by Movie Magic Screenwriter for Windows including but not limited to any loss of profits interruption of service loss of business or consequential damages resulting from the use of such programs Copyright Notice Manual written by Kevin Hindley with contributions by Chris Huntley and Stephen Greenfield Copyright Screenplay Systems Inc 1997 2000 Portions Ken Schafer 1993 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be transmitted reproduced stored in any retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means mechanical electronic magnetic optical chemical manual or other
105. Marks Under the Production Menu select Remove then Current Revision Marks NOTE There are additional Revision Mark settings on both the Locked Scripts page of the Edit Script Formats Menu and on the Revisions page of the Program Options Menu 171 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 172 Locked Scripts Options You can customize Screenwriter s Locked Script Options to work the way you work Under the Format Menu select Edit Script Formats The Editing Script Formats screen displays Click on the Locked Scripts button You ll see the following Menu Editing Script Formats LOCKED SCRIPTS pen Page Break Locking OMITTED THRU Locked Scene Headings To use Scene Heading Locking you need to click on its tab Unlocked Normal Adding or deleting Scene Headings causes scenes to renumber automatically Page numbers also change Locked Adding or deleting Scene Headings causes the existing scene numbers to stay the same and generate A Scenes Page numbers will not stay the same unless Pages are Locked also If you add scenes between Scenes 23 and 24 for example the first added scene becomes 23A the second 23B etc If you add a new scene before the first scene in the script the new first scene is numbered 0A Multi Locked Once you ve locked your script and added omitted scenes you may want to keep the new A Scene Numbering and give any new scenes a new unique number Checking this option enable
106. NG Page Layout Page Layout gives you control over how your script text displays onscreen and prints on the page Changing margins and line spacing can increase or decrease the white space on your pages shortening or lengthening your script s page count This practice is commonly known as cheating Cheating your text by an amount that drastically changes the look of the page is not recommended It will be obvious to experienced script readers that your script doesn t conform to the standard format they expect which times out to 1 minute of screen time per page Choices you make here apply to the currently displayed script You can also set them as the default for new scripts Under the File Menu select Page Layout The Setup Page Layout screen displays Setup Page Layout Margin Values are in inches Spacing Values are in percentage points Top Margin 0 3 P Bottom Margin 0 8 bd Binding Adjustment 0 0 Text Line Spacing 100 gt Blank Line Spacing 100 Script Font Size 100 gt Approx Lines on Page 57 Current Total Page Count 1 E jie qma 10 dace ta tor diver wadis dt De Rty md Short by amin of E lines piama Stretch by a max of E lines 2 I TR Ses Meg dk s end pri tw Iez Het to te sete am and id danae ot MA laon cos da AS A E A I Save as Defaults for New Scripts FT Macintosh Compatibility Mode Y K x cancel 7 Help At the left of the screen
107. PTS information or line spacing cheating Margins and page breaks may appear slightly differently Old ScriptThing Format Used for maintaining compatibility with versions of ScriptThing for DOS prior to 2 10 Same file compatibility issues as ScriptThing DOS listed above Formatted ASCII Used to export to programs which cannot handle any of the other format A plain text format with all the text of the script indented correctly using spaces WordPerfect 5 1 6 x Used to export to WordPerfect 5 1 or greater with margin sets tabs and soft returns WordPerfect w Styles Used to export to WordPerfect 5 1 or greater using Style Sheets in place of margin sets and tabs Rich Text Format Win Used to export to Windows RTF format Compatible with most Windows Word Processing programs Rich Text Format Mac Used to export to Macintosh RTF format Compatible with most Mac Word Processing programs Scriptware Tagged Used to export to Scriptware a Windows script formatting program MS Word for DOS 5 5 Used to export to MS Word for DOS version 5 5 MS Word for Windows Used to export to MS Word for Windows 2 0 or above 6 0 amp 7 0 compatible Final Draft RTF Used to export to Final Draft s Rich Text Format As Final Draft s import feature doesn t support Shots Script Notes or Centered Title elements they are imported as Shots Scene Headings Script Notes 5 Action Centered Titles Action Pu
108. S INSTALLED Swscript ico script icon Thesfile dic Movie Magic Screenwriter Thesaurus theslink dll dynamic link library User_us lxa American English user dictionary WebGrab32 exe WebGrab application Worddos xtd an import export filter Wordweb dot Word Web Wordweb dot Word Web Online Help File Wordweb lso macro programming language file Wordweb lss macro programming language file Wordwin xtd an import export filter Wordwin6 xtd an import export filter Wperf60 xtd an import export filter Wperfect xtd an import export filter Wrs32 dll dynamic link library Wrspack dll dynamic link library Wweb cnt help contents file Wweb gid a help guide file Wweb16 wwd Word Web data file WwebUK wcm Word Web data file WwebUS wcm Word Web data file Xtdlink exe an import filter file Ur eee CANT yorisi Script Format Definition Files SLY Avie Rees Style Sheets used for exporting to MS Word MOE isn hast Filters for importing exporting Dat insti Saved Top Speed Bar Setups The following kinds of files may be in your Scripts subdirectory ESOW i siie icles seeped Your scripts 243 FILES INSTALLED MOVIE MAGIC 244 DK siii Previously saved versions of your scripts SAND oases es Timed Backups P
109. SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING NOTE If you re working in a Locked script with Draft Revision Colors this radio button displays a list of Revision Colors with the current Revision Color showing as in the pictured example Asterisked Pages can be selected by scrolling up to the top of this pull down menu Print Selection should Print in In this window pull down and click on one of these printing order options to select Normal Order Forwards Prints your selection in normal sequential order starting with lower numbered pages scenes This is the default option e Reverse order Backwards Prints your selection in reverse order starting with the highest numbered pages scenes Use for printers that output the pages face up like the HP DeskJet and Canon BubbleJet e Double Sided Prints all the Odd pages in Normal order Then prompts you to re insert the pages Depending on your printer s paper path you may have to experiment with this With most printers just flip the pages and insert them into the manual feed tray Next prints all the Even pages in Reverse order on the other side of the odd pages The result is a script printed on both sides of the paper using about half of the paper normally used Not recommended for submission of Spec Scripts Print to Option Window This drop down menu allows you to select where Movie Magic Screenwriter will send the specific print job It has the following options Print N
110. Scene information only Unchecked each scene in an Act has the full Act Scene information 159 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 160 NOTE The Put in ONLY on 1st Scene of Act setting does not update existing Act Scene Info this will stay the way you entered it unless you manually change it It only changes the appearance of future Act Scene Info you create after changing the setting To change existing Act Scene Info use the Search amp Replace command Starting Number Allows you to enter an Act Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 End of Show is Act Number Lets you specify how many acts are in the current script Screenwriter enters END OF SHOW at the end of the Act Number you specify here instead of END OF ACT Numbering Scheme Lets you choose how Acts are numbered from one of the following schemes ACT A If checked uses letters to number the acts ACT 1 NUMBERS If checked uses numbers to number the acts ACT ONE If checked uses words to number the acts ACT I ROMAN If checked uses Roman numerals to number the acts Scene Information Use Scene Information in Script If checked Scene Information is automatically put in the script directly after Act Information as in Sitcoms Unchecked Scene Information is not added as in MOWs NOTE The Use Scene Information in Script setting does not update existing Act Scene Info t
111. Specifies how Screenwriter should define an 1 8th of a page Historically an 1 8th of a page was one inch 6 lines Nowadays writers are allowing more than 48 lines on a page so Screenwriter gives you a choice between the standard 1 8th or a truer 1 8th Standard 6 lines 1 8th of a Page If checked defines an eighth of a page as 1 6 lines If you have more than 8 of text on a page however it s possible for a page to calculate as longer than 8 8ths giving inaccurate page counts Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th of a Page If checked defines an eighth of a page as the total allowable lines on a page divided by eight When rounded this equals 7 lines Display Eighth Totals by Specifies how Screenwriter should calculate the totals for each Sort grouping If the displayed totals for each scene are added their rounding accumulates too leading to an inaccurate total Totals of All Rounded Eighths If checked rounds the displayed totals for each scene into eighths before adding them For example a group has Scene 5 with 39 lines and Scene 7 with 50 lines in it You ve specified 6 lines per eighth For Scene 5 it calculates 39 divided by 6 6 5 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 7 8ths Scene 7 is calculated as 50 divided by 6 8 33 8ths or 1 and 0 33 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 1 1 8ths The total of Scenes 5 amp 7 calculates as 7 8ths 1 1 8ths 2 0 8ths True Total of All Lines If checked the ac
112. THER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 126 Return to Voice Assign Clicking this button will return the window to its original configuration by showing all original buttons Cancel Clicking this button removes any changes and returns you to the Setup Voices window Read Script This function displays the Table Draft Player window From this window you can play the voices that are assigned to the script Table Draft Players EG i m lt gt Edit a Pronunciation As the script is being read an arrow will appear to the left of the element that is being read Edit a Pronunciation Clicking this button brings up the Edit Pronunciation window Here you can edit the way voices will say a word See the picture above that illustrates the look of this window Change a Voice Clicking this button displays the Setup Voices window Use this window to choose a new voice for a particular element Script Note Commander Movie Magic Screenwriter s unique Script Note Commander gives you instant access to all the Script Notes in the script from one easy window To activate the Script Note Commander simply go to the Tools Menu and click Script Note Commander You will see the following menu though of course the actual available Script Note Colors and Script Note Text will vary depending on your actual script To select a Script Note simply click on it to select multiple Script Notes at the same time hold down the lt SHIFT gt key
113. Text and Substitution Text have default items which are used for all new and imported scripts 61 MOVIE MAGIC EXT P O V FULL SHOT Shot Text BACK TO SCENE ANGLE ON Time of Day MORNING The ampersand 4 tells Screenwriter which letter DAY to underline when it displays the Time of Day menu but is not put into the script AFTERNOON EVENING NIGHT LATER CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER Transitions CUT TO DISSOLVE TO FADE OUT Act Scene Info NEWACT Alias for ACT SAMEACT Alias for ACT NEWSCENE Alias for SCENE Prologue Text TEASER PROLOGUE COLD OPENING End of Act Text END OF ACT END OF SHOW SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Reloading Default User Lists If after changing any of the User Lists you want to go back to the originally installed Defaults Under the Format Menu select Load User Lists from then Original Defaults Alias Text Alias Text allows you to type an abbreviation of text as few as two letters and have Screenwriter automatically expand it to the full text for you The expanded text is formatted with its correct element format For example you could enter I as the Alias for INT in the Initial Scene Text User List When you type I on a blank line followed by a space or appropriate punct
114. This setting will cause the left parenthesis to be outdented one position so that the first line of action will line up with all subsequent lines When you change this Action Indentation setting you will see a sample action line which will display how action will look with the current parenthetical and indentation settings Transitions Transitions are FLUSH RIGHT If checked Transition text is aligned flush with the right margin Unchecked Transition text is aligned flush with the left margin Act Information Put in Final Act as Tag If checked and you ve entered a number greater than 0 in the End of Show is Act Number box below Screenwriter titles the Final Act of the script as a TAG Many Sitcoms and some Episodic Dramas format the final act as a Tag scene meaning that the scene is not essential to the story When the show is sold into syndication reruns on a different network Tag scenes are deleted to allow for more time for commercials Put Act Info in Parenthesis If checked puts Parentheses around the Act Information text as is required in some TV Sitcom formats Center Act Info If checked all Act Information text is centered horizontally between the Act Information margins Unchecked Act Information text starts at the Act Information left margin Put in ONLY on 1st Scene of Act If checked puts Act Scene at the beginning of the first scene in an Act only Subsequent scenes have the
115. With this option enabled when you go to print out pages with Watermarked text it will REQUIRE that you identify who approved this distribution This Distribution Information is stored in a database which requires the 107 TEXT EDITING 108 MOVIE MAGIC separate program DataThing which is available from ScriptPerfection Enterprises at 800 450 9450 for an additional fee With this option NOT enabled when you go to print out pages with Watermarked text it will not require that you identify who approved this distribution Default to having PRINT SIGNATURE PAGE checked If checked prints a Signature Page for Watermarked scripts The Signature Page contains the Distribution List with space for each person to sign that they received the script Unchecked no Signature Page is printed Signature Page Header Text Allows the entering of text to print as the Header on the Signature Page When you exit this menu Screenwriter saves this text to a file with the extension HDR It can then be loaded as the header for other signature pages by clicking the Load Text button and specifying this file Load Text Click this button to load any ASCII text that s been saved as a file into the Signature Page Header Text field Animation Dialog Select to display the Setup Animation Dialogue screen where you can setup the layout of your Animation Recording Scripts These options change the way the a Recording Script prints without affecting th
116. XT etc Display a List Menu of all unique Locations already in the script Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY NIGHT etc Add a Shot element Display a List Menu of Shots ANGLE ON etc Add an Action element Display a List Menu of existing Character Names Add a Character Name element Display a List Menu of Character Extensions V O O S etc 135 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 136 o Dialogue element Add a Parenthetical element j Any element Add a Transition element c1J E Blank Transition element Display a List Menu of Transitions CUT TO etc uje Any element Add a Script Note If Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Editing page of Program Options under the File Menu Tab creates a Parenthetical element when in a Dialogue element Auto Pop Up Character Names Box on Character Name Entry If checked pops up a List of all Character Names in the script when pressing Ene is the first activity in a Character Name element Locations after INT EXT selection If checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Locations List after you enter Scene Heading Initial Text e g INT Unchecked you need to press Enter to display the list Time of Day List after Location Selection If checked QuickType automatically pops up the Time of Day List after you enter Location text e g LAURA S APARTMENT from a pop up L
117. a script with Locked or Multi Locked scenes Screenwriter produces a Run of Omitted Scenes Onscreen it looks something like 3 OMITTED 5 3 THRU THRU 5 5 The 5 in Omitted 5 is provided for manual override control and does not print It allows you to change the ending number of the run if you ever need to Default Omitted Thru text is THRU Omitted And Text Used for a Run of only 2 Omitted Scenes Default Omitted And text is AND A Scene Numbering Scheme Nomal lA Flipped Al Use the following Scene s Number Nulti Lk 141 Miulti Lk 144 Multi Lock Scene between 1 amp 14 is COLA C laa e al Multi Lock Scenes A Multi Lock Pages Revision Mark Tex Revision Mark Right Margm jo5 gt Locked Letter Skip List Use the following Scene s Number This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings inserted into a script with Locked Scene Headings Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading that s inserted between two existing Scene Headings to be numbered with the following scene s number rather than the preceding scene s number With this option selected when you insert a new scene between scenes 1 and 2 it would be scene 2A The next scene would be scene 2B and so on SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES A Scene Numbering Scheme Specifies how A Scenes and A Pages are numbered Normal 1A Places the A Letter After the scen
118. age Break e Or put the cursor at the beginning of the element immediately following the Forced Page Break Press the backspace key 51 MOVIE MAGIC e Or put the cursor at the end of the element immediately before the Forced Page Break Press the gelero key Soft Hyphen A Soft Hyphen can be used to break a word at the end of a line to give the right margin a smoother look If the text is subsequently edited so that the word is no longer broken the soft hyphen is ignored e Put the cursor in the word where you want the Soft Hyphen to be inserted Press u L Ctrl Dash Hard Dash A Hard Dash is similar to a regular dash except that it keeps the two words either side of it together For example inserting a hard dash between set and up in the word set up ensures that the word won t be broken by the end of a line word wrap feature e Put the cursor in the word where you want the Hard Dash to be inserted e Press n Lr J J Ctrl Shift Dash Hard Space A Hard Space is similar to a regular space except that it keeps the two words either side of it together For example inserting a Hard Space between Production and Studio in the phrase Production Studio ensures that the word won t be broken by the end of a line word wrap feature e Put the cursor in the phrase where you want the Hard Space to be inserted Or select the regular space between the two words e Press c
119. ageMargin Settings Allows you to change the Top Bottom Left Right and Inter Card between cards margins Font Button Allows you to specify a different font for the Index Cards than for the script Times New Roman 10 pt is often a good choice as it gets more text on each card than the standard Courier New 12pt Save As Saves Index Card layouts as separate files automatically adding the extension CRD for you Open Loads a previously saved Index Card layout Save as the Default Layout Loads the current settings every time you select Print Index Cards in the future To print all your Index Cards click on the Print All Cards button To print certain cards only 1 Click on the Select Range of Cards to Print button You are returned to Index Card View 2 The cursor changes to an arrow with a box saying Select 1st Card to Print Click on the first card you want to print and it turns a darker gray 3 The cursor text changes to Select last Card to Print Click on the last card you want to print and it also turns darker gray To print one index card only select it as both the 1st and Last card to print The range of cards you selected are sent to the printer Exit Index Card View Exit Click this button to exit Index Card View and shuffle the corresponding Scenes in your script Exiting Index Card View takes you directly to the script scene whose Index Card is located at the top left of the screen in I
120. ailable from Eurofield Information Systems PO Box 305 NORTH RYDE NSW 2113 Australia or on the web at http www eis com au Once the Macquarie Concise dictionary is installed then a new option for it will automatically appear on the Spell Menu under the Word Web item 215 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC Thesaurus F5 Word Web Ctrl F5 Macquarie Concise Count Words Check Homonyms Pause Autocorrection Ctrl Alt S Count Words Counts the number of words in the script Check Homonyms This Menu allows you to check your script for the correct usage of any homonyms or other easily confused words such as their there and they re It will scan the script and point out each instance of any of the selected words and allow you to verify that it is correctly used amp Easily confused word check iol xi Words to Check This is where you will type in new words to add to the Homonym Checker add all instances of confused words each separated by a colon e g then than NOTE If the words that you want checked have different forms such as pair pare and pairs pares you must put in each case individually 216 Add Words Once you ve typed in new words to check with each variant separated by a colon e g then than click this button to add them to the Words List Delete Words If you want to remove a group of word variants simply click on them once in the Words List to the left then click this
121. ally checked unless you select a scene heading by clicking on it All Scenes except OMITTEDs Exports all scenes except those which have been deleted and designated OMITTED in the script There is no breakdown information apart from the scene number to be exported for OMITTED scenes If the script contains no OMITTED scenes this option is grayed out and unselectable Click OK to export to Movie Magic Scheduling Cancel to exit the menu without exporting If you click OK to start exporting Screenwriter begins gathering breakdown data from each scene in the script 187 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC When it s finished you re prompted to enter a filename for the Movie Magic Export file The default is your script s filename with the extension SEX added instead of SCW Click on the Save button to create the export file A message box tells you that the export file was saved and under what filename Animation Production Animation Production scripts have certain unique needs that Screenwriter addresses with the following unique features Multiple Revision Marks With much animation being produced overseas production companies are having to fax revised script pages to their production studios As fax machines transmit in black and white the usual means of identifying sets of revisions by printing them on different colored pages doesn t work To solve this problem a multi revision mark standard has been introduced T
122. ancel the merge close the merged file without saving it To keep a copy of the first file unchanged save your merged file under a different name using Save As under the File Menu NOTE If you merge a document that is tagged it will have squares on either side of the words that are tagged To correct this simply go to the Production menu and click Breakdown In the cascading menu choose Tagging Mode It will reveal all tags Go back into the Production menu through Breakdown and click Tagging Mode again to turn it off This will hide all tags and cause the squares to disappear 21 22 MOVIE MAGIC SCREENWRITER TITLE PAGE Title Page A Title Page is placed before page 1 of the script In a spec script all it needs to contain is the script s title the author s name and an address and contact phone number In a production script what text appears on the title page is determined by the production company Screenwriter s Title Page Publisher allows you to create a title page with a WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get page layout Gridlines are displayed to help you position your text boxes and do not print The title page is automatically attached to the script and is saved with it yet it stays out of your way while writing Title Page Publisher Lx To add or edit text double click on existing text or on the place on the page where you want it to go Ful Poge Zoomed show Me th
123. and alone program by clicking on it in the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window The SpellCheck Language Selection screen appears asking you to select the language of the dictionary you re going to edit American English is selected as the default Select a language and click on OK Next you re asked to Select User Dictionary User Dictionary files end with the extension lxa User_us lxa is selected as the default Select a dictionary and click on OK The User Dictionary Editor screen displays If opening a User Dictionary for the first time the file is empty and ready for you to add words Tab to the Word Editing window on the right of the screen Buttons below it show your options Add Word Type the word the way you want it spelled Note if you enter an incorrect spelling here SpellCheck uses it In effect you re telling SpellCheck that this is the correct spelling Click on Add Word and the word you entered appears in the Dictionary window on the left To allow Screenwriter to Auto Correct a word as you re typing in a script enter both incorrect and correct spellings here separated by a colon For example to Auto Correct Dramatica when it s spelled as Darmatica type in Darmatica Dramatica Note the Auto Correct feature must be turned on for this to have any effect on your typing See Auto Correct in the SpellCheck section of this manual for details It s not necessary to type a space either before o
124. and click on an Arrow button to move it gt Moves selected Branch Targets from the Available list to the Current Branch Point gt gt Moves All Branch Targets from the Available list to the Current Branch Point lt Moves selected Branch Targets from the Current Branch Point to the Available list lt lt Moves All Branch Targets from the Current Branch Point to the Available list Build The Branch Point Exits this menu and builds a Branch Point in the current position in the script The Branch Targets in the right list are automatically entered in the Branch Point for you Build And Perform Branch Exits this menu and builds a Branch Point in the current position in the script The Branch Targets in the right list are automatically entered in the Branch Point for you It then performs the branch up to the currently highlighted Branch Target Create New Branch Target Opens a Text Window for entering the text of a new Branch Point which is automatically added to the script It will also be added to the current Branch Point and numbered SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Graph Branch Points Screenwriter can display a flow chart of your script s interactive links to visually show you how your story is progressing Under the File Menu select Graph Branch Points The following screen displays The current Branch Target is displayed in the center Oval graphic All the Branch Points that interact with it are display
125. aptop 193 larysand scw 245 Last Two Character Names 43 LATER 62 Law and Order 245 law amp ordr scw 245 Learn 90 Leave You in a Blank Script 18 137 Left 24 Left Column 212 Left Justified 24 SCREENWRITER Left Margin of Bottom Cont d 159 left parenthesis 195 Left to Right 25 Left Right 33 Left Click 80 lengthening your script 95 Let Partner do it 116 228 Letter Spacing 107 Letters 98 Line 16 Line Spacing 155 List 101 List Characters in Each Scene 113 182 List files of type List Non Speaking Characters 113 183 Listening 121 Load 153 248 Load Script Format 71 Load Script Formats 212 Load Text 108 Load User List from Script 60 Load User Lists from 60 212 Load Voice Association File 123 226 Loading a Script Format 35 Loading a Television Template 37 Loading a Title Page 26 Loading Locations Character Names or Transitions from Screenwriter scripts 60 Loading User Lists 60 Location 41 49 50 56 58 60 102 110 112 133 134 135 136 180 182 235 Location 112 Locations after INT EXT selection 136 Lock Current Rev Marks 188 223 Lock Dialogue Numbering 223 Lock The Script 217 Locked 174 Locked Headers 56 196 224 Locked Letter Skip List 176 Locked Page Breaks 173 Locked Pages 217 218 219 220 Locked Revision Mark 239 Locked Revision Marks 188 189 223 Locked Scene Headings 172 173 218 Locked Scripts 155 171
126. ar fe Select Voice for Shots Iof x Edit Vocal Characteristics Female Voices Male Voices Mike Edit a Pronunciation Mike in Hall Mike in Space ie in Stadium Add New Voice am _ AddNewVaee Delete Voice Edit Voice Name w R What Is Help Play Sample Return to Voice Assign 124 SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES The window on the left has voices that are divided into two categories Female Voices and Male Voices Play Sample Clicking this button plays the voice that you selected in the Voice window The voice will say a brief introduction Select Voice Clicking this button will assign the voice the user selected in the Voice window to a particular element Speak Silently Clicking this button will mute the voice of this character even though Screenwriter will still read it This will create an appropriate pause to allow a human actor character to read that part aloud The purpose of this feature is to allow a particular actor character to read interactively with the program to help them rehearse and memorize their lines Do NOT Read Clicking this button will not assign a voice to the chosen element Setup Available Voices Clicking this button changes the configuration of the window by adding options that allow you to add or modify available voices Edit Vocal Characteristics Clicking this button displays a window that allows you to control the Pitch and Speed of the voice
127. aracter Lists e Remove Removes Character Lists from the script Only available once lists have been generated Otherwise it s grayed out Mark One Character s Dialogue Displays a list of your script s Character Names for your selection A selected Character s dialogue appears in red in your script and in color printing and with a gray background in black and white printing Useful for printing out a script for an actor with his her dialogue highlighted Search Menu Search F2 Search amp Replace Alt F2 Search Again Shift F2 Change Character Name Search Displays the Search amp Replace Menu with the Replace parameters grayed out Enter the text to Search for and define the search parameters Search amp Replace Displays the Search amp Replace Menu Enter the text to Search for the text to Replace it with and define the Search amp Replace parameters Search Again or Search amp Replace Again Repeats or continues the previous Search Replace command starting from the current cursor position Change Character Name Displays a Search amp Replace Menu modified for Character Names only The Search for box contains a list of available Character Names to choose from Choose one enter the new Name in the Replace with box and define the Search amp Replace parameters 213 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 214 Goto Menu Top Bottom Page Ctrl G Scene Act Scene Info Previous Scene Heading
128. archive file but cannot accidentally modify it and nullify his her first use registration For more information on First Use com visit their website at http firstuse com SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Program Options Displays a Menu which allows you to customize how Screenwriter works Display Options Shows options which allow you to customize how Screenwriter looks onscreen Hide Elements on Screen Shows options which allow you to hide unhide script Elements Script Notes by color or type and Non Printing text Exit Exits Screenwriter prompting to you save any open scripts 1 3 lt FileName gt The File History List with names of recently saved scripts Select one to re open it Edit Menu Undo Alt BkSp Reda Ci FARK Sp Cut Shift Del Copy Ctrl lIns Delete Paste Shift lns Paste Special Copy to Cut to gt Select All Ctrl Select Special Turn off Block Add Forced Page Break Shift Enter Remove Forced Page Add Hard Return Alt Enter Add Dialogue Paragraph Ctrl Alt D Convert case gt Change Text Color Normal WP Mode Ctrlew Edit Scene Description Undo Takes a step back undoing the last text edit performed This option is grayed out unselectable if Screenwriter cannot Undo the changes Redo Restores what you just undid Only available immediately after you ve performed an Undo prior to making any more changes NOTE If Undo and Redo are not visible go to P
129. ards click on the Scroll 1 or Scroll buttons 28 SCREENWRITER INDEX CARDS If you select Vertical Index Cards the Scroll button scrolls left by a column of Index Cards The Scroll J button scrolls right by a column of Index Cards Horizontal Index Cards To display your Index Cards horizontally reading by row from left to right click the Horizontal button on the SpeedBar Vertical Index Cards To display your Index Cards vertically reading by column from top to bottom click the Vertical button on the SpeedBar Add an Index Card A new blank Index Card can be added by clicking on the Add button on the bottom SpeedBar In Shuffle Mode a New card is Inserted before the index card displayed at the upper left corner of the screen In Outline Mode a New card is inserted before the currently selected index card or the card containing the cursor Write an Index Card To write and edit the Index Cards you need to be in Outline Mode If it s not already selected select it by clicking on the Outline button at the bottom right of the SpeedBar Using the mouse click on an Index Card Click on the top right box of the card to enter Scene Heading information Type INT or EXT the Location and the Time of Day You don t have to enter the full Scene Heading text You can enter any text you find useful in outlining your story such as The big showdown scene To enter text in the main body of
130. are in 7 INT HELMER S STUDY SAME TIME Helmer is distraught He paces in confusion until he hears Nora s footsteps approaching She comes back with her cloak and hat and a small bag which she puts on a chair near the table INORA No I can receive nothing from a stranger HELMER Nora can I never be anything HELMER Nora Nora not now Wait till more than a stranger to you tomorrow Nora takes her bag in hand NORA putting on her coat I cannot Svend the night in a strange man s room NORA Ah Torvald the most whonderful Cards 8 8 S A Seron Scroll Add Horiz Vertical Exit Cancel Print Mode Outline Shuffle Each card represents one scene Across the top of each card are two boxes the leftmost box contains the Scene Number while the rightmost box contains the Scene Heading Beneath is the scene text comprised of Action and Character Names and Dialogue if you ve entered them in your script Across the bottom of the screen is the Index Card SpeedBar enabling you to Resize the Index Cards You can change the number and the size of the Index Cards displayed on Screen To select the resize level click on one of the buttons located on the left side of the SpeedBar You can display Four Six Nine or Twelve Index Cards at a time This is for display purposes only and doesn t affect how the index cards print Scroll by Row To Scroll up or down by a row of Index C
131. ast Members Greenery Vehicles etc can be moved between Category windows by dragging and dropping Click on OK to exit and save your changes Cancel to discard changes and exit Secondary sort order allows you to specify how you want the scenes sorted within the Primary groupings of Interior VS Exterior Location Time of Day or Characters For example Interior VS Exterior as the Primary sort and Script Order as a Secondary sort would give this kind of breakdown EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 1 2 1 1 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 2 1 8 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 2 3 8 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 2 3 5 8 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 3 5 2 8 1 2 8 111 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 112 With Location as the Secondary sort the same script would breakdown with the locations grouped together alphabetically EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 2 1 1 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 2 1 8 INTERIOR 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 2 3 5 8 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 5S3 2 8 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 2 3 8 1 2 8 Secondary Sort by Script Order First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Exterior scenes before Interiors within each group
132. at each time you want LAURA With SmartTab enabled the next time you press then L the name LAURA is automatically highlighted for you NOTE Without SmartTab enabled pressing followed by a letter always highlights the first name starting with that letter If you ve added a name starting with that letter to the Character Name User List the User List name always appears highlighted See User Lists below By Last Name used in Scene SmartTab Plus If checked this allows the quick entry of the last Character Names used in that scene using the key Press followed by a letter and the last Character Name you used starting with that letter in that scene is highlighted in the pop up Character Name pop up list Press Ene to enter the name in your script e Alphabetically User List Order If checked pressing followed by a letter always highlights the first name starting with that letter If you ve added a name starting with that letter to the Character Name User List the User List name always appears highlighted See User Lists below Enable QuickType Entry If checked this allows the automatic display of pop up lists of Character Names Locations Times of Day etc If you Type QuickType will FADE IN Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu or any Transition INT EXT etc If you Press QuickType will while in Blank Action Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu Transition INT EXT etc b
133. ate random events Simply put the frequency 1 out of in place of the sign and the variable will be true with that frequency Thus the statement gt IF YOU BUY A LOTTO TICKET AND lt RANDOM 6 gt THEN would make you a winner 1 out of every 6 times you play You may include one or more Variables in the Active part of your User Activity as in gt IF YOU lt HAVE MONEY gt AND YOU OFFER TO PAY FOR THE DAMAGES THEN YOU DON T lt HAVE MONEY gt Note that this Activity statement ends in a period rather than the word THEN or AND That tells Screenwriter that the Activity statement is only setting variables and should not affect the processing of any text or BRANCH POINTS following it If you end an Activity statement with either THEN or AND all text and branch points between this activity line and the next activity line with the words ENDIF should only be processed if that starting activity is TRUE Let s take a look at our DUNGEON GAME again this time including variables in the activity lines 1 DUNGEON The dungeon is cold and damp Dangerous looking fungus grows from the dank walls encrusted with centuries of lime deposit There are two open cells visible The main corridor of the dungeon continues to the right vanishing behind the second cell gt IF YOU LOOK IN FIRST CELL THEN The bones of a hapless prisoner lie where they fell from rusty manacles on the wa
134. ays the Set Screen Colors Menu where you can change the colors used to display Screenwriter and all other Windows programs Select the item to change by clicking its radio button then click on the Set Color button and choose a color Window Background Changes the color of Screenwriter s page behind the text unless you are using different colored revision pages in a Production script Text Color Changes the color of a script s normal text Highlight Color Changes the color of the text editing highlight block Highlighted Text Changes the color of the highlighted text When displaying colored text within the script Show the Color as the Background Displays colored text with only the background colored not the text Color the actual Text itself Displays colored text with the actual text in color 152 SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Pressing the OK button applies any color changes and returns to your script Pressing Cancel ignores any color changes and returns to your script Pressing the Use Windows Colors button cancels any color changes and resets Screenwriter s display colors to the Windows default Setup Font for Menus Displays the Setup Display Font Size Menu This is the same menu presented to set initial font choices at installation It allows you to choose a font to display the text in Screenwriter s menus and windows It doesn t affect the text of your scripts Choose a font a size an
135. be able to paste text from another application on the slave computer Likewise If the slave invokes the paste text before copying or cutting text from the script the SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES program will try and paste whatever is in the Masters clipboard from a previous application into the script with unpredictable results IMPORTANT While all of the keys listed below will work in slave mode some of them may cause pop up menu s to appear on the master s computer if the master has QuickType text entry turned on In order for the slave to use the Quick Key s to change elements efficiently the master must go into the File menu and change the Program Options Clicking the QuickType button allows the master to turn off all Auto Pop up and Running List options This enables the slave to use the Quick Keys 119 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 120 Other Keys Tab Key Puts in Character Names regardless of the element you are starting from Enter Key Takes you from one element type to another i e pressing lt ENTER gt while in Character Name will take you to dialogue while in Transition will take you to Scene Heading etc Left Parenthesis Key Puts you in a Parenthetical when pressed while in Dialogue This key adds a Character Extension if pressed while in a Character Name CTRL B Turns Bold on off CTRL E Puts you into a Scene Heading with EXT and a space already typed in for you CTRL I Puts you
136. ber of each referenced Branch Target If checked each Branch Target s page number automatically prints on the next line after its appearance Unchecked no corresponding page number is printed Start Each Branch Target at the top of a Page If checked breaks to a new page when a new Branch Target starts Unchecked normal page breaks occur Display Options To customize the way Screenwriter displays onscreen make changes to the Display Options Under the File Menu select Display Options then click on an option to select it A checkmark indicates that an option is in effect Only Show Top Menu lf checked temporarily hides all SpeedBars Bottom Status Bar etc Only the Main Menu Bar is displayed Select again to re display hidden items Top Speedbar If checked displays the top SpeedBar with its icons for commonly used commands Unchecked the top Speedbar does not display Bottom Status Bar Show Status Bar If checked displays the Bottom Status Bar with its line page and scene information Unchecked the Bottom Status Bar does not display Scene Count If checked displays Scene Number information for the scene the cursor s in e g Scn 2 of 5 on a button on the right side of the Bottom Status Bar Clicking on this button displays the Scene Pilot which allows you to go to any scene in the script Act Scene Info lIf checked displays Act Scene Information on a button on the right side of the Bottom Status Bar Clic
137. ble Warning Prompts Expert Users Only 143 Disconnect 229 Display Block Editing Panel when you choose any Block Selection Button 149 Display Eighth Totals by 182 Display Eighth Totals 112 INDEX Display Headers Footers On Screen 143 Display Notes in Script 48 161 Display Open File Menu 18 Display Options 150 209 Display Options 239 Display Page Break Type on Screen 143 Display Screen Sized Retrieve List 18 137 Display the Open File Menu 137 Displaying Multiple Windows 17 DISSOLVE TO 62 Distrib List 107 Distribution List 107 108 Do Not Break Action 162 Do Not Break Dialogue 162 Do not read 123 125 225 226 dofolivs scw 244 Don t print Revision Marks on each line 145 ayir Don t put and at end start of broken action 143 Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification 198 200 Don t Loop Colors 219 Double Click 80 Dr Quinn Medicine Woman 244 Draft Date 218 Drag and Drop 27 81 83 Drag and Drop cursor 83 E a should break Elements in middle Drag n Drop should break Elements in the Middle 149 Dragging and Dropping 31 82 173 187 Dramatica 60 Draw Boxes 33 drewcary scw 244 drquinn scw 244 Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue 36 Dual Column Margins 54 Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue 36 52 E Each Group on New Page 113 183 Edit a Pronunciation 126 228 Edit an Index Card 31 Edit Brea
138. blish to Internet This feature saves your script as an HTML file and allows you to upload it to an FTP site In order to upload your script you will need to know the URL user name and password 3 Enter a new File Name for the exported file Screenwriter automatically adds the correct export file extension according to your chosen export format 4 Click on OK to save the export file Importing a Screenwriter Export script To import a Screenwriter export file into another program check that program s manual for Importing instructions If that doesn t help call the program s Technical Support number and ask how best to do it 205 EXPORTING SCRIPTS MOVIE MAGIC The script must have been exported from Screenwriter in a format readable by the other program Screenplay Systems is only able to provide technical support on the export side of this procedure Unfortunately we have no control over how another company s programs deal with importing Cut and Paste Exporting You can export from Screenwriter to another Windows program on the same computer using Cut and Paste 1 Open the Windows program you want to export to Open a file to export to or open a new file 2 Open Screenwriter and open the script you want to export from 3 Using the mouse select the text to export 4 Under the Edit menu select Copy 5 Go to the other Windows program 6 Under the Edit menu select Paste All of Screenwriter s for
139. c Type in the underlined QuickLetter of your selection and it s entered for you For example type e for EXT to enter EXT and the correct spacing following it Type v for Nevermind to Cancel or press E Next enter a Location Location To enter a Location that s already been used in this script press Ever A Pop up list displays with your script s unique Location Text options Type the first letter of the Location or if more than one have the same first letter type enough letters of the location until the location you want is highlighted and press Ene The Location is entered for you complete with correct spacing Next enter a Time of Day Time of Day Enter a Time of Day by pressing Enter after typing your Location A Pop up list displays with Time of Day options MORNING Day AFTERNOON EVENING NIGHT LATER CONTINUDUS MOMENTS LATER Nevermind Esc Type in the underlined QuickLetter of your selection and it s entered for you For example type d for DAY to enter DAY and the correct spacing and dashes before it Your Time of Day is entered and the cursor moves to a new Action element 41 MOVIE MAGIC Action Type your characters descriptions and activities in the Action element Press to go to a new paragraph of Action Press twice to go to a new Scene Heading element Press to go to a Character Name element Character Name To crea
140. ccepted standard for Screenplays Every Page Header Text will be printed on every page including Page One Every Page Except first Page of Scene Header Text will not be printed on the first page of a new Scene or Act Used in some TV shows as the Act Scene Information is already displayed Align Headers Items in Header Text can be aligned flush with the right margin flush with the left margin or a combination of the two Click on the appropriate radio button to select Flush Left at Margin Aligns Header Text flush with the Left margin using the default Left margin selected in Page Layout Enter a new Left margin for Header Text only if desired Accepts values in 1 10 increments between 0 3 and 8 Flush Right at Margin Aligns Header Text flush with the Right margin using the default Right margin selected in Page Layout Enter a new Right margin for Header Text only if desired This is Screenwriter s default for Header Text alignment Accepts values in 1 10 increments between 0 3 and 8 To have some items align flush left and others align flush right insert a Flush Right code between them For example Act Page would place Act 2 flush left and Page 3 flush right on the same line Blank Lines following Header Select the number of blank lines to insert between the Header Text and the page s first line of script text or Top Scene Continued Default is 1 blank line Preview Click
141. cellaneous Options Script Breakdown Sheets W List Characters in Each Scene Sorted Alphabetically C Script Order Secondary Sort by Script Order C Speaking Characters First C User List Order J Inteor ys Esteros W List Non Speaking Characters Location I Each Group on New Page Time of Day I Graph Breakdown Jo Print tadged Items x Cancel Help Breakdowns can be sorted before printing using Primary and Secondary Sort criteria Sort Breakdown Primarily by Script Order Prints a breakdown of all scenes in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior Lists all the EXT scenes followed by all the INT scenes Location Lists by Location in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that take place in the same Location Time of Day Lists by Time of Day in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that have the same Time of Day Characters All Lists Every Character Name in the script in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Some Lists Selected Character Names in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Checking this radio button and pressing OK brings up a Select Names screen Click on a name to select it and Double Click on the top bar of the Select Names screen to return to the Production Breakdowns menu SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING NOTE If
142. cene Character List Generation Menu e Remove Removes any previously generated Scene Character Lists NOTE When you have generated lists each time you go to the Print Menu it will normally ask you if you want to regenerate your lists Select YES when you ve added removed characters from any scenes otherwise you can select NO If you don t want it to prompt you in this manner then uncheck the option Prompt to Regenerate Lists before Printing which is found on the Scene Character List Generation Menu Animation Locking Shows you options for Animation Production Features Print Numbering in Script If checked Displays and Prints the dialogue speech numbering in the script as well as in the Animation Recording Script report A checkmark displays next to Print Numbering in Script To turn the display of Numbering off click on it again Setup Numbering Layout This setup window allows you to control the way Animation Dialogue is printed Lock Current Rev Marks Locks the Current Revision Marks and increases the Revision Mark Level Unlock One Rev Mark Level Removes the last Locked Revision Marks and decreases the Revision Mark Level Lock Dialogue Numbering Locks the Dialogue Numbering so that any new speeches are added as A Numbers If Dialogue is already Locked it will Multi Lock the numbering so new speeches are added as AA Numbers Unlock Dialogue Numbering Decreases Dialogue Locking from AA Numbering to A
143. ck on any item to get a brief Help screen What s This Click this function or Shift F1 and it will add a question mark to the mouse s arrow icon Once you click on a Movie Magic Screenwriter feature it will display a brief description of its functionality Memory Available Displays the entire system memory available to Windows including the swap file if any About Displays Screenwriter Version information and Registration information if you entered it at Installation Web Resources Includes a list of useful World Wide Web links to assist you with using Screenwriter and screenwriting in general Edit User links command under the Web Resources allows you to enter your own screenwriting links for easy access 231 MOVIE MAGIC 232 SCREENWRITER COMMAND KEYS Appendix E Command Keys These are the default command key settings in Screenwriter Many of them can be changed using Program Options under the File Menu Special Keys These are the only special keys you need to use to write with Screenwriter tab Tab takes you to the Character Name element from any other element Enter takes you to any other element except Character Name for example pressing A while in Character Name takes you to Dialogue while in Transition it takes you to Scene Heading etc Left parenthesis takes you to Parenthetical if pressed while in Dialogue or Character Extension if pressed while in Character Name Formatting
144. cked wraps parenthetical text so that the second line text lines up under the first line text and not the parenthesis Pushes wrapped text over by one character space Parentheticals are Separate Element If checked puts Parenthetical text on its own line above the Dialogue and below the Character Name Unchecked puts Parenthetical text on the same line as Dialogue Scene Headings Time of Day Dashes Lets you choose how many dashes should be placed between Location and Time of Day in Scene Headings when using QuickType pop up menus Enter a number between 0 and 9 The number entered in Spaces determines how many spaces are placed before and after the Time of Day Dash es Number of Spaces after INT EXT Determines how many character spaces are placed between INT or EXT and the Location when using QuickType pop up menus Enter a number between 0 and 9 NOTE The Time of Day Dashes and Number of Spaces after INT EXT settings do not update existing Scene Headings They only change the appearance of future Scene Headings you create after changing the settings To change existing Scene Headings use the Search amp Replace command Scene Numbers Allows you to choose how and when Scene Numbers are displayed onscreen and printed if you have Scene Numbers set to print Left If checked displays left Scene Numbers Right If checked displays right Scene Numbers Starting Allows you to enter a Scene Number to start numbe
145. cked letters thus scene 23AD would be reported as DA23 Printer Options Page Print Bottom Continued at Fixed Line If checked the Bottom Scene Continueds print at the same position on each page one line below the page s Bottom Margin Unchecked the Bottom Scene Continueds are printed two lines below the final line of text on each page This results in the Continueds appearing in different positions on each page Print MORE at page end when dialogue isn t broken but character is first to talk on next page If checked the Dialogue of a character who has two speeches in a row separated by an Action element has MORE printed when a page break separates the two Dialogue elements The MORE prints but does not display onscreen This non standard format is not recommended for Spec Scripts SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Substitute for Courier New when printing Allows you to substitute a different font for printing than the default Courier New which doesn t print as dark as some other fonts Darken Courier New TrueType Font Allows Screenwriter to overprint the default Courier New font for darker printing Use this if the other fonts you have don t produce better results than Courier New Experiment with the slide bar to get the best results Using this option slows down printing especially under Windows 95 Setup View as Index Card Printing Button Pressing this button displays the Setup Index Card Print
146. comes 38B NOTE Screenwriter displays different page breaks differently Normal and A Page Breaks display as a series of dashes e g Forced Page Breaks and Locked Page Breaks both display as a double dashed line e g Fixed Page Breaks display as a single unbroken line e g The descriptive text contained within the page break line refers to the page following it It only displays if Display Page Break Type on Screen is checked on the Misc page of Program Options under the File Menu Multi Locked Once you ve locked your script and added A Pages you may want to keep the new A Page Numbering and give any new pages a new unique number Checking this option enables you to do so 173 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 174 Any new page added between existing A Pages has a number added after it For example a page added after page 94B would be numbered 94B1 the next one 94B2 etc If a new page is added between a normal page and an A Page it is entered using the Multi Lock Character For example a page added after page 67 would become A67 using the default Multi Lock Character Scene Omitted Text If you completely delete a Scene the text of the Scene Heading and the Action Character Names Dialog etc in a Locked or Multi Locked script Screenwriter enters the text specified here into the blank Scene Heading Default text is OMITTED Omitted Thru Text If you delete a series of adjacent Scenes in
147. copy of any previously saved version with the same name The suffix SCW is changed to BK for the previous version If you need to go back to that previous version load the BK file 1 Under the File Menu select Open 17 BASIC INFORMATION MOVIE MAGIC 18 2 Change the File Type from Screenwriter Scripts to Prev Saved Script 3 Select from the list of available BK files changing the subdirectory drive or file type if necessary 4 Click on OK to open the file Now both versions of the file the old BK and the latest SCW are open Switch between them under the Window Menu To keep a copy of the BK version save it under a different name for example if the filename is OSCAR BK save it as OSCAR1 SCW Leaving its name with the suffix BK allows it to be overwritten next time you save which is not what you want Opening a Script automatically at Startup If you don t want to go to a New file each time Screenwriter opens there are several other Startup options To choose one 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 Click on the Startup Files button Select an option Leave You in a Blank Script opens a New blank script file Display Screen Sized Retrieve List displays a large Open File menu showing Screenwriter SCW suffix files in your default Script subdirectory Display Open File Menu displays the standard Open File Menu Retrieve Last Script you worked on opens the last script yo
148. correct password When checking this option you ll be prompted to type the word YES to confirm your decision to put passwords on all scripts When saving an Allow Viewing Printing without Password option lets you make the script viewable and printable to anyone without the password if checked They won t be able to edit or save the script When opening a script start at last saved position If checked it opens a script exactly as it was onscreen when you last saved it Unchecked it opens at the top of the script Use SCW Extension Movie Magic Screenwriter can use either the extension SCW or the extension STW for all its script files The only problem with using SCW is that Windows itself uses that extension for Screen savers and they will thus display with the wrong icon This is merely an aesthetic consideration but for less confusion we recommend using STW With this option enabled when a script is saved it will automatically be given the extension SCW Use STW Extension Movie Magic Screenwriter can use either the extension SCW or the extension STW for all its script files The only problem with using SCW is that Windows itself uses that extension for Screen savers and they will thus display with the wrong icon This is merely an aesthetic consideration but for less confusion we recommend using STW With this option enabled when a script is saved it will automatically be given the extension STW
149. cript with locked page breaks Put the cursor at the End of the Element that you want the page break to follow Press shift J Ere Or under the Edit Menu select Add Forced Page Break At the Page Break screen that displays select the type of page break NOTE Adding or removing Locked Page Breaks changes the numbering of all following pages Adding a Fixed Page Break will only change the numbering of Fixed or Flexed pages Production Breakdowns Screenwriter can automatically generate and print or export a variety of Production Breakdown sheets To access these reports Under the File Menu select Print Click the Production Breakdowns radio button Click OK The Production Breakdowns Print Menu displays 179 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC Production Breakdowns xi Sort Breakdown Primarily by Calculate Eighths by C Script Order C Standard 6 lines 1 8th i Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th C Location Display Eighths Totals by POG C Total of All Rounded Eighths C Characters All Some True Total of All Lines C Movie Magic Scheduling File C Script Breakdown Sheets SEE SEES IV List Characters in Each Scene Sorted Alphabetically Secondary Sort by F Script Order E Script Order C Speaking Characters First Interior VS Exterior C User List Order phates List Non Speaking Characters C Location F Each Group on New Page C Time of Day FT Graph Breakdown J Prnttad
150. cter Name or Parenthetical element press Enter The cursor moves to a new Dialogue element 2 Type your character s dialogue 3 Press Ene 4 The cursor moves to a new Action element 44 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Second Dialogue Paragraph To split up a long paragraph of Dialogue into smaller chunks you can enter it as two or more shorter paragraphs of Dialogue To enter a second paragraph of Dialogue press E twice to put in two hard returns Parenthetical With the cursor anywhere in a Dialogue element press left parenthesis Or if Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Editing page of Program Options under the File Menu press e A Parenthetical element is created at the cursor location If the cursor is at the beginning of a Dialogue element the Parenthetical is placed between the Character Name and the Dialogue If the cursor is in the middle of a Dialogue element the Dialogue is broken by the Parenthetical Type the Parenthetical text and press Enter The cursor moves to the Dialogue element following the Parenthetical Type a Left Parenthesis in Dialogue as Text To type in Dialogue as text instead of creating a Parenthetical element press cuJ This is actually typed by pressing crt Lee J 9 Transition With the cursor at the beginning of any blank element type any Transition text ending in to Screenwriter automatically for
151. d Enter C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts lt File Name gt TAG Click on the Export button to save the Export file Exit Scriptware Now follow the Direct Import instructions above 202 SCREENWRITER IMPORTING SCRIPTS Importing a non Windows Word Processor script To import a script from a non Windows Word Processor check that program s manual for Exporting instructions If that doesn t help call the Word Processing program s Technical Support number and ask how to produce either e A Rich Text Format RTF file preferred or e An ASCII file with formatting and line feeds or Hard Returns at the end of each line If there s no option to save directly as Text Only or ASCII there s usually an option to Print to a File Then follow the Direct Import instructions above Cleaning up Imported Scripts Screenwriter may require you to do some cleaning up after importing a script To correct a mis recognized Element place the cursor anywhere in the element Click on the Current Element Window in the center of the Top SpeedBar and select the desired Element If the imported script was in TV format you may have to reset the script s formats See Choosing a Script Format for more details You ll also need to put back in the forced Page Breaks between scenes and re enter the Act and Scene Information Unfortunately due to a lack of standardization in TV formats the import function is unable to recognize all
152. d boldface if you wish Reset clears your changes and restores Screenwriter s default display font of Arial 9 point Edit Top Speed Bar Displays the SpeedBar Editor where you can change which shortcut icons display on the top SpeedBar The program comes with two pre defined bar setups which can be loaded by clicking on the Load Button FULL800 BAR is optimized for a 800x600 display FULL640 BAR is optimized for a 640x480 display You can create many custom bar layouts Customize the bar the way you prefer then save it under a new name using the Save As button Edit the SpeedBar First choose an Icon size and whether you d like 1 or 2 rows To set up a 2 row bar that can roll between one amp two rows select 2 Rows of Icons To switch between displaying 1 and 2 rows use the Roll Up Down Button Bar This button is found in the Miscellaneous section Make sure you place it on the first row If you don t it will disappear when you click it because the second row will contract Add a button to the SpeedBar Select the appropriate Category in the Speedbar Editor With the mouse drag the button from the Commands window up to where you d like it to display on the top SpeedBar Remove a button from the SpeedBar Use the mouse to drag the button from the SpeedBar to anywhere off the bar and release it The Current Element window is the one item that cannot be removed from the SpeedBar Once the SpeedBar is set up the way you prefer
153. d forth e The ability to synchronize scripts CONNECTING TO IPARTNER When you run iPartner you ll see the following screen which displays your unique IP Address and Port Number iPartner tm x Each computer that is connected to the internet has an IP Address which is used by the other computers to know where to send messages Your computer s IP Address is 192 168 3 1 For your computer to be able to communicate with your partner s either 1 he or she needs to enter Enter Partner s IP in your IP address or 2 you need to enter Let Partner do it his or her P Address Which do you want to do Trouble Shooting Connect on Port 2200 Cancel R2 IP Address In order to connect with your partner one of you will need to know the other s IP If you have a fixed IP address if connected by network DSL or Cable Modem you can 115 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 116 give the IP address to your writing partner and they will be able to use that address anytime they want to connect to you If you are connecting via a Dial up connection meaning your computer calls your Internet Provider every time you wish to connect to the internet your IP will change each time you connect This means one of you will need to communicate the other s IP address to the other person every time You can do this by one of the following ways e Calling the person on the telephone e Sending the IP through v
154. d press kero L Control dash Each Group on New Page If checked starts a new page for each new group Graph Breakdown lIf checked prints the breakdown as a chart instead of as text All the same information is included A sample graphic breakdown follows Script Order ALAN PA DOLLY ed LESUE MAN ed MAN S VOICE D MARIE ad MAXWELL ad MURDOCK AA SALLY ad STAN TECHNICIAN 1 Print Tagged Items If checked prints or exports all tagged items along with the other breakdown information 183 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 184 Breakdown Tagging Breakdown Tagging allows you to mark or tag items in your script cast members extras makeup props stunts vehicles etc and assign them to certain Breakdown categories Screenwriter can output them to either printed Breakdown Sheets or to an export file that can be read directly into Movie Magic Scheduling Breakdown Sheets give you breakdown information for each scene categorized for transfer to individual production strips Exporting your Breakdown items directly to Movie Magic Scheduling saves you time and the opportunity for error that copying your Breakdown Sheets to production strips by hand involves With Scheduling you can drag and drop your strips loaded automatically from your Screenwriter breakdown export file to arrange the most efficient schedule possible Once you have your schedule it can be expor
155. ddeeduheatenstandeced sabe ae 188 MultiplesRevision Mark Saren oeda iere R a a EE E EO E eee eae 188 Animation Recording Scripts or eea Teie a e a a SEE EE EEE EEEE oE 189 Displaying Numbered Dialogue cocooooococcoccnnconoononocononnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnonnononononnnnnnaninns 191 Appendix A TROUBLESHOOTING iiss ices ciocrioacioiiacn citando cti cad ada cerati 193 Known Hardware Software Problems coocccccoccnccoconcnncononncnnonncnncnncnnnononnnoncnnnoncnnncninns 193 Common Technical Support Questions and ANSWeTS ooccccccocononoonnnnnnnnnonnononocononnnnnninnananoss 193 Production Problems and Solutions ooooooococcccccnononononononnnnnnonnononnnnnnonononnnnononnnnnnnnnnannanonoss 195 Appendix B IMPORTING SCRIPTS sii diia 197 Preparing a Script for Importing aniren eene ae ea paraa A a naeia e E Saeta 197 Direct Importacion 197 Cut and Paste IM port seii ie Sare e es E raa aE Eaa e oa 199 Importing a WordPerfect 5 0 for DOS cococccoconononononononononininoninoninoninoninincncncncncncnininos 201 Importing a Movie Master SCTIPt ococccccccoconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananess 201 Importing a Windows Word Processor SClipt occmocooooooocconnnonnonononnnonnnnononnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnns 201 Importing a Scriptware for DOS SCriPt ooooooconccccconcononoconnnnnnnncnnononnnnnnonononnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnanos 202 Importing a Scriptware for Windows SClipt occcocooooocnccnncnonnonononnnonnnnononnonanonnnnnnnnnnn
156. de select a selected block of text e Left Click the mouse anywhere on the page e Or press a movement key alone without the key Moving Text Screenwriter offers these methods of moving text around in your script e Cut and Paste A two step method Text is removed from one location and placed on the Clipboard then Pasted into a new location e Copy and Paste A two step method Text is left in its original location and placed on the Clipboard then Pasted into a new location e Drag and Drop A one step method Direct movement of text without cutting or copying 81 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Cutting and Pasting with the Mouse Pasting has two methods based on how much text you select If you select a word and paste it into a line it will merge with that element If you select more than a word and paste it into an element it will insert the line and any adjoining elemental groups and retain its own element value e g if you cut a line of dialog it will paste the dialogue and character name into your script and break the existing element in two or appear in front of the current element Whether you break an existing element in half or paste in the front of the element depends on whether you have this feature enabled in the Program Option screen Select File gt Program Options gt Mouse gt Drag n Drop to enable the break Elements in the Middle feature e Select the text to be moved Under the Edit Menu select Cut
157. dialogue numbers in the speech s left margin On Right Margin Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s right margin Character Name Position Above Dialogue Prints the Character Name above the dialogue speech normal position On Left Margin of Page Prints the Character Name at the left of the dialogue speech Speech Numbering in Script Same as Speech Numbering Prints the Dialogue numbering as set in the Speech Numbering Option on this menu Flush with Name The Dialogue numbering will be printed one space following the Character Name Dialogue Capitalization Use Capitalization in Script Prints the dialogue using the same Capitalization as in the original script Always Capitalize Dialogue Prints Dialogue speeches in ALL CAPS Dialogue Spacing Use Spacing in Script Prints the dialogue using the same spacing as in the original script Use Double Spacing Prints with the dialogue double spaced Blank Lines before Printed Speeches Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before Prints the dialogue using the same of Blank Lines Before the Character Name as in the original script Set Blank Lines Before to Allows you to set the number of Blank Lines Before the Character Name from 1 to 5 Substitute Font Lets you print the Animation Recording Script using a different font than in the original script Print Script Notes If checked prints Script Notes in the Animation Recording Script
158. dix G Files Installed Screenwriter Files The following Shortcut files are created in the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window Configuration Wizard launches Configuration Wizard to customize the way Screenwriter works Movie Magic PrintScript launches PrintScript for viewing printing scripts without using Screenwriter Movie Magic Screenwriter launches Screenwriter Multimedia Run Time Player launches the program to run Multimedia scripts created in Screenwriter ReadMe First 000 the latest information on Screenwriter that didn t make the manual Top SpeedBar Editor launches the editing program for adding deleting changing icons on Screenwriter s top SpeedBar User Dictionary Editor launches the editing program for adding deleting changing entries in Screenwriter s user dictionaries The following files are installed in the C Movie Magic Screenwriter subdirectory The files with an asterisk MUST be in C Movie Magic Screenwriter for Screenwriter to run correctly 1O0 SUP oooccccccncnnno Dictionary spelling file VADO PARA Dictionary datafile BWCC dll dynamic link library Configwz exe Configuration Wizard Courolda ttf a TrueType font 241 FILES INSTALLED MOVIE MAGIC 242 Couroldb ttf a TrueType font Couroldi ttf a TrueType fo
159. do not allow transitions to be the last line of the page If you do not have this option selected and a transition would normally be the last line of the page Screenwriter treat it as if it could not fit the transition on that page In addition if you also have it set to not allow transitions on the 1st Line on Pg Screenwriter pulls the last allowable bit of text before the transition down from the previous page to ensure that the transition is not the first line Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line If checked a Scene Heading or Act Scene Information that is the first item on a page is placed where the Top Scene Continued would appear Only applies when Top Scene Continueds are turned on Unchecked the first element text on a page appears in the same position on each page regardless of the Top Continueds Count More Line in Page Breaking If checked the line containing MORE is considered part of the Dialogue element for page breaking purposes Unchecked only the actual Dialogue text is considered when deciding where to break the page Starting Page Number Allows you to specify a different starting page number for the script Default is 1 Start 1st Forced Page on Line Allows text on the first page of the script and all pages following Forced Page Breaks to start further down the page than the first line Enter the line number to start text on Used in Sitcom formats to start each scene about a third of the way down the page
160. e If checked and there are enough Revision Marks on the page to warrant Screenwriter putting a Revision Mark on the Header as determined by your setting in After Revision Marks above Current Revision Marks won t print on revised lines The Header Revision Mark prints instead indicating a revised page This avoids having a cluttered look to the page Unchecked Current Revision Marks prints on the Header and on each revised line Only Display Print ONE Rev Mark per With this option enabled no matter how many lines are revised in a given element it will only get one revision mark 145 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 146 and it will be on the first line of the element With this option NOT enabled every line of any element that is revised will get a revision mark next to it Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED pages If checked a page in a locked script whose entire text has been omitted prints with the legend PAGE OMITTED at its center Unchecked the omitted page won t print Instead the previous page prints numbered as a run 119 120 for example Mark Element following Complete Deletion If checked puts a Revision Mark on the following element when an element with Current Revision Marks is completely deleted Unchecked there is no indication of where that deleted revised element used to be Consider A Pages in Numbering Top Continueds If checked includes the A Page when numbering Top Scene Cont
161. e Saves the currently displayed script without prompting you for a file name Automatically overwrites any previously saved version of a script with the same name 207 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 208 Save As Saves the currently displayed script to a different name location or format This closes the original document and leaves open the document you just saved Save All Open Scripts Saves all open files without prompting you for file names except for unsaved untitled files Automatically overwrites any previously saved versions of files with the same name Backup to Floppy Saves a copy of the currently displayed script to floppy drive Selecting this menu item will cause it to display a sub menu with all the available removable drives connected to your system Select one and the currently open script will be backed up i e saved to that drive without changing the stored path for that script on your hard drive Four removable drives can be displayed in this window Header Setup Displays a Menu where you can define the header format and content for the currently displayed script Title Page Publisher Displays the Title Page Publisher for WYSIWYG Drag n Drop creation of Title Pages Page Layout Displays a Menu where you can change the top bottom and binding page margins Also gives you the option to cheat the line spacing for the entire script Print Preview Displays a WYSIWYG preview of how the curr
162. e Dwarves C Are we simply setting a variable Example lt LEVEL ONE gt is TRUE x Cancel lt lt Previous E I Help 71 72 MOVIE MAGIC Using the Activity Wizard is optional You can always write User Activities manually by typing IF SET OTHERWISE ELSE or ENDIF at the beginning of any blank line QuickType automatically makes that a User Activity When you re in a user Activity and you press lt it pops up a menu with all the current script s Variables allowing you to select an existing one or type in a new one as desired Create Branch Point Clicking on this button displays a menu with all the currently available Branch Targets You can create new Branch Targets and easily build a Branch Point without having to remember what the Branch Targets were Select which Branch Targets to Make Available Eg Available Branch Targets Current Branch Point BACK OF TEMPLE 10 ORCHARD GATE 2 INNER COURTYARD 15 LEFT AROUND TEMPLE 6 RIGHT AROUND TEMPLE 7 RIGHT AROUND TEMPLE II 11 ROCKY COURTYARD 1 TEMPLE ROOM 13 YOU RE DEAD 16 Create New Branch Target Build and Perform Branch x Cancel Help Available Branch Targets Shows all existing Branch Targets Current Branch Point Shows Branch Targets in your Current Branch Point Drag and drop or double click Branch Targets in one window to move them to the other Or select a Branch Target
163. e Magic M Show Grid by Inches Centimeters 73 screenwriter iz Use al0 0 linen binding margin when Horiz ontally Centering on Page Align Horizontally Unchanged Left Right C Centers Left to Right C Center on Page C Undo Alignment Horizontal Print the Title Page Load E Save Help x Cancel Opening a Title Page Under the File Menu select Title Page Publisher and you ll see a screen like the one in the example above You can enlarge or reduce the size of the title page displayed onscreen with the Full Page and Zoomed buttons at top right 23 TITLE PAGE MOVIE MAGIC Creating Text Elements Double click anywhere on the title page to create a text element The Edit Text window pops up Show Me the Magic by Screenwriter Bjuir com Bee Z o X tone 7 tor Type your text The Left three buttons allow you to select Bold Underline and Italics respectively The next button lets you select the text s Font The next three buttons allow you to select Left Justified Centered or Right Justified text NOTE All the text in any given text element will have the same style i e bold underline etc font and justification If you want the script s Title to appear differently from the Author s name for example underlined use different text elements for each and align them as desired Click OK and the Edit Text window disappears placing your text
164. e Menu select Display Options then Show Format Codes Locked Revision Marks display a number indicating their Locking Level at the beginning of each revised line 1 2 3 and 4 depending on their locking level To Decrease a Locking Level Under the Production Menu select Animation Locking then Unlock One Rev Mark Level Animation Recording Scripts Many animation production companies want Recording Scripts print outs of dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially Printing Animation Recording Scripts Under the File Menu select Print A Print Menu displays Check the Dialogue radio button A Print Dialogue menu displays Check the Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts radio button Or to print Revised speeches only check the Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only radio button In the Select Names window click on a character s name to print his her dialogue Or Select All characters Changing the Recording Script layout Under the File Menu select Print A Print Menu displays 189 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 190 Click on the word Setup at the top left of the screen then Animation Dialogue The Setup Animation Dialogue screen displays letting you set up the layout of your Animation Recording Scripts These options change the way the a Recording Script prints without affecting the script Speech Numbering On Left Margin Prints
165. e currently selected font by choosing Character Set under the Help Menu NOTE Character Set runs a Windows Utility called CHARMAP EXE If selecting Character Set doesn t bring up a Menu or window you need to go to your Windows Setup and install CHARMAP EXE SpellCheck Screenwriter s built in SpellCheck system allows you to check the spelling of your script by e Word e Element e Page e Forwards from the cursor position e Entire Script SpellCheck can also e Auto Correct common Typos as you write e AutoCapitalize Sentences e AutoCapitalize the Names of Characters e Correct Double Capitals e SpellCheck in Foreign Languages e Create User Dictionaries for each script You can customize SpellCheck options to suit the way you work Under the File Menu select Program Options then click the Spelling button Read on for more details Add Words to This field allows you to change the User Dictionary The standard generic dictionary is USER_US LXA All Learned and Auto Corrected words will be added to the dictionary that is displayed in this field Note If the spell check is set to use a language other than American English then the default User Dictionary will be changed appropriately Setup Options Click this button to go to the Spelling window of the Program Options menu so you can setup how the Spell Check functions Select Language Click this button to select among the available language dictionaries If
166. e letters you don t want to use NOTE Screenwriter also uses this skip list for use in its numbering of Act Info and Scene Info if they are set to use Letters SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Advanced Locking Features In the normal day to day process of the Production Cycle Screenwriter s automated Production Features will meet most people s needs The following features give you an extra level of manual control over Scene and Page Locking should an unusual situation arise Be careful when altering Locking features as some procedures are not reversible Always save a copy of the script before attempting any of the following procedures In a Locked script many Locking options can be changed by selecting Unlock the Script under the Production Menu and unchecking the appropriate checkboxes See the Online Help for Production Solutions under the Production Menu for more details Changing the Level of Locking When the script has too many revision marks a production company may decide to send out the entire script with all the numbers reverted to normal numbering To do this with Screenwriter you need to step back undo ing one or more levels of Locking Under the Format Menu select Edit Script Formats Click on the Locked Scripts button Select the level of locking lower than currently set For example if you have Multi Locked Scene Numbers but only want Locked Scene Numbers with all the Multi Locked A Scenes 6
167. e number of lines that you want to skip in Cheat Element menu Q My character reads poetry in her speech how do I go to the next line of the dialogue when I need to A Press Alt Enter or select Add Hard Return from Edit menu when you need to go to the next line Q I accidentally made a mistake in my registration information during installation how do I change that A In Notepad or WordPad Win95 open the SCWRITER INI file located in the Windows subdirectory and edit the Registration section accordingly Production Problems and Solutions Screenwriter s Online Help is available to help with common problems encountered in the Production process Under the Production Menu select Production Solutions then one of the following options General Techniques Walks you through the entire Production cycle helping you to avoid problems by demonstrating the proper procedure Scene Headings Lists common problems encountered with Scene Numbers and Scene Headings in a production script and tells you how to solve them Page Breaks Lists common problems encountered with Page Breaks in a production script and tells you how to solve them 195 TROUBLESHOOTING MOVIE MAGIC Headers Lists common problems encountered with Locked Headers in a production script and tells you how to solve them Manual Overrides Displays the appropriate Help screens for the Manual Override of Page Breaks Scene Numbers Locked Header Text Ind
168. e page it refers to on the back of the previous page Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed Only asks you to insert the page preceding a script note so it can print the note for the following page Requires you to insert pages one at a time Print without Prompting requires you to insert entire script Requires you to insert the entire script including a Title Page Screenwriter only prints on those pages that have a script note on the following page Select Which Color Notes to Print If you have more than one color of script note in your script check the colored boxes for the notes you want to print Script Notes Options Formatting options for Script Notes can be set on the Script Notes page of the Edit Script Formats menu 1 Under the Format Menu select Edit Script Formats 2 Click on the Script Notes button on the right hand side Display Notes in Script If checked displays Script Notes onscreen as you have set their hide show status individually Unchecked all Script Notes are collapsed to their hidden status SCREENWRITER 3 SCRIPT FORMATS Print Notes in Script If checked Script Notes are treated as part of the script when printing changing the Page Breaks accordingly Unchecked they do not print or increase the script length Click Here to Set Note Color Click this button to display a Color palette Choose a color to display Script Notes with or create a Custom color Click OK to acc
169. e page number Flipped Al Places the A Letter Before the scene page number Multi Lock Scenes To use Multi Lock Scenes you need to click on its tab Multi Lk 1 A1 This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Scene Headings and fall between two existing A Scenes Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Number For example a scene inserted between scenes 12A and 12B would be 12A1 the next one would be 12A2 and so on Multi Lk 1 AA This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Scene Headings and fall between two existing A Scenes Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Letter For example a scene inserted between scenes 12A and 12B would be 12AA the next one would be 12AB and so on Multi Lock Scene between 1 amp 1A is Determines how a Multi Lock Scene inserted between a Normal Scene and an A Scene is numbered 1 A Adds a Dash plus the A Letter after the scene number 1AA Adds the A Letter plus the Multi Lock Letter after the scene number A1 Flips the normal A Scene numbering order Multi Lock Pages To use Multi Lock Pages you need to click on its tab Multi Lk 1 A1 This option only affects the numbering of Page Breaks that are inserted into a script wit
170. e program It simulates the playing of your Multimedia game or program by parsing the User Activity lines and letting you make choices and make branches as the script progresses It keeps track of all the Variables and can be quite useful in modeling how the final game or project will play Your multimedia script can be played by anyone using Windows if you give them the Run Time Player along with your script They will be unable to edit the script You are licensed to distribute this Multimedia Run Time Player freely as long as no fee is charged for its distribution To run the Run Time Player Under the File Menu select Play Multimedia Script The Run Time Player screen displays 1 iv a a gt Variables which we True Variables waich aro Faise Ta a 53 yon yde pon ae KEY TO THE ORCHARD GA gt CLOCK IS SET EXAMINED SIGN Betum to Script Version 1 4 Copyright 1996 Schater an Fogtes Resereed Y Yes Mo At top left is the File Menu with these options Open Opens any Screenwriter Multimedia format script Print Session If checked prints your script the way you play it this session It prints only the pathways you choose in your play including all the User Activities your responses to them and the final settings of all Variables It first Stops or Pauses the script see below for details then starts printing when you start playing again It keeps printing until you Stop the script E
171. e scenes using a dash between the first and last scene 45 78 or 89 end Or combine the two methods 1 3 32 45 78 89 end List Click on this button to see a List Menu of all the scenes in your script with their Scene Headings Select a scene by clicking on it De select a scene by clicking on it again Double Click Here When Done Double click on this button to return to the print selection menu Numbers of the scenes you selected are entered in the Selected Scenes window To change your selections click on the List button to select again Dialogue If checked displays a Dialogue Selection menu Check a radio button to select the kind of Dialogue to print and select one or more Character Names Dialogue With Reference Page Numbers and Statistics If checked prints a dialogue report with page number references and statistics about the number of speeches words sentences and sentence length for each character NOTE If you select all characters a screen displays asking if you d like to print characters dialog in Script order rather than printing all of one character s dialogue at a time If you click on Yes your Dialogue report will not contain any statistics If you click on No statistics will appear in your printed report Dialogue With Cues for Actors If checked prints all the dialogue for selected characters along with either a Dialogue Cue preceding the speech if available or the preceding line of Act
172. e script Speech Numbering On Right Margin Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s right margin On Left Margin Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s left margin Character Name Position Above Dialogue Prints the Character Name above the dialogue speech normal position To Left of Dialogue Prints the Character Name at the left of the dialogue speech Speech Numbering in Script This option is ONLY used if you have Dialogue Numbering set to print within the script itself and are printing normal pages e g not Dialogue recording scripts Same as Speech Numbering Uses the same margin settings specified under Speech Numbering Flush with Name Prints dialogue numbers on space after the character name SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Dialogue Capitalization Use Capitalization in Script Prints the dialogue using the same Capitalization as in the original script Always Capitalize Dialogue Prints Dialogue speeches in ALL CAPS Dialogue Spacing Use Spacing in Script Prints the dialogue using the same spacing as in the original script Use Double Spacing Prints with the dialogue double spaced Blank Lines before Printed Speeches Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before Prints the dialogue using the same of Blank Lines Before the Character Name as in the original script Set Blank Lines Before to Allows you to set the number of Blank Lines Before the Character Name from
173. e secure but still fully functional configuration would be Outgoing and Incoming connections allowed on port 2200 the default port for iPartner The minimal configuration is Outgoing connections only on port 2200 SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES Speak Text Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to actually read your script aloud using Microsoft s free Text to Speech engine This menu item is the gateway to this function and you should see the online help within the various Speak Text Menus for more details Setup Voices Clicking on this feature activates Microsoft s Speech Engine and displays a window that allows the user to assign voices to elements of the script Assign Yoices to Names and Categories Unassigned Character To Assign a Voice to any Name or Act Information ey ad ee on Action Us Ade Scene Headings Character Name Options Scene Information Do not read Script Not ae ai Read in Character Voice Titles Centered C Read in Action Voice Transitions Parenthetical Options Do not read Read in Character Voice Read in Action Voice Load Voice Association File Save Voice Association File I Save as Default Voices Clear All Associations Apply Cancel R2 Character Name Options This area allows you some choices on the way Character Names are read in the script Do not read If selected the Character Names are not read Read in Character Voice lIf selected
174. ecked they are hidden Unchecking Display Notes in Script automatically unchecks Print Notes in Script Print Notes in Script lf checked Script Notes are treated as part of the script when printing changing the Page Breaks accordingly Checking Print Notes in Script automatically checks Display Notes in Script Unchecked Script Notes do not print or increase the script length Script Note Commander X elect Which Color Notes to View Focus on her face Click Here to Set Note Color Clicking this button displays a Color palette Choose a color to display Script Notes with or create a Custom color Click OK to accept your choice Cancel to exit without changing color Centered Title Centered Title has no element specific options Page Break Options You can change the parameters Screenwriter uses to determine how to paginate your script 161 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 162 Break Action Do Not Break Action If checked an Action element is never split by a page break Unchecked Action may be broken over the two pages Sentence Ends Only lIf checked Action is broken at the end of a sentence only Sentence Ends Preferred If checked Action is broken at the end of a sentence if one exists in the 3 lines before the end of where the page break falls If no sentence end is found in the last 3 lines Action may be broken in the middle of a sentence Maximum Lines on Page If checked Action ma
175. ecked words that start with two capital letters are corrected by Auto Correct and display an error prompt in a manual SpellCheck Unchecked these errors are ignored as correct The SpellCheck as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work SpellCheck as you Type and Edit If checked Auto Correct Character Name Aliases and Substitution Text Aliases are allowed Unchecked they are disallowed and grayed out on this page Auto Correct Typos as you Type If checked Auto Correct corrects common letter inversion typos such as teh to the as soon as you type them The SpellCheck as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work Max Length Sets the maximum word length of typos to auto correct If on a slower computer set this to a lower number Screenwriter uses a default word length of 25 letters Beep on Unknown Words If checked alerts you to any suspected typos that Auto Correct is unable to correct for you The SpellCheck as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work 141 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 142 On Screen Underlining of Unknown Words With this option enabled when the real time spell checking routines find a word that it cannot correct and does not recognize it will underline it on screen with a jagged red underline to identify the problem This option will only be available if the option Spell Check a
176. ecting it multiple times Hold down the key while applying any of the text formats above The text remains highlighted ready for you to apply the next format If you d prefer text to remain highlighted after you ve applied a text format without using the 4 key 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 Select the Text Entry Editing button 3 Uncheck the Selecting Bold Italics or Underline turns off Block box Changing Case You can change the case of existing text without re typing it using these options e Uppercase e Lowercase e Initial Capitals e Capitalize Word e Cap amp Bold Word e Lowercase Word When Screenwriter changes the case of existing text it retains correct capitalization for e Sentence beginnings e The personal pronoun T e Speaking Characters with Initial Capitals To change the case of selected text 1 Select the text 87 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 88 2 Under the Edit Menu select Convert Case then choose the desired capitalization To change the case of an entire Element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the appropriate Element 2 Under the Edit Menu select Convert Case then choose the desired capitalization Quick Format of Previous Word If after typing a word you realize you want it in a different case or text format you can quickly change certain formats Quick Uppercase of Previous Word Position the cursor immediately following the word to be upperca
177. ects checking this feature may allow a more accurate import Action is in Parentheticals Check this if your import file has the Action Element in parentheses such as certain TV or Stage Play scripts Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Check this if the import file has Page Breaks and you want to keep them exactly the same in the resulting Screenwriter script Click on OK to import the file Under Screenwriter s File Menu Save your imported file under a new name If your script doesn t import successfully try again with different options checked You may have to experiment with these options to get the best results Cut and Paste Import Use this method if none of the other methods imports your script successfully To import a Script from another Windows program on the same computer as Screenwriter 1 Open the other Windows program and open the file you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under that programs Edit Menu Select All or select all the text in the file using another method 3 Under the Edit Menu select Copy Once the Copy command is complete the text will be on the Clipboard Don t cut or copy anything else 4 Open Screenwriter 5 Under Screenwriter s File Menu open a New file Under the Edit Menu select Paste Instead of pasting the import text in your new empty document Screenwriter presents the following Text Interpretation Menu 199 IMPORTING SCRIPTS MOVIE MAGIC
178. ed Type the new color s Name in the text window above the Colors window then click this button Assign a color from the Color Palette that displays or design a Custom color The New Color displays at the end of the Color list Delete Color Allows you to remove a Color from the Color list Click on the Color then on this button When prompted click Yes to remove the color No to cancel SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Edit Color Name Click this button to change the name of the currently selected revision color Edit How Color Displays This changes the way a particular draft color will appear on screen Click on a color in the left window and then this button to change the look After the last color is used it should There are two drop down menus The first allows you to choose the method the script will loop once it has been through all the Revision colors Don t Loop Colors If you select this option and then try to increment the revision color beyond the last color it will tell you that it cannot The next three options are all used in combination with the First Loop Color Selection to the right of this option in this menu the color BLUE e Loop To DOUBLE TIf you select this option and then increment the revision color beyond the last color it will call this new color DOUBLE BLUE or whatever color is selected on the First Loop Color Selection and will then start through the list again adding the word DOUBLE
179. ed in Rectangles below it Connecting arrows showing the branching possibilities If a Branch Point is within a User Activity that branch is considered conditional The arrow is displayed in Red Unconditional branches are displayed in Blue For example the following is a conditional branch You can only perform the branch if you have the lt KEY TO GATE gt gt IF USER HAS lt KEY TO GATE gt THEN GOTO ORCHARD GATE 2 lt ENDIF There may also be some places in the script which branch to the current Branch Target but to which you cannot branch back These Branch Targets are displayed above the oval The Graph Branch Points SpeedBar has these options e Close Clicking on this icon exits Graph view and returns you to the script e Print Clicking on this icon prints the selected range of Branch Target Graphs e Help Clicking on this icon displays context sensitive help information 73 74 MOVIE MAGIC A Pull Down List of all existing Branch Targets selecting a different Branch Target on this list displays its graph onscreen Moving around in the Graph Screen Walk through the branches by double clicking on any Branch Target s Rectangle It becomes the Current Branch Target and the graph displays it Selecting a different Branch Target on the SpeedBar pull down list displays its graph onscreen Right Clicking on any Branch Target returns you to that point in the script Adding New Branches Branch Tar
180. ed out options have already been selected by your prior choices in Edit Script Formats LOCK or Unlock items as you prefer by clicking their checkboxes SETUP the Header Text by editing the default codes Click on a Code s button to enter it in the Header The default Header Text for the White shooting script reads something like White Revision 12 25 97 120 Using the current date and page number Change the Revision Draft Color order if desired Screenwriter uses the following industry standard Revision Draft Color order White Blue Pink Yellow Green Goldenrod Salmon Cherry Buff 167 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 168 Tan After you have locked this the White shooting script for the first time Blue will be set as the next revision color Click on OK to accept your changes or the defaults and Lock the Script A prompt displays telling you that you re ready to print the White draft and then start making Revisions that will appear in the Blue draft Click on OK to continue Next update the Title Page Under the File Menu select Title Page Publisher Create a text box and start the Running List with the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes Save the script using the Save command Print the White draft Shooting Script Under the File Menu select Print Copy and distribute the script to all concerned parties Perform Revisions le Save the script
181. ee Auto Correct in the SpellCheck section of this manual for details It s not necessary to type a space either before or after the colon 251 UTILITY PROGRAMS MOVIE MAGIC 252 The User Dictionary Editor does not distinguish between UPPERCASE and lowercase adding all words as lowercase Delete Word In the Dictionary window on the left highlight the word you want to Delete Click on the Delete Word button You are prompted to confirm the deletion Click on Yes to delete No to keep the word in the User Dictionary Edit Word lIn the Dictionary window on the left highlight the word you want to Edit Click on the Edit Word button Your word is moved from the Dictionary window to the Word Editing window Make the desired changes then click on either the Edit Word or Add Word button to save them back to the Dictionary window Exit Quits and saves the changes you made to the User Dictionaries Returns you to either Screenwriter or the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window depending where you launched it from SCREENWRITER 236 left parenthesis 43 44 45 Cont d Dialogue Shouldn t have Character 157 Put Act Info in Parenthesis 159 Put Action in Parentheses 159 Put Scene Info in Parenthesis 160 BK 17 18 HDR 108 SCW 17 18 SEX 187 TMB 18 TPG 25 26 lt Ctrl S gt saves file rather than Inserts Scene 149 lt Ctrl S gt saves file rather than Inserts Scene 235
182. eft at Margin 99 Flush Right 98 Flush Right at Margin 99 Flush Right code 99 Font 156 Font Button 33 Font managers 193 FORCED PAGE 143 Forced Page Break 30 51 194 235 Foreign Characters 88 Foreign Language SpellCheck 92 format codes 85 184 186 239 format files 35 Format Menu 212 formatting errors 213 Formatting Text 85 Forwards 100 Found Unknown Word 90 Friends 244 friends scw 244 From a Script 36 FULL SHOT 61 FULL640 BAR 153 242 248 FULL800 BAR 153 242 248 Function Keys 236 G General Hospital 244 General Techniques 195 224 Generate 213 Generate Rundown Sheet 222 genhosp scw 244 Go to Bottom of Script 148 Go to Scene 34 Go to Top of Script 148 Goto Act Scene Info 150 Goto Act Scene Info in a Television or Stage Play format script displays an Act Scene list allowing you to select an Act to go to Takes you to that Act s first Scene Heading Goto Bookmark 215 Goto Bottom 214 Goto Last Position 215 INDEX Goto Menu 214 Goto Next A Page 214 Goto Next Current Revision Mark 214 Goto Next Forced Page Break in a Television or Stage Play format script takes you to the next i Act Break 214 Goto Next Hidden Text 214 Goto Next Scene Heading 214 Goto Next Script Note 214 Goto Next Speech By 214 Goto Next Strikeout or Colored Text 214 Goto Page 16 214 234 Goto Previous Scene Heading 214 Goto Scene 214 Goto Scene Listings
183. ement Type the Right column text as you would normally For example create a Character Name element then type the Character Name With the cursor in that element press 6 2 Control 2 The element is formatted as Character Name R Press to go to the next element In the example it is a Dialogue element already formatted as Dialogue R Type the Dialogue Press to go to the next element It is a normal Action element To enter Right column action type the Action text Press exJ 2 J Control 2 Press to go to the next element It is a normal Action element Repeat these Steps until all your Dual Column Dialogue is entered To change an element from a Dual Column element back to a normal element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the element 53 MOVIE MAGIC 2 Under the Format Menu select Change Element Type then Normal Full Width Or press cxJ 0 Control Zero Dual Column Margins Dual Column margins can be customized to your preference 1 Under the Format Menu select Change Element Type then Set Column Margins 2 Change the settings as desired Set the AY Columns xi Left Column C Right Column N a dee Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Other E 4 14 114 e mj al a ez eee N o an 4 e de 4 i E x Cancel Help Cheating Cheating involves over riding the default settings as defined in Script Formats under the F
184. en otherwise dragged Align Vertically e Tops Aligns the top of all selected text boxes to the top of the first text box that was selected Bottoms Aligns the bottom of all selected text boxes to the bottom of the first text box that was selected e Centers Vertically centers all selected text boxes with respect to the vertical center of the first text box that was selected Top to Bottom Aligns the lower of the two boxes directly against the bottom of the upper of the two boxes This option is ONLY available when you have exactly two text boxes selected e Center on page Centers all selected text boxes with respect to the height of the page If more than one text box is selected then they will be centered as a group that is to say that their total height is the value which will be used to center them rather than each one being centered individually e Undo Alignment Cancels the last alignment option selected unless the text elements in question have been otherwise dragged The section that tracks where text is placed on the title page is the X and Y axis section It is located in the upper right of the screen When text is being positioned on the title page the X and Y axis section shows how far from the left X and top Y margins of the page your text element starts These measurements change as you move the text element and are shown in Inches or Centimeters A Grid helps you position text elements on the page
185. en print all the notes on the backs of appropriate pages printing blank pages on those pages where there are no notes Unselect All Click this button to unselect all colors of Script Notes to be printed so that you can select the color or colors you want Alternatively you can also unselect individual colors simply by clicking on the Check box that is displaying that color Colored Check Boxes Since you have the option to have up to 25 different colored notes in the script you will see from 1 to 25 of these colored check boxes depending on how many colors are actually being used for Script Notes within this specific script You select which colored notes should be printed and which should be skipped simply by checking or unchecking the available note colors CHANGING SCRIPT NOTE COLORS To change the Note Color for All NEW Notes Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Go to the Format Menu Select Edit Script Formats Click the Script Notes Button on the right hand side of the page Click the button labeled CLICK HERE TO SET NOTE COLOR Select a color as desired and press OK to accept it Press OK to close the Edit Script Formats Menu It will prompt you Should 1 convert all Notes that are in the Current Script Note Color to the New Script Note Color select NO to keep the existing color of all Notes that are already in the script select YES to convert the color of all Notes that are in
186. ence the cursor s in e Element Selects the entire element the cursor s in e Group Selects a group of adjacent elements including the one the cursor s in for example Character Name plus Parenthetical plus Dialogue e Page Selects the entire page the cursor s on e Scene Selects the entire scene the cursor s in e Scene Range Displays a list of your script s Scene Headings Click on or drag the cursor over the ones you want to select and click on OK e Extend Selection Displays an Extend Block menu with options for extending your selection backwards or forwards in the script from the Current Cursor Position Turn off Block De selects the currently selected block of text Mouse Selection Screenwriter has a variety of options for selecting text with the mouse Left Click Using the mouse Left Click directly in front of the text to be selected While holding the Left Button down drag the mouse cursor across the text Release the button when all the desired text is highlighted To continue selecting text that s offscreen move the mouse cursor onto the top or bottom menu bar while still holding the button down it continues scrolling and selecting in that direction Double Click Place the cursor on the word to be selected e Double Click the Left mouse button to select the Word e Double Click again to select the entire Sentence e Double Click again to select the entire Element e Double Click again to
187. ent page of the script will print Print Displays a Menu where you can select what to print or fax Printer Setup Displays a Windows Menu where you can select a printer and change printing options Publish to the Internet If you have a web site and want to publish your script on the internet you can now do so simply by opening the script you want to publish selecting File then Publish to Internet and it will create a WYSIWYG HTML file and post it to your web site for you 32 bit version only If you want to simply create the HTML file without putting it on the web use Save As and then select HTML Publishing as the File Type Note that the ability to have Screenwriter directly post the script onto your web site requires that you have a web site with publishing rights Register with First Use com First Use com is an Internet site that allows you to instantly fingerprint and timestamp your ideas and records for proof of ownership When you execute the Register with First Use com it will either prompt you to sign up for a free account or if you are already a member it will register your script with First Use com Screenwriter will then create a new file whose name starts with that day s date then an underscore and the name of the script e g 12 15 99_My Opus SCW and save it in a FirstUse subdirectory located under the default script directory This file will be created as a read only file with so that you can view and print this
188. enter of this window towards the bottom is a field called End of Show is Act Number Enter the number of the last Act in this field Scene Information TV and Stage Play Format New Scene To start a New Scene Type NEWSCENE at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter centers it and changes it to SCENE where is the new Scene Number A forced page break will not be entered Or at the Scene Heading Initial Text Pop up List select Start New Scene A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate New Scene info Or press Ener while in an Act Info Line and Screenwriter puts in the appropriate New Scene Info for you To use this feature Use Scene Information in Script must be checked on the Scene Information page of the Edit Script Formats Menu Script Notes A Script Note provides you with a place in the script to jot down an idea for a scene or a comment on the story or to put writing you ve cut but are not sure about discarding See the section of the Script Note Commander for additional information on organizing your notes Script Notes are separate from the body text of your script and don t affect the page breaks or script length They can be displayed onscreen or hidden They can be printed separately with page references or printed in the regular body of the script in which case they affect the page breaks and script length Add a Script Note To add a Script Note position the curso
189. ept your choice Cancel to exit without changing color You are prompted to convert all script notes to the new color Click on Yes to change all the notes No to change only one script note Click OK to save your changes Cancel to discard them See Edit Script Formats in the Customizing Screenwriter chapter for more details Switch Elements To convert one element to another for example Action to Script Note 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the Element to be changed Or select a portion of the element to change Click on the Current Element Window on the Top SpeedBar to display the Pull Down List of elements Or press e Or under the Format Menu select Change Element Type then Pop Down List 3 Select the element type to switch to by clicking on it Moving between Elements With QuickType enabled pressing Tab or Enter in one element either moves you to a new default element or displays a List Menu of available options If you Type QuickType will FADE IN Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu or any Transition INT EXT etc If you Press QuickType will while in Blank Action Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu Transition INT EXT etc blank Scene Heading Scene Info or End of Act Scene Heading Display a List Menu of all unique Locations without Location already in the script 49 MOVIE MAGIC Scene Heading with Location Display a List Menu of Time of Day D
190. er Name element Dialogue element Any element Blank Transition element Any element SCRIPT FORMATS Display a List Menu of existing Character Names Add a Character Name element Display a List Menu of Character Extensions V O O S etc Add a Parenthetical element Add a Transition element Display a List Menu of Transitions CUT TO etc Add a Script Note If Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Text Entry Editing page of Program Options under the File Menu Tab creates a Parenthetical element when in a Dialogue element Character Name in Dialog Action To put an existing Character Name into Dialogue or Action without typing it in again press Les J cuJ CJ A Pull Down menu displays with all the existing Character Names Select one and it is entered as text at the cursor position Or if you ve assigned that name an Alias type in the alias text and press the space bar It is expanded to the full Character Name at the cursor position See Aliases later in this chapter for details Forced Page Break To end a page short and start a new page enter a Forced Page Break at the cursor position Under the Edit Menu select Add Forced Page Break Or press rr J Ene Remove a Forced Page Break Remove a Forced Page Break using one of these methods e Put the cursor either before or after the forced page break Under the Edit Menu select Remove Forced P
191. er Scripts If not type in the correct subdirectory where appropriate Direct Import To open an MS Word WordPerfect WordStar for DOS ASCII RTF Final Draft RTF Movie Master or Scriptware Tagged file 197 IMPORTING SCRIPTS MOVIE MAGIC 198 Open the Screenwriter program Under the File Menu select Open Select the File Type for the type of file you re opening If the file you want to import doesn t have the appropriate File Extension i e RTF for Rich Text Format TAG for Scriptware Tagged etc selecting All Files as the file type shows files with any extension Select the file you want to import to Screenwriter If necessary change the subdirectory by double clicking on the Path Tree Click on OK The Text Interpretation Menu appears How should Interpret This Text Import Text in Script Format Import Text as Action Only 4 Tec Only a MV Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text use when line spacing in the source text is inconsistant though it can cause shots to be imported as Character Names F Dontuse Capitalization Information for Element identification use when Character Names may be lower case in the source text F Ignore Margins for Element identification F Action is in Parenthenticals F Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks use ONLY when the scriptis already in Production and the page breaks have to match
192. er Scripts HamletT heNovel SCW r eu Ham CLAUDIUS Claudius is desc z Claudius is a serpent and a mildewed e Some commentators have argued t Emperance suggested in Act 1 Scene 2 play If this be true Claudius appetite for strong drink according to Renaissance moral philosophy points to the rejection of reason which is equated with virtue Lowers 19 12 SCREENWRITER BASIC INFORMATION Pull down menus pull down from the Main Menu Bar Each option has an underlined QuickSelect letter as part of its name as in the File Menu in the example With the Menu displayed select an option using any of these methods e Scrolling through the options with the arrow keys and pressing Ene Use the mouse to click on an option e Pressing the appropriate QuickSelect Letter e g p to select Print NOTE If there is a Windows Quick key equivalent for a menu option it displays to the right of the Menu Item as in F1 for Contents in the example above LIST MENU List Menus are scrollable menus with text items selectable for input into your script without typing such as the Character List in the example To select an item e Type enough letters to match the item you want typing H highlights Helmer while typing Helmer a highlights Helmer and Nora Then press Ente e Click on the item you want using the mouse e Scroll through the items with the arrow k
193. erlining To enter the character that represents a code in the Header such as the sign to make it say Act 6 enter the code twice as in Act HO Screenwriter s default is to keep blank spaces in Header Line 2 and print it as a blank line Text you enter in Line 2 replaces the spaces and print accordingly Put in Date As Selects a format for the Date appearing in Header Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select Month Day Year Standard American format 8 27 97 Month Day Year American with dashes 8 27 97 Day Month Year European Format 27 8 97 Day Month Year European with dashes 27 8 97 Put In Act Information As Selects a format for Act Information appearing in Header Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select Numbers 1 2 3 Letters A B C Words One Two Three WORDS ONE TWO THREE Roman Numerals I II IIL Put In Scene Information As Selects a format for Scene Information appearing in Header Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select 98 Numbers 1 2 3 Letters A B C Words One Two Three WORDS ONE TWO THREE SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Roman Numerals I II IIL Print Headers On Determines on which pages you want the Header Text to print Click on the appropriate radio button to select Not Page One Header Text will be printed on every page except Page One This is the a
194. ers can cause some minor problems The problem will be easy to detect as your script will not print in the correct font Courier If your script appears in an unusual font or you are unable to get a Watermark to print you most likely have the problem The screenwriter program is set to substitute Courier Old in printing because it looks better and has more stroke weight Courier new is used to display onscreen The problem is occurring because the program cannot access Courier old and is substituting something else instead To correct this go to FILE PROGRAM OPTIONS PRINTERS and under substitute font choose Courier New Common Technical Support Questions and Answers Q I accidentally learned a wrong word while spellchecking how do I delete this word from a supplemental dictionary A Go to DOS Command Prompt and switch to Screenwriter for Windows subdirectory type STUTIL to start the editor select the dictionary you want to edit find the word and delete it Q Screenwriter for Windows takes forever to print how do I speed it up A Pull down file menu in Screenwriter for Windows select Program Options click on Printer tab and Substitute for Courier Old font for printing If this doesn t work then try turning off the print manager in the Main Control Panel if this still doesn t work then try a different print driver like HPI for HP4 Q Ihave a laptop computer with a touch pad I have noticed that my cursor jumps from one place to
195. eted select Undo before selecting any other editing command NOTE Select File gt Program Options gt Keyboard to enable Shortcut Keys for the Delete keystrokes Delete Left of the cursor by character Delete Right of the cursor by character Delete to End of Line crf Lens Delete Word c Delete Left Word J Delete a Block of selected text by clicking on the Delete Block Button on the Top SpeedBar the icon with a large dark red X 83 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Delete a block of selected text by Right Clicking using either the PowerPanel or Windows pop up menu Un Deleting Text To un delete text you ve deleted select Undo before selecting any other editing command Under the Edit Menu select Undo Undo To Undo a text edit select Undo before selecting any other editing command Under the Edit Menu select Undo Screenwriter has a multi level undo capable of undoing up to the last 20 text editing changes you made It can undo cutting amp pasting blocks search amp replace and more Screenwriter recognizes three basic types of editing e Adding text including Pasting e Deleting text including cutting deleting blocks e Global processing such as search replace or reformatting Screenwriter s default Undo Level is 20 To change the Undo Level 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 Click on the Text Entry Editing button 3 Enter a number between 0 and 20 in the Undo Levels bo
196. eys and press Ente to select the highlighted item More items can be viewed by clicking or dragging in the scroll bar on the right of the menu 13 BASIC INFORMATION MOVIE MAGIC OPTION MENU Printing to Generic Text Only on LPT1 Setup e Current Page Forwards C Entire Script Blocked Text C Selected Pages y C Selected Scenes List C Dialogue C Character List C Unique Location List C Production Breakdowns Script Notes C Asterisked Pages Print Selection should Print in Normal Order Forwards y Y Run SmartCheck before this Print Job Number of Copies fi I Create PrintScript File instead of Printing Directly Print Title Page Preview amp Fax 7 X Cancel Help Option menus have different types of input options including Push Buttons CheckBoxes Radio Buttons and Text amp Numerical Input Fields Most options have an Underlined QuickSelect letter Select the option you want using any of these methods e Moving around in the menu by pressing or shift J e Clicking on it with the mouse e Pressing the QuickSelect letter on the keyboard if you re already in a Text or Numerical Input Field such as Selected Scenes and want to move to another such as Run SmartCheck before this Print Job press y to distinguish from text input PushButtons There are five PushButtons displayed as rectangular boxes on the Print menu in the example above Preview Fax OK
197. f this feature requires the installation of an optional Foreign Language Dictionary Edit User Dictionary Takes you to Select Language then to a Menu to choose a User Dictionary to edit Add delete or edit words to be used by SpellCheck or Auto Correct Production Menu lock The cnt Unlock The Script Multi Lock Start Next Revision Set Revision Draft Color Setup Draft Information Fix or Flex gt Auto Revision gt Remove gt Override gt Breakdown gt TY Breakdowns gt Animation Locking gt Storyboard Linking Production Solutions Lock The Script Displays the Lock the Script menu allowing you to change all script Locking options in one place Default setting is to Lock all options Uncheck the items you don t want locked Only available in a script without Locked Pages Unlock The Script Displays the Unlocking the Script menu allowing you to change all script Locking options in one place Uncheck Locked items individually to Unlock them Only available in a script with Locked Pages 217 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 218 Multi Lock Allows you to keep the existing A Page or A Scene numbering and give new pages or scenes a new unique numbering scheme Only available in a script with Locked Pages or Scenes Start Next Revision Prepares your script for the Next Revision by e Removing All Revision Marks e Fixing All A Pages e Locking the Header Text e
198. g Mode Click on Replace to accept your new category Cancel to discard the changes If you make changes and later want to return to the original defaults click on the Reset to Defaults for Movie Magic Scheduling button Click on OK to accept your changes or Cancel to discard them Breakdown Sheets The Breakdown Sheet is the report showing all your tagged items in their respective categories with a separate page for each scene If you re doing production strips by hand you ll be transferring the information on each breakdown sheet to a separate strip If you re exporting to Movie Magic Scheduling it s preferable to do the breakdown sheets there as you ll also be adding more detailed Crew information Scheduling s breakdown reports are more comprehensive and can be customized to your needs and changes to breakdown sheets are immediately updated on the production strips Setup Breakdown Sheets To change the page layout of Screenwriter s Breakdown Sheet Under the Production Menu select Breakdown Tagging then Edit Categories A Breakdown Sheets Edit screen displays Click on the Setup Breakdown Sheet button SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES A Breakdown Sheets Setup screen displays showing how the sheet appears when printed Of course a category displayed here will be replaced by tagged items that belong to that category To change a Heading such as STUNTS double click on it and type the new Heading text Ca
199. gets Add new unconditional Branches and new Branch Targets by double clicking anywhere on the graph where there is not a boxed Branch Target The Branch Point Menu appears allowing you to add an existing branch or create a new one New Branch Points added this way are added at the end of the Branch Target It s possible that the added Branch Target could never be arrived at in the normal playing of the game For example if prior to adding a new Branch point in the graphing mode your branch target ends in gt IF USER lt JUMPS OVER CLIFF gt THEN GOTO CLIFF BASE 15 OTHERWISE GOTO GARDEN 7 lt ENDIF Any automatically added branch points added after this would never be arrived at as the user is already either going to Garden or Cliff Base Renumbering Branch Targets As you add delete and move Branch Targets their numbering may get out of sequential order There is not a problem for the program but if it confuses you go ahead and renumber the branch targets Under the Format Menu select Renumber All Branch Targets All Branch Targets are renumbered to sequential numbers in the script and all Branch Point references are adjusted If you have Branch Points which reference Branch Targets that have been completely removed running this function notifies you of that fact SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Multimedia Run Time Player The Multimedia Run Time Player RTPLAYER EXE is a separat
200. ghlighted making it easier to then apply another format Default is unchecked Enter in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name If checked QuickType creates a new Character Name element when you press Ene in a Dialogue element To go to an Action element instead press Ene twice or press Crt Ente Unchecked pressing Ente creates a new Action element Pressing the ENTER key in Action takes you to Character Name With this option enabled if you press lt ENTER gt when in an Action element it will take you to a new Character Name instead of another Action element If you want to go to another action element then you ll have to press lt CTRL ENTER gt Pressing the ENTER Key in Action w Hidden Names goes to Dialogue With this option enabled if you press lt ENTER gt after an action line that follows a Dialogue line it will automatically put in the same name for you and drop you into dialogue This is because Action in play format is the same as parentheticals but should be broken over page breaks With this option set the ONLY way to put in two lines of action in a row is to press CTRL ENTER to explicitly have it enter action NOTE This option ONLY takes effect when you are in a script that has Action in Parentheticals and has the option Cont d Dialogue shouldnt have Character Names These are typical settings for Play Format Pressing the ENTER Key in Transition takes you to Action With this option enabled w
201. ght Mouse button a traditional pop up Menu or Screenwriter s easier to use PowerPanel The following three options are only available if you ve selected the PowerPanel Make Selection When you Release the Right Mouse Button If checked activates the PowerPanel button the mouse cursor is over when you release the right mouse button Unchecked the PowerPanel button must be clicked to activate it Display Block Editing Panel when you choose any Block Selection Button If checked displays the PowerPanel block editing functions Cut 149 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 150 Paste etc when you select text using a PowerPanel selection button Unchecked returns you to your script with the text highlighted for editing Move Cursor to Right Click Position If checked moves the flashing text cursor to the same position as the mouse cursor before displaying the PowerPanel Unchecked the text cursor does not move Multimedia Page Use Smart Activity Arrows If checked displays a different number of angle brackets gt gt gt next to activities to denote their nesting level Unchecked all activities display gt next to them Automatically Pop Up Variable List when typing lt in a User Activity If checked typing a left angle bracket lt in a User Activity automatically pops up a list of existing variables Unchecked no list is made available When Printing Branch Points print the page num
202. h Multi Locked Page Breaks and fall between two existing A Pages Choose this option if you want a new Page Break added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Number For example a Page inserted between Page 12A and 12B would be 12A1 the next one would be 12A2 and so on Multi Lock Page between 1 amp 1A is Determines how a Multi Lock Page inserted between a Normal Page and an A Page is numbered 1 A Adds a Dash plus the A Letter after the page number 1AA Adds the A Letter plus the Multi Lock Letter after the page number 175 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 176 A1 Flips the normal A Page numbering order Revision Mark Text Allows you to enter a character used for printing and displaying all Revision Marks in this script Default Revision Mark Text is an Asterisk Revision Mark Right Margin Specifies the distance of the Revision Mark from the right hand side of the page in 1 10ths of an inch A value of 10 would print 1 from the right hand side of the page a value of 5 would have them print 1 2 etc Locked Letter Skip List Certain letters are seldom used for Act Scene and Page numbering due to the potential for confusion Common pairs skipped due to their similarity are the letter I and the number 1 the letter O and the number 0 the letters E and F Clicking on the Locked Letter Skip List button displays a List of letters of the alphabet Check thos
203. han Text Line Spacing and still look acceptable Below 90 it becomes noticeable to the reader Adjustable in single percentage points from 85 to 115 Macintosh Compatibility Mode Used for moving a script back and forth between Movie Magic Screenwriter and Movie Magic Screenwriter for Macintosh This feature ensures that you cannot use cheating functions that are not compatible across the two platforms Approximate of Lines on Page As you make changes to the Margins and Line Spacing items above this number recalculates the number of lines that can fit on your page It assumes you re using Courier 12 point font and will be inaccurate if you mix fonts or sizes Current Total Page Count As you make changes to the Margins and Line Spacing items above this number recalculates the number of pages in your script It assumes you re using Courier 12 point font and will be inaccurate if you mix fonts or sizes Stretch Short Pages to Fill Screenwriter s rules for page breaking as set on the Page Break screen of Editing Script Formats under the Format Menu can result in pages with more white space at the bottom known as short pages Check this box to have Screenwriter stretch the text on short pages to make them look more like regular pages e Short by a min of lines Enter the minimum number of lines a page must be short before it will be stretched Accepts values between 1 and 10 with a default of 3 e Stretch by a ma
204. happens in the scene where it takes place etc Numbering each card shows the flow of the story from scene to scene Adding a scene is as easy as inserting a new card between two others Moving scenes is equally simple though having to renumber the scenes each time is a chore When satisfied with the outline created with the index cards the writer can expand on that information to write the individual scenes that form the story Now Screenwriter brings you an easier way to work with index cards on your computer screen with Electronic Index Cards The information you write on each card transfers directly to a scene in your script The top line on the card becomes a Scene Heading and the description becomes Action Moving an index card is performed using the familiar Drag and Drop method and Screenwriter automatically moves the scenes in your script and renumbers them for you When you re satisfied with your index card outline switch from Index Card View to normal Script view All the work you did on the index cards is there an outline ready for you to expand into a script 27 INDEX CARDS MOVIE MAGIC Index Card View To use the Electronic Index Cards you need to enter Index Card View Under the Window Menu select View as Index Cards Your script now looks something like the following depending on the number of cards or scenes you ve created Index Card View Horizontal Layout 2 INT HALLWAY SAME TIME MORNING
205. haracter Continueds If checked Continued is not added to the Character Name on the second speech Extension If checked Continued is placed in parentheses after the Character Name for example KATY CONT D on the second speech Parenthetical If checked Continued is placed in a Parenthetical element beneath the Character Name on the second speech Only when Extensions Match If checked adds a Continued to the Character Name on the second speech only if both speeches are of the same type e g V O Unchecked adds a Continued even if the first speech was normal Dialogue and the second is V O for example Continued Separator Allows you to enter a character to use to separate a Character Name Extension from a Character Name Continued Default is the semi colon The Set Style button lets you determine how Character Name Extensions and Continueds are separated either by the Separator character or by parentheses Cont d Text Lets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc More Cont d Lets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text to use at the end of a page s broken Dialogue when it s split by a Page Break For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc More Text Lets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text to use at the beginning of the next page s continued Dialogue when it s split by a Page
206. have scrap You can find this document by going into the Window menu At the bottom of this menu it lists all the open documents Simply click on your scrap file and the document will display If you would like to keep the scrap file simply go to the File menu and click Save Give the new file a different name Click on OK to save it If you selected Copy To clicking on Cancel discards the new file and leaves your text intact in your original script If you selected Cut To clicking on Cancel discards the new file and leaves your text on the Clipboard but removed from your original script You still need to Save it to another file or Paste it back into your script otherwise you have deleted the text Merging Scripts There may be occasions when you want to combine two scripts into one file such as when two writing partners are writing different scenes of the same script To merge the scripts 1 2 Open the first script the one you want to merge into Place the cursor at the position you want the second script to be added The new Pasted From text will appear after the Element the cursor is in Under the Edit Menu select Paste Special and then select Paste from At the menu of scripts displayed select the script to merge from Click Open to combine the two scripts Screenwriter prompts you about how you d like to format the incoming text SCREENWRITER BASIC INFORMATION The two scripts are merged To C
207. he first day s revisions have a single asterisk the second day s revisions have two asterisks and so on Screenwriter handles this with a Revision Locking Count which you increase by locking the Current Revision Marks Locking Current Revision Marks Screenwriter produces two types of Revision Marks Current Revision Marks and Locked Revision Marks Current Revision Marks Are either entered automatically by the Auto Revision function or manually by pressing the Asterisk key Are the only revision marks removed by selecting Remove Current Revision Marks under the Format Menu Are the only revision marks found when you select Next Current Revision Mark from the GoTo menu Are the only revision marks used to select pages to print when you select Asterisked Pages under the Print Menu To Lock Current Revision Marks Under the Production Menu select Animation Locking then Lock Current Rev Marks Once the Current Revision Marks are locked they become Locked Revision Marks 188 SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Locked Revision Marks Are former Current Revision Marks which have been Locked Animation Locking does the following e Converts all Current Revision Marks into a code appropriate for the Revision Locking Level e Embeds this code in the text where the Current Revision Mark previously was e Increases the Revision Locking Level To Display Locked Revision Marks Under the Fil
208. he Editing tab 3 Check or Uncheck the Allow Typeover box Formatting Text Screenwriter deals with text formatting Bold Underline Italics Strikeout by placing hidden format codes surrounding the formatted text One code starts the format another ends it In normal use you won t need to be aware of these codes Screenwriter s default is to Hide Format Codes To display the codes Under the File Menu select Display Options then Show Format Codes A checkmark appears next to it reminding you it s on Bolding Text To format existing text as Bold Select the text Then e Click on the Bold Button labeled with a B on the Top SpeedBar Or e Or press c 8 or e on the keyboard To format an entire Element as Bold place the cursor in the Element Then 1 Click on the Cheat Element Button on the Top SpeedBar the button with a hand holding a card up a sleeve Or press e on the keyboard 85 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 2 On the Cheat Element Menu Check the Bold CheckBox 3 Select OK and the entire Element is made Bold Underlining Text To format existing text as Underline Select the text Then e Click on the Underline Button labeled with a U on the Top SpeedBar e Or press cw u or J on the keyboard To format an entire Element as Underline place the cursor in the Element Then 1 Click on the Cheat Element Button on the Top SpeedBar the button with a hand holding a card up a sleeve Or pres
209. he element to be cheated on the first page of the two pages that it appears on Under the Format Menu select Cheat then select one of Keep Element Together c xJ Control K prevents the Element that the cursor is in from being broken Keep Group Together cJ J KJ Control Alt K keeps all elements in the current Group for example Dialogue Character Name or Scene Heading Action together over a page break Keep With Following Keeps all elements in the current Group for example Dialogue Character Name or Scene Heading Action along with the Element that follows them together over a page break A checkmark displays next to the selected cheat option To allow Screenwriter to break an element which you ve previously told it not to uncheck the cheat option by selecting it again Cheat a Page 1 Put the cursor anywhere on the Page to be cheated 55 2 3 MOVIE MAGIC Under the Format Menu select Cheat then Page Increase or Decrease the page length by the number of lines desired from 1 to 10 Cheat the Whole Script Put the cursor anywhere in the Script to be cheated Under the Format Menu select Cheat then Script You re prompted to remove all previous Line Spacing Cheating Click Yes to remove the existing cheating and start cheating afresh Click No to leave the existing cheating intact and add any new cheating to it The Setup Page Layout menu displays Change the
210. he way you prefer click on the Apply button Screenwriter exits the SpeedBar Editor and returns to Screenwriter with your preferred SpeedBar loaded or to the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window if that s where you launched the Editor from PrintScript SCWPRINT EXE PrintScript allows computers that don t have Screenwriter installed on them to display or print your scripts To make that possible you re allowed to distribute a copy of PrintScript along with your script To be usable by PrintScript your script must first be saved to a PrintScript file To Create a PrintScript File Load the script into Screenwriter and select Print under the File Menu On the Print Menu select Entire Script or a range of pages or scenes to print Check the box Create PrintScript File instead of Printing Directly Click on OK After you choose certain options your script is saved to a file in the format that PrintScript uses A box appears telling you the name and location of that file To run PrintScript under Windows 3 1 If PrintScript is installed on the computer click on its Icon to launch it If not go into the Program Manager Click on File select Run and type in SCWPRINT specifying the path For example to run PrintScript from the A drive type in A SCWPRINT Click on OK To run PrintScript under Windows 95 SCREENWRITER UTILITY PROGRAMS If PrintScript is installed on the computer click on its Icon to launch it If
211. heets Movie Magic Screenwriter has built in industry standard Breakdown Sheets and this menu item will let you layout which categories go where on the breakdown sheets e Edit Breakdown Sheets Not only can Movie Magic Screenwriter automatically generate and print its internal Breakdown Sheets this menu item will take you into a powerful Breakdown Sheet Editor where you can actually add items to categories and edit the Breakdown Sheets live All of your changes are actually added to the script in hidden script notes so that anything you do in the Breakdown Sheet Editor will also be retained for all other breakdown functions too e Print Breakdown Sheets Displays the Breakdown Scene Selection screen letting you choose which scenes to print breakdown sheets for and change the breakdown sheets Setup TV Breakdowns Shows options for TV sitcom production breakdowns e Generate Rundown Sheet Displays a Menu where you can choose options for printing TV Sitcom Scene Rundowns Can generate or regenerate Character Lists before printing Allows you to enter Script Title Production Episode Draft Version Date auto entered but editable Director Offers these printing options Choice of Font and font Size Box Width Lets you choose the width of the blank boxes printed for timing notes etc Accepts a value between 0 5 and 2 inches in 1 10 inch increments Box Min Height Lets you choose the minimum height of the blank b
212. hen you press lt ENTER gt in a transition element then you will be taken to an Action element SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Enter in Script Note adds Hard Return If checked QuickType adds a Hard Return in a Script Note when you press Exe ending the line short and taking you to another line Unchecked pressing me in a Script Note creates a new Action element following the note When entering a character name show the name that will be entered if you press ENTER as GRAY TEXT on the same line With this option enabled when you press lt TAB gt and start typing in a Character Name any existing name that matches the letters you ve typed will display on the same line in a dark gray indicating that this name will be put in if you press lt ENTER gt at this point Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical If checked QuickType creates a new Parenthetical element when you press in a Dialogue element To go toa Character Name element instead press again Unchecked pressing creates a new Character Name element When Parsing Scene Headings for the Locations List only strip off known Time of Days If checked QuickType only uses a Time of Day from the Time of Day User List when displaying a Unique Locations List Unchecked it uses any Time of Day text following the correct number of dashes Display on screen in place of the Courier New TrueType Font If checked this allows you to select an alternative font for
213. here you can hide unhide a character name A hidden name does not appear on the Character Name pop up list which appears when you press the key Use for a character who s not in many scenes and whose name you don t want to always appear on the Character List Hide Locations in Pop Up List This Menu allows you to hide certain Locations so that they don t appear on the automatic pop up lists of Locations used when entering Scene Headings You would generally use this function to remove locations you aren t going to use again in the script Cheat Shows options for tweaking the margins of the selected element the current page the entire script etc Reset Cheated Shows options for Undoing any previous cheating you ve done Change Element Type Shows options for changing the current element from Action to Shot for example Also allows changing to Left or Right Column as in two column simultaneous dialogue or AudioVisual format and changing the margins for Right or Left Columns Repaginate Now Forces a complete repagination screen redraw SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Run SmartCheck The SmartCheck feature finds and corrects any common formatting errors you may have made Useful just before printing your script Scene Character Lists Lists the Characters in a scene putting them in parentheses after each Scene Heading Used typically in TV sitcom production e Generate Displays a Menu with options for generating Ch
214. his will stay the way you entered it unless you manually change it It only changes the appearance of future Act Scene Info you create after changing the setting To change existing Act Scene Info use the Search amp Replace command Put Scene Info in Parenthesis If checked puts Parentheses around the Scene Information text as is required in some TV Sitcom formats Center S Info If checked all Scene Information text is centered horizontally between the Scene Information margins Unchecked Scene Information text starts at the Scene Information left margin Put in SCENE If checked displays the word SCENE along with Scene Numbers Unchecked Scene Numbers display alone Number Scenes Continuously If checked Scenes are numbered continuously from first to last Unchecked Scene Numbering restarts at 1 from each Act Break Starting Number Allows you to enter a Scene Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Numbering Scheme Lets you choose how Scenes are numbered from one of the following schemes SCENE A If checked uses letters to number the scenes SCENE 1 NUMBERS If checked uses numbers to number the scenes SCENE ONE If checked uses words to number the scenes SCENE I ROMAN If checked uses Roman numerals to number the scenes Script Notes Display Notes in Script lf checked displays Script Notes onscreen Unch
215. ia an internet message server such as AOL instant Messenger or ICQ e E mailing the IP address however this can take as long as a day depending on your e mail provider Enter Partner s IP or Let Partner do it This allows you and your partner to enter each other s IP address for iPartner to make a connection Click Enter Partner s IP if you wish to enter your Partner s IP address to connect or if Let Partner do it if you wish to have your partner enter your IP address Whichever one you choose your partner will need to choose the other one in order for a connection to be made Who ever initiates the connection does not affect how iPartner performs both people will have the same privileges and capabilities Trouble Shooting This button will bring up a text screen with known issues helpful tips as well information on problems with connecting and using iPartner Cancel This will close the iPartner window and return you to your script Connect on port number This is the TCP port that iPartner uses to connect with By default it should be 2200 For more info see section on Trouble shooting iPartner SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES USING iPartner The Chat Window Once you and your partner are connected you both will see a Chat Window which generally looks like the following though of course the exact text will vary fo Connected to 192 168 3 126 PiE x BUIN RN fichn_Doe y Send Script Sho
216. ikeout 214 236 Striking Out Text 86 STUTIL 193 Style Sheets in Rich Text Format 198 Substitute for Courier New when printing 105 147 Substitution Text 58 62 64 Suddenly Susan 245 Suggest 90 surnames 225 swap file 231 Switch Element 236 INDEX Switch Elements 49 Switching between Windows 17 Swplayer exe 242 Swscript ico 243 synchronize scripts 115 7 Tab amp Enter 40 Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical 133 TAG 62 159 Tag Item as 185 Tag Item Globally 185 221 Tag Items Globally 185 Tag Text 58 62 Tagged file 197 Tagging Items 184 Tagging Mode 184 221 Taped Sitcom format 35 TEASER 46 62 Technical Support Questions and Answers Synonyms 215 Television Templates 37 154 244 Template folder 37 Temporarily Disable Locking of Pages 196 224 Locking of Scenes 196 224 Text Alias 212 Text Angle 107 Text Color 152 Text Editing 78 text element 24 25 Text Entry Editing 43 Text Entry Editing Page 131 text format 87 Text Interpretation Menu 198 Text Line Spacing 96 Text or Numerical Input Fields 15 The Drew Carey Show 244 The iPartner Window 229 The Larry Sanders Show 245 The Nanny 246 The Production Cycle 165 The Simpsons 245 The Single Guy 245 The Young and the Restless 246 thenanny scw 246 thes dic 243 Thesaurus 93 215 236 Third Rock from the Sun 244 MOVIE MAGIC THRU 174 Tilde 88 Tile 17 230
217. in a text element on the Title Page Moving a Text Element Select the text element by single clicking on it with the mouse You can now move it using any of these methods e Dragging it to where you want it to go e Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard e Clicking on the Horizontal and Vertical text alignment buttons at the right of the title page Align Horizontally e Left Aligns the left edges of all selected text boxes with the left edge of the first text box that was selected e Right Aligns the right edges of all selected text boxes with the right edge of the first text box that was selected e Centers Horizontally centers all selected text boxes with the horizontal center of the first text box that was selected 24 SCREENWRITER TITLE PAGE e Left to Right Aligns the right most box directly against the right edge of the left most of the two boxes This option is ONLY available when you have exactly two text boxes selected e Center on page Centers all selected text boxes with respect to the width of the page taking into account the binding margin if checked If more than one text box is selected then they will be centered as a group that is to say that their total width furthest left to furthest right is the value which will be used to center them rather than each one being centered individually e Undo Alignment Cancels the last alignment option selected unless the text elements in question have be
218. ines where the User or player of the Multimedia program interacts with the program by making choices All User Activities must be in the form of a statement that has a result of either true or false such as IF USER PRESSES BUTTON THEN If the User presses the button then the statement is true otherwise the statement is false An Activity line usually starts with the word IF and with certain exceptions contains the word THEN It is indented from the left hand margin in All Caps and has one or more automatically generated angle brackets pointing to it For example gt IF YOU PICK UP THE GLOWING SWORD THEN 65 66 MOVIE MAGIC If the user picks up the glowing sword then all the program instructions text and or dialogue between this User Activity and the next User Activity containing the words ENDIF are processed Otherwise those instructions are ignored and skipped Consider this sample game fragment 1 DUNGEON The dungeon is cold and damp Dangerous looking fungus grows from the dank walls encrusted with centuries of lime deposit There are two open cells visible The main corridor of the dungeon continues to the right vanishing behind the second cell gt IF YOU LOOK IN FIRST CELL THEN The bones of a hapless prisoner lie where they fell from rusty manacles on the wall There is nothing else in the cell lt ENDIF gt IF YOU LOOK IN SECOND CELL THEN
219. ing or editing command in Screenwriter For ease of use the method using the Mouse and the Main Menu Bar is emphasized As you become more familiar with Screenwriter you many want to use Keyboard Shortcuts and SpeedBar Icons To see what command a SpeedBar Icon represents use the mouse to move the cursor over the icon without clicking on it A box of explanatory Hint text displays directly beneath the icon and any Quick Key shortcut displays on the left of the Bottom Status Bar For a list of Main Menu Bar commands see the Appendix chapter entitled Main Menu Bar For a list of Keyboard Shortcuts see the Appendix chapter entitled Command Keys Moving the Cursor Use the following keys to move the cursor around the script quickly J J Previous Element J Next Element cof r Previous Scene C Next Scene cuJ feve Previous Script Page c oJ Next Script Page crf er Goto Top of Script cof e esl Goto End of Script cuJ c Goto Page Menu GI Next character J Previous character le Next Word cuj e Previous Word SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING gt 3 Beginning of current line End of current line Previous Line Next Line opg Previous Screen g E y Next Screen g y Asterisked items are the default keystrokes They can be changed under the File Menu by selecting Program Options then the Keyboard button Right Clicking with PowerPanel Screenwriter gives you an a
220. ing screen where you can define a default printing layout for Index Cards Print Color Text Highlight If checked prints color highlighted text in color on color printers and with a grayed background on black amp white printers Unchecked ignores color highlighted text and prints normally Always Compress PrintScript Files If checked PrintScript files are saved in a compressed file format compressed by 20 which prevents someone from hacking the file and extracting your script s text This format is prone to less errors when sending by E mail It also allows you to password protect your PrintScript file The recipient of a compressed PrintScript file must have the current version of the PrintScript program to access the script When printing to PDF prompt user with With this option enabled when you create a PDF Adobe Acrobat file it will ask you whether it should automatically display the Scene Heading Bookmarks and which if any non printing Script Notes should it include With this option NOT enabled it will automatically use the last PDF Printing Options that you had chosen When printing by Scenes print entire pages If checked prints all of the selected Scene s pages This includes the text from the previous scene that begins the first page of the selected Scene and the text from the following scene that continues the page after the selected Scene ends Unchecked prints the selected Scene s text only Text from s
221. ini 242 Sitcom2 ini 242 Skip Once 90 Slave view 118 SmartCheck 140 203 213 SmartCheck 104 140 141 SmartCheck Page 140 SmartCheck Prompts 141 SmartTab 133 134 SmartTab Plus 134 Soaps 35 Soft Hyphen 52 235 239 Sort Breakdown 110 180 Sorted Alphabetically 113 183 Spaces Speak Silently 125 226 Speak Text 114 123 225 Speaker 229 Speaking 121 Speaking Characters First 113 183 Spec Scripts 97 103 146 Special Keys 233 Speech Numbering 108 190 Speed Buttons 15 Speedbar Editor 153 248 INDEX Spell 92 250 Spell Menu 215 SpellCheck 89 90 92 215 217 234 251 SpellCheck 89 90 217 SpellCheck as you Type amp Edit 91 SpellCheck as you Type and Edit 141 SpellCheck Element 90 215 SpellCheck Entire Script 90 215 SpellCheck Forwards 90 215 SpellCheck Page 90 215 SpellCheck Word 90 215 spellchecking 193 Spelling 141 Spin City 245 spincity scw 245 Stage Play 36 Stage Play format 35 Standard 112 182 Star Trek Voyager 245 Start 249 Start 1st Forced Page on Line Start Each Branch Target 150 Start New Scene 47 Start Next Revision 169 218 Start SpellCheck 90 Starting Number 160 Starting Number 160 Starting Page Number 163 startrek scw 245 Startup 137 Startup options 18 Step By Step 245 stretch 96 stretch 96 Stretch by a max of lines 96 Stretch Short Pages to Fill 96 StrikedOut 87 Strikeout 86 224 Str
222. inueds if a scene carries over to the A Page Unchecked Top Scene Continueds won t carry over to the A Page even when the scene does Consider a Page to be revised if the last element is edited such that some or all of its text is pulled over onto a new A Page even when there are no revision marks on the original page With this option enabled when you edit a page in a locked script such that the page break causes all or part of the last element of that page to be pulled over to the next page it will treat that original page to be revised as it lost some text despite the fact that it may have no revision marks on it With this option NOT enabled it will ONLY consider a page to be revised if it has a revision mark on it or it is a new flexible A Page or Multi Locked page When flipping Multi locked Scene Numbers with double letter text i e 12AA keep the AA text in its non flipped original order rather than flipping it e g 12AC would become AC12 rather than CA12 With this option enabled and you have a script with Multi Locked Scene Numbers and you have it set to flip the order of these numbers then it will keep the multi locked letters in their original order rather than flipping them too thus scene 23AD would be reported as AD23 With this option NOT enabled and you have a script with Multi Locked Scene Numbers and you have it set to flip the order of these numbers then it will also flip the order of the multi lo
223. ion Entire Scenes that ANY of the Selected Character s is are in If checked scans the script and finds only those scenes where At Least One of your selected characters is present Those scenes are automatically placed in the Selected Scenes window ready to be printed Entire Scenes that ALL of the Selected Character s is are in If checked scans the script and finds only those scenes where All of your selected characters are present Those scenes are automatically placed in the Selected Scenes window ready to be printed 101 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts If checked prints dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only If checked prints dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially but only Revised dialogue speeches which have Asterisks in their right margin Select Names Click on one or more Character Names in this window to print their dialogue Click on a name again to de select it Select All Click on this button to select all Character Names in your script Clear Selected Click on this button to de select all Character Names you ve selected Click on OK to save your Dialogue selection and return to the Print Menu or Cancel to discard your selection Character List If checked prints an alphabetical list of all Character Names in the script Unique Locations List
224. ion paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Script Notes should be surrounded by two angle brackets like the following lt lt Make sure we keep the ages consistent gt gt Forced Page Break Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Contains exactly the following text Forced Page Break 30 SCREENWRITER INDEX CARDS To move to another Index Card press e Edit an Index Card Scenes containing regular script elements such as Action Dialogue Script Notes etc can be edited in Index Card View To ensure that your changes translate correctly back to the script scenes follow the guidelines in the Write an Index Card table above Non Editable Index Cards You will not be able to edit the Index Cards if e The script contains Locked Page Breaks e The script contains Locked Scene Headings e The script contains Act Scene Information TV or Stage Play formats e The script contains non printing text and you re using Screenwriter in 16 bit mode NOTE If you have Cheated any elements in a scene editing that scene s Index Card causes all cheating of all elements in that scene to be lost Shuffle an Index Card Screenwriter allows you to move Index Cards around and change their order by Dragging and Dropping them This is done in Shuffle Mode entered by clicking on the Shuffle button on the bottom right of the SpeedBar
225. ions available in the script s source code Useful for debugging a script that isn t performing as you intended Return to Script This button below the other control buttons stops the playing of the game and exits the Multimedia Run Time Player It returns you to the multimedia script you were playing Activity Window This window directly to the right of the Control Buttons offers choices for the user If there is a User Activity currently pending it asks you whether or not to perform that activity Yes and No buttons are displayed If you are at a Branch Point one or more Branch Targets are listed under a Go to heading Double Click on our choice of branching If your script offers only one place to branch to there is only one Branch Target listed You must still double click it to perform that branch Multimedia Demo To see how all these features work in a multimedia script open the script named Mm demo scw This is a short Multimedia adventure game 1 Under the File Menu select Open 2 At the Open Menu select Mm demo sew and click on Open 3 After the script opens go to the File Menu and select Play Multimedia Script Printing a Multimedia Script When it comes to printing Multimedia scripts are treated the same as any other script See the Printing chapter of this manual for details 77 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 78 Text Editing There is usually more than one way of performing any text select
226. irst copy them into a User List in their original script 1 Open the script containing the User List items you want to load SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS 2 Under the Format Menu select Edit User Lists 3 Click on the button of the items to copy e Character Names e Scene Body Text e Transitions 4 At the bottom left of the screen a Copy from Script button displays Click on it and a menu of the unique text items for that element displays 5 Double click on an item to copy it to the User List Click on the Close button when finished 6 Click OK to save the User List and exit editing or Cancel to discard changes 7 Save the changes to the script s User Lists by saving the script file 8 Now you can load the items you ve added to this script s User List into another script See Loading User Lists above Saving Lists as the Default Lists for all New Scripts To save User Lists you ve made changes to as the default User Lists for new scripts 1 Under the Format Menu select Edit User Lists 2 Make changes to your User Lists as described in the sections above 3 Click the Save as Defaults For all New Scripts checkbox The new defaults do not affect any existing scripts To apply the new defaults to User Lists of existing scripts load them from a new script that contains them See Loading User Lists above Default User Lists When you install Screenwriter all User Lists except for Character Names Scene Body
227. irst scans the script to find existing text in those elements Then it adds text from the User List and displays You only need to add to either of these User Lists if you e Write more than one script with the same Characters or Locations for example for multiple episodes of a TV series and want them to display automatically e Want Alias Text for specific Character Names for example typing vk to have the program enter Von Karajan e Already typed in lists of this text elsewhere such as in an outline or a separate story development program and want to re use this work User Lists for Act Scene Info and End of Act Text have Alias Text that is only used for auto text recognition The actual text is used for pop up menus and for replacing the Alias Text 58 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Act Scene Info The Alias for Item A is set to NEWACT When you type NEWACT it starts a new ACT changes the element to ACT INFORMATION replaces the text with ACT and increases the Act Number The Alias for Item B is set to SAMEACT When you type SAMEACT it changes the element to ACT INFORMATION replaces the text with ACT but keeps the same Act Number The Alias for Item C is set to NEWSCENE When you type NEWSCENE it changes the element to Scene Information replaces the text with SCENE if appropriate and increases the Scene Number or not depending on whether it follows a New Act and on your settings
228. is a Sample Page showing how a typical page will look with the current settings Adjustments made to the Top Margin Bottom Margin or Binding Adjustment change the Sample Page display Top Margin This is the fixed space between the top edge of the page and the first line of the Page Header Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 3 to 5 inches Bottom Margin This is the minimum amount of space between the last line of Text on the page not including Bottom Scene Continueds and the bottom edge of the page Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 3 to 5 inches Binding Adjustment Left and Right Margins are determined by the Elements of the Script Format you re currently using The Binding Adjustment allows you to add 95 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC 96 to or subtract from the leftmost Margin shifting all your page s text left or right without changing the width of its elements Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 5 to 5 inches Text Line Spacing Sets the amount of white space between consecutive lines of text in the same paragraph Entering a value of less than 100 for example 95 can fit 2 or 3 extra lines of text on each page and make your script perhaps 5 or 6 pages shorter Adjustable in single percentage points from 85 to 115 Blank Line Spacing Sets the size of the blank line spacing that Screenwriter places between elements This can be set slightly lower t
229. ision Mark Takes you to the next Current Revision Mark Pressing J e repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu Next Strikeout or Colored Text Takes you to the next Strikeout text or Colored text Next Hidden Text Takes you to the next Hidden text SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Last Position Returns the cursor to the last position in the script where you where typing editing Bookmark Displays the floating Bookmarks menu Allows you to set a bookmark delete a bookmark or go to a previously set bookmark Spell Menu Word Ctrl L Element Page Forwards Entire Script Thesaurus F5 Word Web Ctl F5 Count Words Check Homonyms Pause Autocorrection Ctrl Alt S Clear Ignore List Change Dictionary Select Language Edit User Dictionary Word Spellchecks the Word that the cursor is currently in Element Spellchecks the Element that the cursor is currently in Page Spellchecks the current Page Forwards Spellchecks from the cursor position to the end of the script Entire Script Spellchecks all text in the script Thesaurus Displays Synonyms for the word that the cursor is currently in Word Web Runs the freeware Thesaurus Dictionary Brainstorming program called Word Web if installed If it s not installed prompts you with the worldwide web address of the author for downloading of the files Macquarie Concise Megalex Macquarie Concise Dictionary av
230. itan Index Cardis tnana A a aea e EE OE aE 31 Shuttle an Ind x Cardio ass 31 Shuffle Multiple Index CATAS isis cintia sieeve cd ce Sea s tad Lia s di it 31 Printing Index Cards teisesse a A E E A R chida tostadas 32 Exit mde Card Vie Wi A ed e TA AI 33 SCRIPT FORMATS eneo a aa a ana a 35 Loading a Script ForMatoccioiorociolonnicndinasnnn nho co cicianns inai ead iea eei AVIE iedo nei eai eaii aes 35 SCREEN Play is E AE E it Sadie E E T E 35 Sitcom Version da a aa at ias 35 Sitcom Version A ii ti 35 Stagen lay i a 36 Radio P SATE RO E AAA AL a ay 36 Novelista att canadenasadsthbeebsseoueeteetest ees 36 MultiMedia A AAA A badd ages 36 User Defined ii A A A A a its 36 From a Scripte e ro a e id 36 Oth r Formats ia 36 AIM AMOO is A A A ias cia 36 ATUIGIOV IS all erg EN 36 Word ProCessOr sie dyst NA 36 Television Templates ir 3 ccccas c2ie aseadinaysia deshage cdetanes el ai eadi ty eE O KIEA ie Re ea destaca 37 Creating a User Defined Format issi isr rieira te inire ds Eae aea EAA EE eee AEAEE IERRA 37 WRITING TENE SCREEN NA di 39 Els ii A A A A A Gig Bi ETN 39 Creating Blements eaor hor ee RE TEE ains ti ii Loehtel ss 39 Tab Ce A OI 40 Fade lira ota 40 Scene CAINS A AAA AAA E AAEE EEA A 40 O A 41 Time DaVinci densa cecdeodsdaedatanss deteasderdantacecceeradneiinse 41 AI A eS sede Tet bas Rae AE lati el ces bette eh east aes 42 Character Names si a ee deat eves 42 Alt Key Character Names nas eT rae eaa A AEE A Saeta E ai 43 Characte
231. ite often that a location is identified with slight variations throughout the script for example you may introduce a location as INT MOUNT PLEASANT LIBRARY but subsequently simply call it INT LIBRARY Use this function to teach Movie Magic Screenwriter which locations are really the same place and have it report them both as the primary name in all breakdowns Associate Items with Names Since it is not uncommon that a character may have a prop or costume like glasses or a whip that they always have Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to allow you to associate that item with the character so that every time the character appears that item is automatically listed on the breakdown information Associate Items with Locations Use this function to associate props set dressings or effects like fire or a wind machine with a location in which they 221 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 222 always appear and Movie Magic Screenwriter will then automatically report these items every time a scene occurs in that location e Movie Magic Scheduling Export Exports your tagged items for import directly into Movie Magic Scheduling Allows you to choose from a list of scenes from your script e Print Standard Breakdowns Movie Magic Screenwriter has its own powerful internal breakdown capabilities Select this item to go to a Breakdown Sheet menu where you can select what and how you want your breakdowns printed e Layout Breakdown S
232. iter breaks an action line over a page break it will put in closing and starting parentheticals as if these broken action elements were each individual elements Pagination Delay Lets you specify how long Screenwriter should wait when there s a pause in your typing before automatically repaginating your script If your writing is interrupted by the automatic repaginating increase the pagination delay Not Real Time If checked Screenwriter won t automatically paginate your script as you write This speeds up Screenwriter on slower computers Your script is automatically repaginated when you Print or use the Goto command You can manually tell Screenwriter to Repaginate Now under the Format Menu Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses If checked treats Ellipses as a sentence ending for purposes of page breaking Unchecked pages won t be broken at ellipses Allow Normal Word Processor Mode If checked allows you to use control w to switch from a script format to WP mode where and Enter function as they do in Word Processing programs Allow Swear Words in Thesaurus With this option enabled the thesaurus will display vernacular swear words as synonyms for words like excrement With this option NOT enabled the thesaurus will not display vernacular swear words as synonyms for words like excrement Use arrows instead of claws for Spell Smart Check With this option enabled the Spell Check and SmartCheck will use arrows
233. ividual Character Continued Individual Page Length Total Script Length Temporarily Disable e Locking of Pages Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Pages are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions e Locking of Scenes Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Scenes are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions 196 SCREENWRITER IMPORTING SCRIPTS Appendix B Importing Scripts Screenwriter can Directly open script files saved in these formats e ASCII e RTF Rich Text Format e Final Draft RTF with Style Sheets in Rich Text Format e MS Word 5 5 for DOS e MS Word 2 0 6 0 and 7 0 for Windows e WordPerfect 5 1 amp 6 x files for DOS and Windows e WordStar for DOS e Scriptware Tagged e Movie Master Screenwriter also supports Cut amp Paste importing directly from other Windows programs Preparing a Script for Importing No matter which format you import your script into Screenwriter from there are two simple rules which must be followed e In the original file each script element i e Character Name Dialogue Action etc must start on its own line e The script must be in a general script format i e Character Names before Dialogue and so on NOTE The following instructions assume that your Screenwriter script subdirectory is set to C Movie Magic Screenwrit
234. kdown Categories 186 Edit Categories 186 221 Edit how Color Displays 219 Edit Menu 209 Edit Pronunciation 125 227 Edit Script Formats 154 INDEX Edit Script Formats 212 Edit Text 24 Edit Text 24 Edit Top Speed Bar 153 Edit User Dictionary 92 217 250 Edit User Lists 61 212 Edit Vocal Characteristics 125 227 Edit Voice Name 125 227 Edit Word 92 252 Editing Screen 15 Editing User Lists 59 Electronic Index Cards 27 28 element 44 46 58 203 211 212 element 40 49 55 90 179 197 211 212 215 Element Buttons 16 Element margins 151 Elements 39 155 198 200 209 Elements 39 212 Ellen 244 ellen scw 244 Ellipses 144 emergency backup 18 Enable Alt Keys for Character Name Entry 132 Enable Alt Keys for Character Name Entry 43 Enable QuickType Entry 40 134 end a line short 52 END OF 62 End of Act 46 49 134 160 End of Act Text 58 62 End of Action 50 134 End of Show 159 160 End of Show is Act Number 160 Enter in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name 132 Enter in Script Note adds Hard Return 133 Enter Partner s IP 116 228 Entire Scenes that ALL of the Selected Character s is are in 101 Entire Scenes that ANY of the Selected Character s is are in 101 Entire Script 100 104 Episodic Drama 35 ER 244 er scw 244 EVENING 62 Every Page 99 Every Page Except first Page of Scene 99 Except Following Shots 9
235. king on this button displays a Goto Act Scene Info Menu Only displays if there is Act Scene Information in the script Right Speedbar SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Show Speedbar lIf checked displays the Speedbar If it is not checked the Speedbar is not displayed This option must be checked to access the Show Element Buttons and Show Scene Pilot options Show Element Buttons If checked displays the Element buttons on the Speedbar This option must be checked to access the Show Scene Pilot option Show Scene Pilot Adds the Scene Pilot icon which looks like a cabinet to the Speedbar The Scene Pilot lists a brief summary of each scene heading It allows you to jump to a scene heading by clicking on the scene s summary Right Element Buttons If checked displays the Right Element icon buttons on the Right SpeedBar Unchecked the Right SpeedBar displays a vertical scrolling window only Ruler If checked displays the horizontal page Ruler showing Element margins Element margins can be cheated by moving the right and left margin pointers while the cursor is anywhere in an element Unchecked the Ruler does not display Zoom Screen Text Displays the Zoom Screen dialog window allowing you to alter how large text displays onscreen Click the left and right arrows or move the sliding control button left to decrease right to increase text display size Default is 90 151 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVI
236. l use of their program You may also experience slow screen refreshes and typing rates since you are actually editing the script on the master s computer A slave can request control of the script by simply placing the mouse pointer anywhere over the script and clicking The Master will then receive the following request WARNING Once the Master allows the Slave permission to edit the script both people will have the capability of editing the script However this feature was not designed to allow simultaneous editing of the script It is strongly advised that if you use this feature you communicate with each other through chat or voice when one wants to regain control of the script Otherwise it may cause unwanted changes and loss of text to occur Once the Master clicks Yes the slave can now edit the script Slave view editing capabilities Once you have permission to edit the script you can perform the following functions e Use the mouse to click in the script to edit e Use the Mouse to highlight text by holding the shift key and clicking where you want the text selection to be extended e Edit by typing in the script e Scroll by using the Up and Down Arrows or Page up Page Down You can also cut copy and paste text as well by using whatever keys are set on that computer to cut copy paste with in the Keyboard section of the Program Options These commands are being executed on the Masters computer so the slave will not
237. lank Scene Heading Scene Info or End of Act Scene Heading Display a List Menu of all unique Locations without Location already in the script Scene Heading Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY with Location NIGHT etc End of Action Add another Action Element Character Name Add a Dialogue Element If the next element is Dialogue or Parenthetical it moves to the beginning of that element 134 SCREENWRITER Parenthetical Element CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER End of Dialogue Add an Action Element Middle of Dialogue Break the Dialogue and insert an Action Add a Dialogue Element if the next element is Dialogue it moves to the beginning of that element If Enter in Dialog takes you to Character is checked on the Editing page of the Program Options Menu under the File Menu a Character Name element will be inserted instead If QuickType is not enabled these pop up menus can be displayed manually by pressing the appropriate Control key combination If you Press c SJ cuJ 5 J ae Ctrl os J Cui E While in Any element Blank Scene Heading Scene Heading with Initial Text Scene Heading with Initial Text and Location Any element Blank Shot element Any element Action or Dialogue element Any element Character Name element QuickType will Add a Scene Heading element Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT E
238. ll There is nothing else in the cell lt ENDIF gt IF YOU LOOK IN SECOND CELL THEN YOU ARE lt LOOKING IN SECOND CELL gt AND 67 68 MOVIE MAGIC Straw is strewn on the floor Nothing else is visible lt ENDIF gt IF YOU ARE lt LOOKING IN SECOND CELL gt AND YOU ENTER SECOND CELL HEN lt YOU RE TRAPPED gt AND T The door slams behind you and locks A lunatic s LAUGHTER surrounds you DISEMBODIED VOICE I ve got you now infidel Ha ha ha 2 GOTO DEAD 20 lt ENDIf Using variables allow you to base User Activities on having done other User Activities In the first Activity line we didn t use any Variables because that activity line doesn t affect anything else and there s no need to know later whether the user did that activity or not To set up an alternative sequence of events when the Activity statement is false use the words OTHERWISE or ELSE in an Activity Line Let s go back to our DUNGEON with these new tools 1 DUNGEON The dungeon is cold and damp Dangerous looking fungus grows from the dank walls encrusted with centuries of lime deposit There are two open cells visible The main corridor of the dungeon continues to the right vanishing behind the second cell gt IF YOU LOOK IN FIRST CELL THEN YOU lt LOOKED IN FIRST CELL gt AND The bones of a hapless prisone
239. lternative to Windows Right Mouse button pop up menus Called the PowerPanel it displays a panel of buttons to access the most common editing features To turn PowerPanel on 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 Select the Mouse button 3 Click on the Right Mouse is PowerPanel radio button 4 Click on OK to change to PowerPanel To turn PowerPanel off 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 Select the Mouse button 3 Click on the Right Mouse is Pop Up Menu radio button 4 Click on OK to change to Pop Up Menus If you Right click on the mouse without any text selected you ll see the following initial Panel Click on a button to select that option or bring up its Menu The center boldfaced button Select is hierarchical it has another Panel of Selection options beneath it Click on it to display them Left Click anywhere off the PowerPanel to cancel PowerPanel s options change depending on the Editing options available to you at any particular time it s context sensitive just like the Windows version 79 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Selecting Text Screenwriter uses the standard Windows methods of text selection Menu Selection Places the cursor on the word to be selected Under the Edit Menu choose from Select All Selects the entire script Select Special Displays options for selecting by e Word Selects the word the cursor s on e Sentence Selects the entire sent
240. ly Non RTF 200 Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks 199 200 importing 207 Importing a Movie Master script 201 Importing a non Windows Word Processor script 203 Importing a Screenwriter Export script 205 Importing a Scriptware for DOS script 202 Importing a Scriptware for Windows script 202 Importing a Windows Word Processor script 201 Importing a WordPerfect 5 0 for DOS 201 importing rules 197 Importing TV format 203 Importsw dat 242 Including First Word of Block 149 Index Card 32 33 Index Card SpeedBar 28 Index Card View 28 33 194 Index Card View 27 Index Cards 27 29 31 32 33 Initial Capitals 87 Initial Scene Text 58 Initial Shot Text 234 MOVIE MAGIC Insert 131 Insert 16 85 Insert mode 85 Insert Typeover 132 Insert Typeover Button 16 Insert Typeover Modes 85 INT 61 234 INT 110 180 int 40 Interact ini 242 Inter Card between cards margins 33 INTERIOR 111 181 Interior VS Exterior 110 112 180 182 IP Address 115 iPartner 114 115 117 121 122 228 Issue Revised Pages 168 Italic 86 Italicized 156 Italicizing Text 86 Italics 239 Italics 132 235 236 Italics Button 86 Item To be Tagged 185 J Justified 156 K Keep Element Together 239 Keep Group Together 55 Keep With Following 55 Keyboard Options Page 148 Keyboard Selection 81 King of the Hill 245 kinghill scw 245 L language 217 l
241. ly Disable e Locking of Pages Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Pages are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions e Locking of Scenes Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Scenes are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions Tools Menu Script Analysis Compare Two Scripts Calendar Name Bank Ctrl Alt N Speak Text gt Partner Note Commander Configuration Wizard Character Set Script Analysis Provides statistical information printable about your scenes and characters This report can also be printed or saved to a PrintScript file Compare Two Scripts Compares the differences between two versions of the same script when both are open in separate windows Automatically generates a third script with everything that s been added in Red and everything that s been removed in Strikeout SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Calendar Displays a calendar of the current month Name Bank Displays the Name Bank screen where you can select names for your characters Alphabetically displays lists of Female and Male first names and Family surnames Speak Text Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to actually read your script aloud using Microsoft s free Text to Speech engine This menu item is the gateway to this function and you should see the online
242. mat Typically it says something like Format or File Type 201 IMPORTING SCRIPTS MOVIE MAGIC or Save Type Change it to Rich Text Format or RTF If that s not available choose DOS Text or ASCII Text If DOS or ASCII options like With Line Breaks or With Formatting are available select them Click on OK to save When the file s saved exit the Windows Word Processor If importing from a different computer eject the floppy disk you saved to and insert it into your Screenwriter computer Now follow the Direct Import instructions above If importing from the floppy disk tell Screenwriter the path and file name Importing a Scriptware for DOS script First export the Scriptware script as a Scriptware Tagged file 1 6 Open Scriptware for DOS and open the script you want to import to Screenwriter Press then select Project Press E to Export Enter a new name for the export file C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts lt File Name gt TAG At the Export Options screen turn Scriptware Tagged File to ON Click on the OK button to save the Export file Exit Scriptware Now follow the Direct Import instructions above Importing a Scriptware for Windows script First export the Scriptware script as a Scriptware Tagged file 1 4 Open Scriptware for Windows and open the script you want to import to Screenwriter Under the File Menu select Export then Scriptware Tagged In the file name fiel
243. mat of Previous Word 88 Quick Help 231 Quick Help 12 Quick Key 16 Quick Lowercase of Previous Word 88 Quick Uppercase of Previous Word 88 Quick key 13 QuickLetter 44 QuickType 72 136 QuickType 16 40 49 QuickType Page 133 R Radio Buttons 15 MOVIE MAGIC Radio Play 36 REACTIVE 67 Read in Action Voice 123 225 Read in Character Voice 123 225 Read Script 126 227 ReadMe First 241 Readme wri 242 recently saved files 17 Recording Scripts 189 Redo 84 85 209 Redraw Screen 231 Registration information 231 Reloading Default User Lists 63 Remove 213 Blue Highlights 220 Current Revision Marks 220 Green Highlights 220 Locked Page Break 221 Red Highlights 220 Scene Heading w o OMITTED 221 Strikeout Codes and or Text 220 User Defined Color Highlights 220 Remove All OMITTED Scene Headings 221 Remove All or Some Script Notes 220 Remove an Auto Revision Mark 170 Remove Current Revision Marks 188 Remove Forced Page 211 Remove this word from the dictionary 227 Remove 220 Removing All Current Revision Marks 170 Renumbering Branch Targets 74 Repaginate Now 212 repagination 212 Repagination 235 Replace 90 Requested By 107 Require that user fills our APPROVED BY field when printing 107 Require that user fills out REQUESTED BY field 107 Reset 156 Reset Cheated 212 Resize the Index Cards 28 Restore Last Workspace 18 137 Restoring an
244. mats and spaces it correctly A new Scene Heading element is created and a Pop up List of Initial Scene Heading Text displays Or press Enter in a blank Action element and type t for Make this a Transition Shot At the beginning of any blank element type any Shot Text until you customize the User Lists see User Lists later in this chapter the only Shot Text that Screenwriter initially recognizes is ANGLE ON or BACK TO SCENE It is automatically formatted as a Shot element Or press Exe in a blank Action element and type h for Make this a Shot Then type the text for your Shot Press and a new Action element is created 45 MOVIE MAGIC Centered Title You can create a centered title that doesn t contain Act or Scene information As an example some writers prefer to start the first page of their script with the script s title underlined instead of Fade In First create a blank Action element Then click on the Current Element window on the Top SpeedBar and select Title Centered from the drop down Menu that displays Act Information TV and Stage Play Format Prologue Text Type any valid Prologue Text at the beginning of a blank element until you customize the User Lists see User Lists later in this chapter the only Prologue Text that Screenwriter recognizes is TEASER PROLOGUE or COLD OPENING Screenwriter automatically centers and capitalizes it New Act To start a New Act
245. matting may not transfer but you should at least be able to export all the text Be warned that not all Windows programs can handle Cut and Paste correctly NOTE For this method to work the option Share Clipboard with Other Windows Programs must be checked To check uncheck it go to the Misc page of Program Options under the File Menu 206 SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Appendix D Main Menu Bar Screenwriter s Main Menu Bar gives you access to eight main pull down Menus Most of their features have been covered elsewhere in this manual and are included here for easy reference File Menu New Opens a new script New Open Close Save Save As Shift F10 Ctrl F4 F7 F10 Save All Open Scripts Backup to Floppy Ctrl F Header Setup Title Page Publisher Page Layout Print Preview Print Printer Setup Ctrl P Publish to Internet Register with FirstUse com Program Options Display Options Hide Elements on Screen Exit Alt F4 1 HamletTheNovel SCW 2JAG SCW 3 DawsonsCreek SCW Open By default displays a list of existing Screenwriter scripts to be opened Also allows you to open files in other formats for purposes of importing Checking Always Open in Script Directory ensures that this menu always opens in the C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts subdirectory Close Exits the currently displayed script prompting you to save it Sav
246. n New Page If checked starts a new page for each new group Graph Breakdown If checked prints the breakdown as a chart instead of as text All the same information is included A sample graphic breakdown follows Print Tagged Items If checked prints or exports all tagged items along with the other breakdown information 113 OTHER FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC Other Screenwriter Features Screenwriter 4 0 has three completely new features for working with your script They are e Partner e Speak Text e Script Note Commander 114 SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES iPartner Whether you re across the building or across the world Movie Magic Screenwriter s iPartner feature lets you and a partner view write edit and kibitz over the same script as if you were in the same room together iPartner requires a standard internet connection through a non proxy server on both computers and we highly recommend at least a 56K or better modem or direct network connection See the section Trouble Shooting iPartner for more technical details iPartner major features include e The ability to allow you to view and edit a script on your partner s computer and vice versa e The ability to communicate with your partner through a typing in a chat window e The ability to speak and hear your partner requires compatible sound card and microphone e The ability to transfer scripts back an
247. n Page MOVIE MAGIC Arrange Icons 230 A Scene 173 A Scene Numbering Scheme 175 ASCII 197 ASCII File 60 212 ASCII List 60 Asterisk Headers 145 Asterisked Pages 102 Asterisked Pages 188 AudioVisual AV format 53 AudioVisual format 36 212 Auto Pop Up 136 AutoCapitalize 142 AutoCapitalize Character Names 91 AutoCapitalize Sentences 91 Auto Correct 90 92 141 217 251 Auto Correct Typos 90 91 AutoCorrection 217 Automatic Backups 138 Automatically Pop Up Variable List when typing 150 Automatically Run SmartCheck Before Printing 140 Autorevision Colors 220 Autorevision Marks 220 Auto Revision Marks 170 Autorevision User Defined Color 220 Auto Revision 220 Auto Space Sentences to Spaces 91 142 auto spacing 91 142 Auto Update Locked Headers on Revision 145 AV script format 36 Available Branch Targets 72 b Babylon 5 244 babylon scw 244 BACK TO SCENE 62 Backup to Floppy 208 Backups 138 Basic Information 11 Beep on Found Formatting Error 140 Beep on Unknown Words 91 141 Beverly Hills 90210 244 Binding Adjustment 95 Bitmap 107 Blank Line Spacing 96 Blank Lines before Printed Speeches 109 190 Blank Lines following Header 99 Blocked Text 100 SCREENWRITER Bold 132 156 239 Bold 24 234 236 Bold Button 85 Bold Headlines 33 Bolding Text 85 Bookmarks 215 Boston Commons 244 Bottom Margin 95 Bottom Scene Continueds
248. n Sized Retrieve List Displays an enlarged Open File Menu set to your default scripts subdirectory Display the Open File Menu Displays a standard Open File Menu set to your default scripts subdirectory Retrieve Last Script you worked on Opens in the last script you saved in your previous Screenwriter session Restore Last Workspace Opens all scripts you had open at the time you Exited your previous Screenwriter session Setup Script Directory This button allows you to change the subdirectory that Screenwriter uses as the default for opening saving scripts default subdirectory is C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts When you click on this button you ll see the following menu though its contents vary depending on the directory structure of your hard drive 137 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 138 Select Default Script Directory C AMOVIE MAGIC SCREENWRITER gt Movie Magic Screenwriter G Scripts j c z S OK X Cancer Hel Change the default drive by using the Drive box on the lower half of the menu default drive is C Change the default script directory to a different pre existing directory by clicking on items in the directory tree Create a new directory by typing in a new directory name in the top Edit box of the screen Click on OK to change directories Cancel to keep the existing default Setup Backup Drive Clicking this button displays the Select Backup D
249. n run normally If checked when SpellCheck is run from the Spell Menu it auto corrects Sentence spacing and capitalization without prompting you first This way sentence spacing and capitalization will be corrected even if Auto Correct is off Ignore Capitalization when checking Words If checked allows unusual Capitalization of words and sentences when SpellChecking a script Unchecked SpellCheck expects correct Capitalization of sentences proper names etc Miscellaneous Options Page Disable Warning Prompts Expert Users Only If checked removes the extra level of warning prompts that Screenwriter provides to ensure that you really want to continue with certain irreversible commands Unchecked you ll still be prompted to save your files when exiting etc but you won t be asked twice Show Open Save Progress If checked displays a progress thermometer when opening and saving large files Unchecked a Please Wait notice is displayed and opening and saving operate a little faster Show Cut and Paste Progress If checked displays a progress thermometer when cutting pasting large amounts of text to from the Clipboard Unchecked a Please Wait notice is displayed and cutting and pasting operate a little faster Share Clipboard with other Windows Programs If checked places Screenwriter s text on the Clipboard in a format most other Windows programs can read Unchecked places text on the Clipboard in
250. nd click on OK The User Dictionary Editor screen displays User Dictionary Editor C MOVIEM 1 SCREEN LXA File To Add Auto Correct Words put a colon between the INCORRECT spelling followed by the Correct Spelling ie SPELING SPELLING Main Word Auto Correct Spelling Correctin Correction Screnwriter Screenwriter Add Word Delete Word Edit Word Movie Magic Screenwriter Dictionary Editor Version 1 1 Copyright 1997 Schafer All Rights Reserved Spelling Technology 1992 1997 by LexSaurus Software Inc All rights Reserved 2 Word s in User Dictionary If opening a User Dictionary for the first time the file is empty and ready for you to add words Tab to the Word Editing window on the right of the screen Buttons below it show your options Add Word Type in the word the way you want it spelled Note if you enter an incorrect spelling here SpellCheck uses it In effect you re telling SpellCheck that this is the correct spelling Click on Add Word and the word you entered appears in the Dictionary window on the left To allow Screenwriter to Auto Correct a word as you re typing in a script enter both incorrect and correct spellings here separated by a colon For example to Auto Correct Dramatica when it s spelled as Darmatica type in Darmatica Dramatica NOTE the Auto Correct feature must be turned on for this to have any effect on your typing S
251. ndex Card View Cancel Click this button to go back to your script without moving any Index Cards or scenes in your script NOTE If you make any editing changes to Index Cards in Outline Mode selecting Cancel will not cancel those changes Cancel only cancels Shuffle changes 33 INDEX CARDS MOVIE MAGIC Go to Scene Double click on the Scene Number box at the top left of an Index Card to go to that Scene in the script 34 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Script Formats Screenwriter has pre set format files for e Screenplay e Filmed Sitcom e Taped Sitcom e TV Templates e Stage Play e Radio Play e Novel e Multimedia Interactive As a default Screenwriter loads the screenplay format each time you open a blank script file However you can easily switch to one of the other formats Loading a Script Format Under the Format Menu select Load Script Format and click on the format you want If you already have a script open and displayed onscreen loading a different format applies the new settings to your existing script Screenplay tThe standard feature film format also used for most MOW s including Miniseries Episodic Dramas including Soaps and Animation Sitcom Version I A general sitcom format for use on filmed shows Action is capitalized Dialogue is double spaced and Parentheticals are indented Sitcom Version II A general sitcom format for use on taped shows Similar to Sitcom Ve
252. nging the subdirectory drive or file type if necessary Click on OK to open the file To open a file you ve recently saved select one of the numbered files at the bottom of the File Menu You can also open a script by dragging the script icon from Windows Explorer and dropping it in the edit screen Opening Multiple Scripts Screenwriter allows you to have up to 9 files open at the same time Open multiple scripts at the same time from the File gt Open menu by holding down the lt Shift gt key and selecting a range Or press the lt Control gt key to select multiple scripts individually Displaying Multiple Windows Under the Window Menu select either Cascade or Tile Tile shows all open scripts each at full page width stacked horizontally above each other Makes for easy cutting and pasting Cascade shows all open scripts with reduced windows overlapping each other The most recently opened script is at the front becoming the currently displayed file Switching between Windows If all the windows are visible on screen switch between them by clicking anywhere on a script s window If the windows are Maximized i e at full screen size then Select the script to display by clicking on its name at the bottom of the Window Menu Or press ct E or e Lee to cycle between the open windows Opening a Previously Saved Version When you tell Screenwriter to save a script it makes a backup
253. nnanos 202 Importing a non Windows Word Processor SClipPt ooooooocccccnoncononoonconnonononconononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 203 Cleaning up Imported ScriptS occcccccconononnnoncnnnnonnononononnnnnnnnonnononnnnnnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 203 Appendix C EXPORTING SCRIPTS isi cccdesucsesitiasteestanatieislanctins artesa lite bad a 204 EXPO bit Ea o A SI a ii eee cbs 204 Pile Pei diiniita 204 Importing a Screenwriter Export SCliPt oocoooccccnnnnononocononcnnnnonnononnnnnnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnannananoss 205 Cut and Paste Exporting iy iene En ere ees ee ee eee A eis da Pvc AAA AAA 206 Appendix D MAIN MENU BAR sisi aii at 207 Fle MCh ts of Pe i ee Oey ths Ree Mia PES Oe RIES Lede Sets EE AE See OEMs dnt 207 Bit Menuisssseszastesheseadsitvdaseesbetiaessysgiresnig a Or OEA AE EE E ONE S EEEE AR 209 Format Menu respei ease tonnen aite ei kaia aa ieie Rae aS AAS i Ra TEAT ienie aE aS GEERS RASET Se 212 Search Mens iii ni io 213 Goto Ment O EN 214 Spell Menu a r T a a iD 215 Production Mentir said 217 A Bec a eta See ie EE E eee d Es hela Ss dn EAE EEE EE EE 224 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOVIE MAGIC Window Menu pervirti a en 230 A O NE 231 APPENDIX E COMMAND KEYS sindicato A ad 232 Special Reni o a by a AI Ae pi 232 Cursor Movement KeyS cocoooooooconcccccnoconononononnnnnnonnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnenonnnnnnnnnninanos 232 Control Keys epr T i ee E a A AAA A la AAA LE ns hoa 234 PUNCHON KEYS ccciosti tonada 236 Appendix F FORMAT CODES iia 238
254. nonnnonnnnnnonenonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnananns 82 Copying and Pasting with the Mouse oooooooooconcnccnonnonononnnnnnnnnnonnonononnnnnnnnnnonnanonnnnnnnninaninns 82 Cutting Copying Pasting with the Keyboard minis dise aapuyatits 82 Drageing and Dropping iia ica aaa 82 Deleting Texter aT eea E EEE E AE EEEE T LESE TaN AE CARTER SEEE a sb Ne 83 iate Ce 2 cates AAE E E E E EEAS 84 Irsert Typeovet MOTE ii AS A A A AA nels autihd tide 85 Formatting Text AAA Udbebetesdabea der EEEE 85 Bolding Texty sess A eae is as eas te he hs OR ies he VA A ee oad 85 Underlining TEXT siin aa Ee er aA geass Send endehe Gest E E Geathde Goad Shaan laaneee gents 86 ltalicizino Texto dodo alas 86 Striking Out TeX AA ERE AE OEE A A AS AA te Pea des 86 Applying Multiple Text Formats cccccononooocnncnncnnnnonononnnonnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnonnanonnnnnnnnos 87 Changing as EA E DS A Leet tay 87 Quick Format of Previous Word oocooonoccnoccnoconoconocnnncnnncnoncnoncnonnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnononeninons 88 Typing Foreign Characters obrie nds ocio Yi aves eE aea Eea ed Iar Sods dean e Sede eady 88 SpellCheck occ na A osa 89 Start SpellCheck iia aaa i 9 Auto Correct Typos RN 90 Foreign Language SpellCheck cccccceccnnenastecenenedeneatebecenenesententeh cee dvedactantahtecees 92 User DICH ON ALIS ii ites can eked ag eke eta ek a Ad 92 A Behe haen na T hve SENE EEEO Yasue ohh AEA sae Peed ess S RE baad DNE Edy 93 PRINTING THE SCRIPT 00 AA A AAA A 94 NS A AS 94 vi
255. nt Couroldn ttf a TrueType font Default 640 default 640x480 top SpeedBar definition file Default 800 default 800x600 top SpeedBar definition file Dictedit exe User Dictionary Editor Filmterm _us a dictionary file Full640 bar 640x480 top SpeedBar definition file Full800 bar 800x600 top SpeedBar definition file Importsw dat a Screenwriter data file Interact ini Multimedia Interactive format definition file Namebank fil datafile containing names for the Namebank feature Netpub exe Internet script publisher Novel ini Novel format definition file Play ini Stage Play format definition file Readme wrii the Readme file Rtf xtd nene an import export filter Sernplay ini Screenplay format definition file Scwprint exe PrintScript a stand alone view print program Sewriter gid a Screenwriter data file Sewriter hlp The Online Help File Scwriter ini the Screenwriter preferences file Scwriter SyS a System file Scwriter32 exe The Screenwriter Executable program setupbar exe Top SpeedBar Editor Sitcoml ini Sitcom Filmed format definition file Sitcom2 ini Sitcom Taped format definition file Swplayer exe the Multimedia Run time Player SCREENWRITER FILE
256. nting the Script Before printing a script you need to configure Screenwriter to work with one specific printer With only one printer connected Windows automatically selects it as the default Printer Setup Screenwriter uses Windows Print Setup screen to let you choose default settings for all your printing in Screenwriter Under the File Menu select Printer Setup The Print Setup screen displays with the name of your currently selected printer in the Name window Print Setup BE m Printer Name Generic Text Only Properties Status Ready Type Generic Text Only Where LPT1 Comment m Paper r Orientation Size Letter 8 172x11 in y Portrait Source Continuous Page Break Cancel To select another printer scroll through the list of connected printers in the Name window and click on your choice Select a Paper Size US Letter is the standard 8 1 2 by 11 paper used for screenplays Select a Paper Source AutoSelect Tray looks for paper in all your printer s sources if the Cassette runs out Select Manual Feed if your printer doesn t have an automatic feed paper Cassette Select a Paper Orientation Portrait is the standard orientation for printing 8 1 2 by 11 screenplay pages Click on the Properties button to select default Paper Graphics and PostScript options Click on OK to save your default settings Cancel to exit and discard changes 94 SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITI
257. nu select Undo Tag Items Globally Tagging an item globally tells Screenwriter to tag every occurrence of an item in the script instead of manually tagging it each time you find it yourself This saves you time and the possibility of missing an occurrence of an item To tag an item globally Select the item by double clicking on it Or under the Production Menu select Breakdown Tagging then Tag Item Globally The Breakdown Sheets menu displays If you selected an item it displays in the Item To be Tagged window If you didn t select an item type the name of the item in the window here Check the Tag Item as radio button of the Category to assign the item to If you want to be prompted each time Screenwriter finds the item check the Prompt on each Tagging box Although you can tag an item more than once in a scene as Global Tagging does it s not necessary an item only shows up once per scene in Scheduling Click OK to tag the item globally Cancel to exit without tagging Ignore Selection for Breakdowns If your breakdown is recognizing an item in a scene as being tagged when you don t want it to you can mark the text so it is ignored by breakdowns While in Tagging Mode select the item by double clicking on it A Breakdown Category screen displays Click on Ignore Selection for Breakdowns Untag All Items To remove breakdown tagging codes from all items in your entire script select Untag All Items
258. o your partner Trouble Shooting Clicking this button will take you to a list of common problems that occur with iPartner Cancel Clicking Cancel returns you to the script without implementing the iPartner SCREENWRITER The iPartner Window E Connected w Of x Dr Livingston gt Hello sir Dr Livingston gt Rick presume Don Ho gt Hello Sir Chalupa gt Drop it Chalupa gt Anythign you would like to try Don Ho gt Give me a sec Chalupa gt Oh ja sure BUIN Don Ho y Send Script Show to Partner Disconnect Als MAIN MENU BAR The top window displays the typed conversation The bottom window allows you to type text to your partner You can format the text by using the buttons that are in between the two windows B U I and N Send Script This sends the active script to your partner Show to Partner This enables Partner view a window with reduced functionality Disconnect This cancels the connection with your partner Mic This enables the microphone so that you can speak to your partner Speaker This allows you to listen to your partner Note Commander Movie Magic Screenwriter s unique Script Note Commander gives you instant access to all the Script Notes in the script from one easy window To select a Script Note simply click on it to select multiple Script Notes at the same time hold down the lt SHIFT gt key to
259. ocations List Unchecked you need to press Enter to display the list Show Running Shot Lists for entry of the following Shots If checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Shots List plus any initial shot text defined in the User List when you add a new Shot element Unchecked displays User List items only Transitions If checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Transitions List plus any Transition text defined in the User List when you add a new Transition Unchecked displays User List items only Character Extensions If checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Character Extensions List plus any new Character Extension text defined in the User List when you add a new Character Extension Unchecked displays User List items only ONLY display Matching Elements on Lists When you are in a running list and you type letters to have it highlight the selection that you want it can do one of two different things With this option enabled then in addition to highlighting the appropriate item on the list it will remove any items on the list that no longer match the text you ve typed Thus if you are in a character name and you press M and get a list with MARY MARK MANDY and MELISSA on it and you then press A the list will shrink to it MARY MARK and MANDY Press R and it will shrink to MARY and MARK and so on SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER e With this option NOT enabled then al
260. oed tiene a Cancel 7 Help Breakdowns can be sorted before printing using Primary and Secondary Sort criteria Sort Breakdown Primarily by Script Order Prints a breakdown of all scenes in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior Lists all the EXT scenes followed by all the INT scenes Location Lists by Location in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that take place in the same Location Time of Day Lists by Time of Day in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that have the same Time of Day Characters All Lists Every Character Name in the script in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Some Lists Selected Character Names in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Checking this radio button and pressing OK brings up a Select Names screen Click on one or more name s to select them then Double Click on the top bar of the Select Names screen to return to the Production Breakdowns menu NOTE If you select any Primary sort other than Script Order Time of Day Normalization is performed any scene that ends with CONTINUOUS LATER or SAME TIME is automatically given the previous Scene Heading s Time of Day Movie Magic Scheduling File Prints a breakdown to disk saving it as a Movie Magic Scheduling import file with a file extension of S
261. on Selected must be enabled as well When using this option Screenwriter prints text that is not selected in a gray box with an X through it Watermark Select to display the Watermark setup screen where you to specify how the background Watermark text should print on your scripts A read only Watermark Database which can automatically log outgoing scripts is available for separate purchase SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Text Text entered here such as production company name is the default watermark text for all scripts Can be left blank Bitmap Specifies a loadable bitmap image file to be printed as the background for each page The bitmap displays in a box to the right Slows the printing process considerably The image is applied to the current script only Distrib List Enter a loadable list of people authorized to receive your script When printing you select who gets a copy and Serialization Numbering is applied to your script copies automatically Serial Specify a starting serial number for the first copy of your script to be distributed if desired Can be a combination of letters and numbers Print Just the Serial Number without Names If checked prints the Serial Number but not the names of people on the distribution list Unchecked prints both Only available if a list and serial number are set up first Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable Select Font for Watermark Text Displays a Font set
262. on Sides 2 copies per page When you select a specific portion of text Screenwriter prints the entire page but will surround the area that is not selected with a box and cross it out When Printing sides using SELECTED Text then Gray out the Non Selected Text Box This option is used only if you have chosen to print Production Sides 2 copies per page In addition Print all Non Selected must be enabled When using this option Screenwriter prints text that is not selected in a gray box with an X through it Keyboard Options Page This page allows you to change Screenwriter s special editing keys From the scrollable lists choose your Control and Alt key preferences for Deletion Keys Delete Word Assign a key combination to delete the word the cursor is in Delete Left Word Assign a key combination to delete the word to the left of the cursor Delete to End of Line Assign a key combination to delete right from the cursor position to the end of the line Movement Keys Go to Top of Script Assign a key combination to take the cursor to the beginning of the script Go to Bottom of Script Assign a key combination to take the cursor to the end of the script Cut amp Paste Quick Keys are Choose from two competing standards used to Cut Copy Paste text in Windows programs Some use rir J siete to cut nje to copy and r J Les to paste Others use cJ 2 to cut cm J c to copy and O to paste
263. or more letters long to extend 1 or 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin If checked allows a right margin slop for smoother looking right margins in all elements Unchecked maintains strict right margins Reset The Reset button works as an Undo button for the changes you ve made to an individual Element It restores the settings to the way they were before you made changes Use the Reset button before clicking OK to exit the menu and save changes to Script Formats or it will have no effect Save as Defaults for all New Scripts If checked applies any changes you ve made to a script s elements to all new scripts Use Current Font for All Elements Applies the font type and size but not formatting such as bold italic etc in the current element to all other elements OK Exits and applies Script Format changes you ve just made to the script Cancel Exits and discards Script Format changes you ve just made to the script Specific to individual elements are these options Character Names Center Character Names lIf checked all Character Names are centered horizontally across the page an unconventional choice Unchecked each Character Name starts at the same left margin position 156 SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Character Continueds as Allows you to choose one of these options for adding a Continued to a Character Name when dialogue is split by an Action element No Automatic C
264. orator 212 Color the actual Text itself 152 Color Window 218 Colored Check Boxes 128 Colored Checkboxes 126 Colored text 214 Combine OMITTEDs that are Widowed on page 141 Compare Two Scripts 224 Completely Blank Elements 140 compressed 106 147 Configuration Wizard 131 230 241 247 Configwz exe 241 247 Connect on port number 116 Consider a Page to be revised if the last element is edited such that some or all of its text is pulled over onto a new A Page even when there are no revision marks on the original page 146 Cont d Text 157 Contents 231 context sensitive help 12 MOVIE MAGIC Continued Separator 157 CONTINUOUS 62 Control key combination 50 135 Control key 40 Control Keys 234 Convert Case 211 Converting A Pages 178 Copy 209 Copy and Paste 81 Copy from Script 61 Copy To 19 Copy to 210 Copying and Pasting with the Mouse 82 Correct at yeas Spacing when run normally 143 Correct Double Capitals 91 141 Count More Line in Page Breaking 163 Count Words 216 Courier 12 point 96 Courier 12 point font 96 Courier New TrueType Font 133 Courolda ttf 241 Couroldb ttf 242 Couroldi ttf 242 Couroldn ttf 242 Current Branch Point 72 Current Element window 40 Current Element Window 49 203 Current Page 100 Current Revision Mark 189 214 Current Revision Marks 171 188 189 223 Current Revision Marks 102 188 Current Total Page Count
265. ormally to Printer Prints the selected job using your normal printer and print settings e Create PDF Abobe Acrobat File Instead of Printing PDF which stands for Portable Document Format is the international standard for WYSIWYG cross platform document distribution It is a format created by Adobe and to view it requires Adobe Acrobat which is both shipped on our CD and is also available freely on the world wide web from Adobe s web site at www adobe com This is a very powerful format which will allow the viewer to print and view the script exactly as it appears on your screen gives them instant access to any scene heading with built in bookmarks and can optionally include all your non printing script notes If you are giving the script to anyone who does not have Movie Magic Screenwriter and they don t need to edit the script this is the format we recommend e Create PrintThing File Instead of Printing PrintThing is our own file printer viewer and if you choose this option it will print your selection in our proprietary PrintThing format which will require the PrintThing program supplied free with Movie Magic Screenwriter and automatically installed to your Movie Magic Screenwriter program directory Since PrintThing is less powerful than Adobe Acrobat unless you have been giving PrintThing files to someone for a long time and they expect it we recommend that you use the PDF format instead 103 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC
266. ormat Menu Cheating only affects the single element page or script that you apply it to Cheating is used to change the look of a script One reason for doing this is to try to fool the professional script reader who expects a screenplay to time out to one minute of screen time per script page As an example if your script is a long 130 pages you can cheat the line spacing margins etc to have it print out in the standard length of 120 pages Another use of cheating would be to stretch the text on a page to fill up the extra blank white space left by a long Dialogue element you don t want broken by a page break Cheat an Element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the element to be cheated 2 Under the Format Menu select Cheat then Element Or press e 54 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS 3 Make the desired changes to e Left and Right Margins e Lines Before the element e Interline Spacing spacing between lines of text in an element e Text Formatting bold italic underline etc e Font Type and Size e Character Continueds Cheat Right Margins Put the cursor anywhere in the element to be cheated e Press n J J to Increase the right margin by one letter e Press cuJ J J to Decrease the right margin by one letter e Repeat as necessary Cheat Page Breaks To keep text together instead of splitting it over a Page Break you can cheat the Page Break Put the cursor anywhere in t
267. ost every word processor can produce this format it is provided to make your writing experience more complete Multimedia A format designed for writing non linear scripts for Multimedia Interactive projects with decision branching and a graphical flowchart view Like Television Multimedia has no one standard format User Defined Displays a Menu of any script formats you ve previously defined Select one and the onscreen script is reformatted to those settings From a Script Displays a Menu of all available Screenwriter scripts Allows you to load the format from an existing script for example if you re writing your second Friends script you can load the format from the first one you wrote Other Formats Animation Use the Screenplay format For Screenwriter features specific to Animation Production see the Production Features chapter AudioVisual Use the Screenplay format Screenwriter currently supports limited AV script features with its Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue capacity While Left and Right Columns display onscreen sequentially in a staggered manner they print correctly side by side See Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue in the Writing the Script chapter for more details Word Processor Used from within any other format Puts you in a mode where Tab and Enter function as in normal word processing programs Effectively switches off Screenwriter s script formatting features though you can still insert
268. oupings of Interior VS Exterior Location Time of Day or Characters For example Interior VS Exterior as the Primary sort and Script Order as a Secondary sort would give this kind of breakdown EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 1 2 1 1 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 2 1 8 INTERIOR 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 2 3 8 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY LEO 5 8 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 09 2 8 1 2 8 With Location as the Secondary sort the same script would breakdown with the locations grouped together alphabetically EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 1 2 1 1 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 2 1 8 181 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC 182 INTERIOR 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 2 3 5 8 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING SSS 2 8 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 2 3 8 1 2 8 Script Order First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Exterior scenes before Interiors within each group Location First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Locations alphabetically within each group Time of Day First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts alphabetically by Time of Day within each group Calculate Eighths by
269. oxes printed for timing notes etc Boxes expand if more space than this value allows is needed Accepts a value between 0 5 and 2 inches in 1 10 inch increments Print Separate Act Scene Column lIf checked prints a separate far left column for Act Scene Information Unchecked that information prints as the first line of each box Print Separate Day Night Count Column If checked prints a separate right hand column for Day 1 type information at the end of each Scene Heading Prints D or N followed by the number Print Separate Page Number Column If checked Page Numbers print in a separate column Unchecked they print in the upper right corner of the main box Underlining and Boldfacing of Act Scene Info Scene Headings SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Print total boxes at end of pg lIf checked prints 3 Totals boxes at the foot of each page Print Set List If checked prints a list of Sets after printing the Rundown Sheets Include Pg s in Set List If checked prints the Page Numbers that each Set is used on Generate Set List Prints the Set List on its own without the need to also print Rundown Sheets Scene Character Lists Selecting this option will generate lists of all the characters in each scene and puts that list immediately under each scene heading a format used frequently in sitcom production There are two sub options under the Scene Character Lists menu item e Generate Displays the S
270. pages are added as A Pages Deleted pages become Omitted pages Similarly Scene Headings and numbers can be locked so that everyone s referring to the same scene New scenes become A Scenes Deleted scenes become Omitted scenes NOTE If you place the mouse on Page Panel in a locked script it displays a pop up window with the total number of page how many pages were revised and the applicable percentage The Production Cycle The Production Cycle involves the following steps e Issue the Shooting Script then 165 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC e Lock the Script e Perform Revisions e Issue Revised Pages e Start Next Revision Lock the script again e Perform Next Revisions e Issue Next Revised Pages and so on Here s how Shooting Script Before issuing the shooting script for the first time turn on and or customize all the Production Features you d like to use Each of these options is described in detail elsewhere in this manual and in the Online Help 1 Save the screenwriter s final draft using the Save As command Under the File Menu select Save As Give it a different name to reflect the date and its status as the White shooting draft you re about to create e g NameWHIT Now you can save your work at regular intervals using the Save command NOTE To customize the Production Features for the way you or your production company work continue with Steps 2 and 3 To accept Screenw
271. partyof5 scw 245 password 106 147 Password Protect Scripts 139 Password Protection 139 Paste 210 Paste from File 210 Paste from 210 Paste into Current Element 210 Paste Special 210 Pause Autocorrection 91 142 194 217 Perform Revisions 168 Pg Play Multimedia Script 75 Play Sample 125 226 Play ini 242 pop up lists 134 Pop Up Menu 79 INDEX Position 16 PowerPanel 79 Preparing a Script for Importing 197 Pressing the ENTER key in Action takes you to Character Name 132 Pressing the ENTER Key in Transition takes you to Action 132 Prev Saved Script 18 Preview 99 104 Print 208 249 Print 235 Print MORE at page end when dialogue isn t broken but character is first to talk on next page 105 146 Print lt gt around Numbering 109 191 Print a Script Note 48 Print All Cards 33 Print Bottom Continued at Fixed Line 105 146 Print Breakdown Sheets 222 Print Color Text Highlight 105 147 Print Gray as Color 107 Print Gray Sample 107 Print Headers On 99 Print Just the Serial Number without Names 107 Print Menu 105 Print Name in Lower Right Hand Corner instead of Grayed Centered 107 Print Notes 127 230 Print Notes in Script 49 161 Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed script AS 102 127 Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers 48 102 127 Print Numbering in Script 191 223 Print Preview 99 104 208
272. pelling Click the Replace button to replace it in your script also Auto Correct Adds the unknown word and its correct spelling to the User Dictionary as a Typo which should be Auto Corrected as you type Auto Correct must be turned on to enable Typo correction Learn Remember this spelling for future use by adding the word to the current User Dictionary USER_US LXA unless you specify otherwise All scripts that use that User Dictionary will recognize the word Skip Once Skip over this appearance of the word but stop at the next one Ignore Skip over this word and all future occurrences Ignores the word in all scripts you check until you Exit Screenwriter or Clear the Ignore List Suggest lIf none of the suggested spellings for your unknown word are correct type a different spelling in the Word box and Click the Suggest button to have it checked Auto Correct Typos As you re writing SpellCheck can correct the most commonly Wt made typos for you For example teh is corrected to the wnat becomes want etc This saves you the time of going back and manually correcting typos and makes any SpellCheck you run go faster To turn Auto Correct on 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 At the Program Options screen select the Spelling button 90 SCREENWRITER 6 TEXT EDITING Check the SpellCheck as you Type amp Edit box this must be checked for Auto Correct to wo
273. possible permutations NOTE Although the Import function is highly accurate we recommend you check all imported scripts for errors before printing multiple copies Running SmartCheck helps though even it can t catch all errors 203 EXPORTING SCRIPTS 204 MOVIE MAGIC Appendix C Exporting Scripts Exporting to other scriptwriting or word processing programs is a matter of saving a script in a different format A script exported from Screenwriter is designed to be an editable copy not an exact duplicate It will not have exactly the same margins page breaks or even number of pages as it does in Screenwriter Neither will it have MOREs or CONTINUEDs However it will retain all of the text in your script and will be in general script format Export To export open Screenwriter and open the script you want to export 1 Under the File Menu select Save As 2 At the Save File Menu select Save as type to choose an Export Format File Type Save As eix Save in E Scripts y E ex E EE TW Templates la Screen WP File name Screen Save as type IW EA het Dd Cancel I Open as read only There are the export file types formats currently available Screenwriter Normally used for saving Screenwriter scripts ScriptThing DOS Used for compatibility with ScriptThing for DOS versions 2 10 and later Maintains margins and formatting but not font SCREENWRITER EXPORTING SCRI
274. ptions iit aa A AAA A A LEA bus 154 Character NablesS c ovuiicinesinzencoinin rios dost ater ntteasdusgateetagett basico cido pin lato idas dash 156 Dial UE AES A E AEE 157 Parentheticals traits A A tia ee Sheed ee tela ct len he ta ae hte eye ee 158 Scene Headings meore ea a an Ea E ETEEN RE sett ede 158 O ON 159 aaa a a cer sdtasa cede 159 TLADSTONS AA A E ii AAA EE 159 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS MOVIE MAGIC Act Informa siii tenes ee A a eins 159 Scene formatih eiee ien eea ea ace dene caaekeda dna chace aas E hA EE e ER K A e 160 SEPE NOLES aeea E acs E E E A ah tbat tad 161 Centered Tilers ni A AA AAA AAA EEE 161 Page Break Options arisa o vanes eadedusgaadhahay cito O E E A EE hide tostados 161 Break Aci ai il ia di 162 Break Dialogue a es td tata rides tia 162 Locked Scripts OPliOOS 33 ss hes ovate eee a daa Heh oven decent icon citas 163 PRODUCTION FEATURES ocna niiina iiv kan ari pe re AE E Eat 164 Production Rewiites s sers e eoero a OAE loves deea a AREE Acree tus cae a EREE aes 164 The Production Cycle iia rocas 164 Shooting PE A A AAA AAA A e 166 Perform RevisioDSu evsoconeiontedionio de dyed ea E EE E n ei Eo Sa an aa ariei 168 Issue Revised Pag s riteit sedeada O 168 Start Next Revisioni terer ae r a Era e E ad 169 Revision Marks vecinita attain eE A E E EREE NEEE EES N EEA eel des 170 Manual Revision Markson ron grennra aeaa E a Sa EA T EE a aa Ea e Ened 170 Auto Revisi n Marks aiii EAE E AE eae caia 170 Locked Seripts
275. ptware 197 Scriptware Tagged 197 Scrnplay ini 242 Scroll by Row 28 SCWPRINT 248 Scwprint exe 242 248 Scwriter gid 242 Scwriter hlp 242 Scwriter ini 242 Scwriter sys 242 ScWriter32 exe 242 sdnlysus scw 245 Search 213 Search 236 Search amp Replace 213 Search amp Replace Again 213 Search Again 213 Search for Help On 231 Search for Text 236 Search Menu 213 Search Replace 236 Search Replace Text 236 Second Character Name when he she speaks twice in a row with nothing between the two speeches 140 Second Dialogue Paragraph 45 secondary Sluglines 91 142 Secondary Sort by 112 181 Select All 80 102 199 211 Select Display Font 76 Select Font for Watermark Text 107 Select Language 89 217 Select Names 102 225 Select Range of Cards to Print 33 Select Special 80 211 Select Voice 125 226 Select Which Color Notes to Print 48 102 Select Which Color Notes to View 230 Selected Pages 100 Selected Scenes 101 Selected Scenes Only 187 MOVIE MAGIC Selecting Bold Italics or Underline turns off Block 87 Selecting Screenwriter Commands 11 Selecting Text 80 Selection by Element 80 Selection by Group 80 Selection by Page 80 Selection by Scene 80 Selection by Scene Range 80 Selection by Sentence 80 Selection by Word 80 Send Script 117 229 Sentence Ends Only 162 Sentence Ends Preferred 162 Serial Serialization Numbering 107 Set any Variable 7
276. r are automatically fixed by SmartCheck Automatically Run SmartCheck Before Printing If checked Screenwriter checks your script for errors each time you print On the Print Menu the Run SmartCheck before this Print Job box is also checked you can print without running SmartCheck by unchecking the box turning it off temporarily Unchecked no script checking is performed unless you manually run SmartCheck Beep on Found Formatting Error If checked SmartCheck beeps each time it finds an error Delete WITHOUT prompting These four options specify which formatting errors SmartCheck should fix without prompting for your decision This applies whether SmartCheck is running in manual or automatic mode Single Starting Blank Space lIf checked deletes a single space at the beginning of a line Unchecked this error displays a prompt Completely Blank Elements If checked deletes a line with no text Unchecked this error displays a prompt Character Names without Dialogue lIf checked deletes orphaned Character Names Unchecked this error displays a prompt Second Character Name when he she speaks twice in a row with nothing between the two speeches If checked deletes the second Character Name element and joins the two Dialogue elements when it finds two speeches in a row by the same character without an intervening Action or other Element Unchecked this error displays a prompt SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER
277. r over the icon without clicking on it A box of explanatory Hint text displays directly beneath the icon and any Quick Key shortcut displays on the left of the Bottom Status Bar For a list of Main Menu Bar commands see the Appendix chapter entitled Main Menu Bar The on line Appendix is found in the Help menu by clicking Contents Appendix is at the bottom For a list of Keyboard Shortcuts see the Appendix chapter entitled Command Keys Online Help When writing your script help with Screenwriter is always available online under the Help Menu Contents Opens the Table of Contents for the help file Search for Help on Opens the help file s searchable Index 11 BASIC INFORMATION MOVIE MAGIC Quick Help Displays a sample script page Get help information about any Element or item by clicking on it r Forwards FRAME Page If you make a selection under the Main Menu Bar context sensitive help is available When the menu screen displays click on the Help button It displays helpful information explaining what each selection on that menu does Menus Main Menu Bar Screenwriter s Pull Down menus are accessed from the Main Menu Bar at the top of the screen Individual Menus may be selected with the mouse or by pressing 21 plus the underlined letter of the Menu such as z J EJ for File There are three types of menus PULL DOWN MENU amp Movie Magic Screenwriter C Movie Magic Screenwrit
278. r Extensi n iinei hre a aa ia 43 BITOKO ULC sets ANT 44 SCREENWRITER TABLE OF CONTENTS Paretitheticalii a scsiininwi habia hin hanna Lani 45 Transition sro dinee ne ea Sen ceccens Oca desk ceces bubwin Sie sencenpbi a ear 45 Shote kernens a E E R E E brates sees eta 45 Centered Vila A Be E E DA L E Teds oe 46 Act Information TV and Stage Play Format rere er eres 46 Scene Information TV and Stage Play Format eres 47 Senpte NOLES aid ee erate dotar eed yates leat ada Ea dale aa aa a teeta 47 Switch Elements id cs ovis E A A a 49 Moving between Element ien iess a ni na ei er raea a e SEEE ET aeia E geia 49 Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue renee 52 CAEL Soca ute Sane d eet edad dts OPE Sear EADS S EE id Peas de TENS RS eerie ive oad Sane 54 Cheat an Eleme tisside snnt AE e ae od cay 54 Cheat Right Margins s saoirse einai si eiia a Ea Raana Re iaaa ai e ETERO TETS Ae 55 Cheat Page AAA karoti eas den bead SAGES babe baat Ee ra Rol bated eD ENa sel 55 Cheata Page scsi s tei dee ao ace MAG Me eee 55 Cheat the Whole Script dintran e nnie eaa aana aas T aA EA EEEa EE Lik 56 Cheat Me Pag s Header ini rai a ata aa ici 56 US CASES 1 A A AAA AS AAA DEAR E E 56 Editing User A NO 59 Loading US A LS i Ged 60 Default User Lists ita hss ata UE E EE e a le bolus Des debe 61 Alias Tea AA A AA AA 63 Creating Alias Text eines iehi antonia arrested aan nan AE a E a theta terca ida 63 Multimedia TOTAL aa 65 Branch TASA AAA AA
279. r Jack The first existing Character Name starting with that letter is entered in a Character Name element and a Dialogue element is created If the Character Name entered is not the one you want press while in the Dialogue element before typing any dialogue 1 A Pop Up List of Character Names with that Initial letter displays 2 Select the name you want 3 The Character Name changes to your new choice That Character Name is now assigned to the Alt Key combination using that letter NOTE To use the Alt Key method of entering Character Names you must first enable Alt Keys for Character Name entry Under the File Menu select Program Options click on the Text Entry Editing button then check the Enable Alt Keys for Character Name Entry box A drawback to using this method is that you will no longer be able to select Main Menu Bar items using the default Windows Alt Keys You must use the mouse to select these items instead Character Extension An Extension is a modification to the Character Name appearing directly after it in parentheses or on the next line if you prefer It is commonly used to indicate that the Character speaking cannot be seen speaking onscreen The two most common Extensions are e V O Stands for Voice Over which tells the reader that the character is commenting on the onscreen action but is not part of it or is narrating over the scene 43 MOVIE MAGIC e O S Stands for Off Screen
280. r after the colon The User Dictionary Editor does not distinguish between UPPERCASE and lowercase adding all words as lowercase Delete Word In the Dictionary window on the left highlight the word you want to Delete Click on the Delete Word button You are prompted to confirm the deletion Click on Yes to delete No to keep the word in the User Dictionary Edit Word In the Dictionary window on the left highlight the word you want to Edit Click on the Edit Word button Your word is moved from the Dictionary window to the Word Editing window Make the desired changes then click on either the Edit Word or Add Word button to save them back to the Dictionary window SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Exit Quits and saves the changes you made to the User Dictionaries Returns you to either Screenwriter or the Movie Magic Screenwriter program window depending where you launched it from Thesaurus Screenwriter s Thesaurus finds synonyms and related words for any word you select 1 Select a word 2 Under the Spell Menu select Thesaurus 3 The Get Synonyms window opens with the selected word in the Head Word window In the Synonyms window below is a scrollable list of like words 4 Click on the word you prefer and it appears in the Head Word window along with its alternative words Click on Replace to put the word in the Head Word window in your script in place of your original word 93 TEXT EDITING MOVIE MAGIC Pri
281. r in the element you want a script note to follow Press eE Or click on the Right SpeedBar button with a musical Note icon A Script Note is added directly following the element Type a Script Note Type and format text in a Script Note as you would in any other element To force a new line or put in a blank line press E 47 48 MOVIE MAGIC Hide Show a Script Note Script Notes can be individually displayed onscreen or hidden In the left margin next to the Script Note is a square colored box When a Script Note displays the box shows the letter H When a Script Note is hidden the box shows the letter S Double click on the colored box to change the Script Note s display status Double clicking on H Hides the note Double clicking on S Shows the note Print a Script Note You can print Script Notes as a sequential report or on the reverse sides of the script pages they re facing on a script already printed so the notes are opposite the pages they refer to To print Script Notes 1 Under the File Menu select Print 2 A Print menu displays Check the Script Notes radio button 3 Click OK A Script Notes Print menu displays Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Prints a separate Script Notes report of all notes listed in sequence with the page numbers they refer to Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed script Prints each Script Note opposite th
282. r lie where they fell from rusty manacles on the wall There is nothing else in the cell Eal OTHERWISI You walk by the first cell without glancing in lt ENDIF gt IF YOU LOOK IN SECOND CELL THEN YOU ARE lt LOOKING IN SECOND CELL gt AND Straw is strewn on the floor Nothing else is visible lt ENDIF gt IF YOU lt LOOKED IN FIRST CELL gt AND YOU RE lt LOOKING IN SECOND CELL gt THEN YOU lt NOTICE TRAP gt AND You notice that the door seems to be rigged to spring shut if anyone enters lt ENDIF SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS gt IF YOU ARE lt LOOKING IN SECOND CELL gt AND YOU ENTER SECOND CELL HEN lt YOU RE TRAPPED gt AND The door slams behind you and locks A lunatic s LAUGHTER surrounds you OTHERWISE You re smarter than you look GOTO HALLWAY 2 lt ENDIF gt IF YOU lt NOTICE TRAP gt AND lt YOU RE TRAPPED gt THEN DISEMBODIED VOICE You aren t terribly bright are you OTHERWISE DISEMBODIED VOICE I ve got you now infidel Ha ha ha lt ENDIF And you re trapped forever dying a slow and painful death by starvation GOTO DEAD 20 Note that the text following the OTHERWISE or ELSE statement is considered part of that OTHERWISE statement until the next User Activity line containing the word ENDIF
283. reenwriter to ignore Capitalization when identifying Elements Ignore Margins for Element identification Some script files have their script elements defined by their margins others by codes or Hard Returns If a script file is being imported incorrectly due to its margins not being what Screenwriter expects checking this feature may allow a more accurate import Action is in Parentheticals Check this if your import file has the Action Element in parentheses such as certain TV or Stage Play scripts Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Check this if the import file has Page Breaks and you want to keep them exactly the same in the resulting Screenwriter script 6 Click on OK to paste the imported text 7 Under Screenwriter s File Menu Save your imported file under a new name If your script doesn t import successfully try again with different options checked You may have to experiment with these options to get the best results 200 SCREENWRITER IMPORTING SCRIPTS Importing a WordPerfect 5 0 for DOS or earlier script To import a script written in WordPerfect 5 0 or earlier for DOS 1 Open WordPerfect and open the script you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Save the file in Generic format Press cmi and choose Save As then Generic Type in a path and file name C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts lt SCRIPT NAME gt DOS and press 3 When the file is saved press e Press N when it
284. reenwriter to work the way you work Character Set Allows you to select characters from the extended Windows Character set for the current font runs CHARMAP EXE if installed Window Menu Cascade Tile Arrange Icons Minimize All Maximize Window View As Index Cards Ctrl Redraw Screen 1 HamletTheNovel SCW Cascade Cascades shrinks and overlays at an offset all open script windows Tile Tiles shrinks and stacks horizontally all open script windows Arrange Icons Neatly arranges the icons of any minimized script windows Minimize All Minimizes shrinks to icons at the bottom of the window all open script windows 230 SCREENWRITER MAIN MENU BAR Maximize Window Maximizes the currently selected script window Click on a script icon to select it View as Index Cards Switches to View as Index Card Mode Redraw Screen Forces the screen to be redrawn 1 9 lt FileName gt Lists the Names of all open script windows with a checkmark by the currently displayed script Select one to make it the active open window Help Menu Contents F1 Search for Help on Quick Help Alt F1 What s This Shift F1 Memory Available About Web Resources Contents Displays the main contents window of the Online Help Search for Help On Displays the searchable Index of the Online Help Quick Help Displays a Sample Script Page Move the cursor over an item to get a Hint and cli
285. reviously Saved Versi0OM ooooooncccccnononononononnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnonnonanonnnnnnnnnncnns 17 Opening a Script automatically at Startup occcoooooooconcncnnnncononannnnnnnnnnonnonanononnnnnnananns 18 Opening a Timed BackUP oooooocccccnccononocnnonnnncnonnonononnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnananns 18 DAVIN a SCP tiere aE ee aiodarasseenatiatease Gadhia tic a a 19 Saving Portions of Script rireoiir A AAA A da TE E ok 19 Mergine STiptS aeir reae O EAE AE AEE E AaS EE EAEN a 20 TITLE PAGE 00d AA A ARA A AAA AAA 23 Opening a Tithe Page sswzssebsdicassyssaxesahasradenusds zeeshadedtadntdiaeshssredeiast EAE as 23 Creating Text AAA cota ganh cottuedcedabinhedactecdscdonaataadens 24 Moving a Text Element Aeee a oea ite aes ean heb EEN cleus A tena dae 24 Loading a Tithe Page cs rorta tes oUt ee eee NG ST eee ee ee 26 Printing a Title Paget eae Lets hebdcseendy a a e o aa R T eaa e E sede htehdecteadeiensts 26 INDEX CARDS ronie E ci a a e a a T eai E AET 27 Outlining with Index Cards eee eee eee eee EE EEE Saee AE 27 Index Cardo Vie Wisin lod 28 Resizeithe Index Card Sii ATA EA LAS Nias At Mees 28 Scrollby Ro Weiss tradi laredo dabeseadspsedagesbebedeadusacat E T OE bed cinema 28 Horizontal Index Cards ea egi Arotik area aater einar Kirie NESSE RAT EEOAE SEARE RA 29 Vertical Index Cards S E AS E E 29 Addar Index Cad A IA 29 TABLE OF CONTENTS MOVIE MAGIC Writ an Index Cards senne einir raea enan E AeA EEEE di 29 Ed
286. ring from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 Always put Right Number on Line 1 If checked always puts the right Scene Number on the first line of Scene Heading even when the Scene Heading text wraps to a second line Unchecked the right Scene Number may appear on the second wrapped line Scene Continued Text Allows you to choose whether Scene Continued text is displayed and what text to use SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Top of Pg If checked puts the default text CONTINUED above a Scene that s continued from the previous page Enter your preferred text including any parentheses to replace the default text with Btm of Pg If checked puts the default text CONTINUED below a Scene that continues to another page Enter your preferred text including any parentheses to replace the default text with Left Margin of Bottom Cont d Lets you choose how far in 1 10 of an inch increments to indent the Bottom Continued from the left edge of the page Shots Shots has no element specific options Action Put Action in Parentheses If checked puts Parentheses around the Action text as is required in some Stage Play and TV Sitcom formats Action Indentation This option allows you to change the starting indent of Action The setting of 1 is only available when you have the option Put Action in Parenthesis selected and setting it to 1 will automatically select that option for you if it is not already
287. riter s default settings skip directly to Step 4 2 Under the Format Menu select Edit Script Formats a Click on the Scene Headings button and set the Scene Numbers and Scene Continued Text to your preference b Click on the Locked Scripts button and set the Scene Omitted Text A Scene Numbering Scheme Revision Mark Text and Locked Letter Skip List to your preferences Do not Lock Scene Headings and Page Breaks here You ll do all Locking from the Production Menu c Once you have the settings customized to the way your production company works click on Save as Defaults for all New Scripts d Click on the OK button to accept your changes 3 Under the File Menu select Program Options a Click on the Revisions page and set the Revision Marks options to your preference b Click on the Printer page and set the Print Bottom Continueds and Print MORE options to your preference Click on the OK button to accept your changes 166 SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES 4 Under the Production Menu select Lock the Script Type YES to confirm your decision A Lock the Script screen displays Lock The Script V dl Revision 9 ESE Screenwriter s defaults for Locked Scripts are already selected for you Generally you will want to accept these settings unless your Production Company dictates otherwise If desired you can TURN ON or off the options you prefer by clicking on their checkboxes Gray
288. rive screen allowing you to specify the Drive that Screenwriter uses as the default for automatically backing up your scripts Select a drive from the pull down list If it s a floppy drive don t forget to put a floppy disk in it Don t Prompt for Automatic Backups lIf checked Screenwriter will not automatically prompt you to backup your script at regular intervals Unchecked it will prompt you to backup your script files Timed Backup Frequency Screenwriter has a data security function that makes a temporary Timed Backup of your script at regular intervals In an emergency situation such as a power outage you can retrieve the timed backup and use the data The timed backup is a separate process from regular file saving It automatically backs up the file you re working on when its timer activates Always save your scripts separately before you exit Screenwriter Make Backups of your scripts to another drive or medium such as a floppy disk tape drive network server etc Timed Backup Frequency Set this to between 1 and 60 minutes 15 is the default If you try to set it to 0 or greater than 60 minutes it changes to 60 minutes when you exit the menu SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Password Protect Scripts Password Protection keeps unauthorized people from reading your scripts When saving a script you ll be asked to enter a password twice for confirmation To open the script you ll have to enter the
289. rk Check the Auto Correct Typos box Change these other Auto Correct settings if desired Max Length Sets the maximum word length of typos to auto correct If on a slower computer set this to a lower number Screenwriter uses a default word length of 25 letters Beep on Unknown Words Alerts you to any suspected typos that Auto Correct is unable to correct for you Prompt on Multiple Words Gives you a choice of words when the typo could have two or more correct spellings If unchecked Auto Correct makes the decision for you AutoCapitalize Character Names Capitalizes the first letter of all Character Names in Dialogue Action and Script Notes To be capitalized by Auto Correct a character name must either have been used previously in the script or exist in the Character Name User List When using names such as Mark or Art in your script Auto Correct also capitalizes the words mark and art To avoid this Pause Autocorrection under the Spell Menu Type the word with your desired capitalization move past the word then resume Auto Correct by clicking on Pause Autocorrection again All Caps Makes Character Names ALL CAPS wherever they appear Click on OK to return to your script The following options work both during Auto Correct and when you run a manual SpellCheck Correct Double Capitals Corrects words that start with two capital letters instead of one such as SCheduling
290. rmat This method will not correctly restore the format if you have modified the settings and format of play scw In that case use the re install method above 38 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Writing the Script Elements Each part of a script is formatted uniquely with different margins capitalization and spacing Screenwriter uses these elements Act Information Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Information Script Note Shot Title Centered Transition Creating Elements You can create Elements in a number of ways 1 Scripts PLAY _SCW sols Window Help 0 Act Information ction Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Information Script Note Shot Title Centered Transition 39 MOVIE MAGIC e Click on an element in the pull down Current Element window e Click on the element s icon on the Right SpeedBar if displayed e Press a Control key shortcut for that element See the Appendix chapter entitled Command Keys for details e Type an element s text and it is automatically formatted in certain elements Type int or ext in a new Scene Heading or blank Action element Type fade in or press at the start of a new script Type in Transition text ending it with to Tab amp Enter You can easily go from element to element in Screenwriter by pressing just two keys 1b and Enter Your
291. roduction Menu select Animation Locking then Lock Dialogue Numbering This causes a number for each speech to be displayed onscreen to the right of the Character Name in angle brackets e g lt 6 gt This number will not print unless you select Dialogue on the Print Menu and check Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts above It is displayed for reference to show what s going to print in case you want to override a Dialogue Number Multi Locking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be Multi Locked numbering new speeches as AA Numbers e g lt 6AA gt To Multi Lock Dialogue Numbering repeat the method above for Locking the Numbering Unlocking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be Unlocked at any point going from AA Numbering to A Numbering or from A Numbering to non locked numbering 191 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC Under the Production Menu select Animation Locking then Unlock Dialogue Numbering Overriding Dialogue Numbering Once Dialogue Numbering has been Locked or Multi Locked a single speech s numbering can be manually overridden Put the cursor anywhere in the Dialogue speech whose numbering you want to adjust Under the Production Menu select Animation Locking then Adjust Dialogue Numbering Or press cm r3 The Locked Dialogue Numbering screen displays Choose an option Set this Dialogue s numbering to Normal Changes the current A or A
292. rogram Options under the File Menu and set Undo Levels to a value greater than 0 Cut Removes selected text from the script placing it on the clipboard Copy Copies selected text leaving it in the script but also placing it on the clipboard 209 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC Delete Deletes selected text removing it from the script but not putting it into the clipboard Paste Places the contents of the clipboard into the script at the cursor position Paste from Displays a Menu allowing you to select an existing file Its contents are placed into the currently displayed script at the cursor position Paste Special Displays a Menu allowing you to do special types of pasting Its contents are placed into the currently displayed script at the cursor position e Paste from File This menu item allows you to paste or merge another script into the current script at the current cursor position Selecting it will display an Open Menu where you can choose which file you wish to paste NOTE If you only want to paste a portion of a file you should open the second file in another window and cut and paste normally e Paste into Current Element This menu item is ONLY available if you already have Cut or Copied text from a single Movie Magic Screenwriter element It allows you to paste that text into a different element type and have it become part of that element You might use this for example if you wrote a
293. rsion I except Action is in parenthesis Parentheticals are capitalized and outdented to the same left margin as Action 35 SCRIPT FORMATS MOVIE MAGIC NOTE There is no one standard format for Television shows It s recommended that you get at least two scripts from the show you re writing for and match the format before submitting your spec Reading a show s scripts also gives you a better feel for the characters and the kinds of stories that get made Try to get scripts from the current season Templates for certain TV shows are supplied with Screenwriter See Television Templates below TV Template Movie Magic Screenwriter includes more than 50 preset formats for most of the major TV shows If you are writing spec TV scripts you can pre load the format of the show you are writing for and have access to all of its settings including major characters and sets You access these TV templates by going to the Format Menu choosing Load Script Format then TV Template Stage Play A format based on the professional published formats used by Samuel French Narrow Action margins with Parenthesis wide Dialogue margins and Act amp Scene Information Radio Play A script in Radio Play format has Character Names to the left of dialogue This format is often seen as the published format for plays but is NOT used as the play format within the professional play writing world Novel A format designed for writing novels Though m
294. s 208 Save Script Format 37 38 Save Script Formats 212 Save Voice Association File 124 226 Saving a Script 19 Saving a Title Page 25 Saving Lists as the Default Lists for all New Scripts 61 Saving Portions of a Script 19 SCENE 62 SCENE 1 161 SCENE A 161 Scene Body Text 60 Scene Body Text Locations 58 62 Scene Break 214 Scene Character Lists 213 Scene Continued Text 158 Scene Count 150 Scene Heading 16 28 29 33 40 49 80 134 213 214 234 235 Scene Heading 177 214 Scene Heading Initial Text 136 235 Scene Heading or blank Action element 40 Scene Heading Text 61 Scene Headings 158 187 195 224 SCENE I ROMAN 161 Scene Info 49 97 134 177 Scene Information 98 160 ee Peon TV and Stage Play Format Scene Number 28 214 Scene Numbering 178 Scene Numbers 158 Scene Omitted Text 174 SCENE ONE 161 Scenes 101 Scrap File 19 20 screen redraw 212 Screenplay 35 Screenplay format 35 Screenplay Systems Incorporated ii Screenwriter 204 Screenwriter Export file 187 Script Analysis 224 Script Breakdown Sheets 111 181 Script Font Size 96 Script Format 35 Script Format Options 154 INDEX Script Formats 35 154 Script Note 30 214 Script Note Commander 114 Script Notes 47 48 49 102 109 161 190 191 195 209 Script Notes 48 161 Script Notes Options 48 Script Order 110 111 112 113 180 181 182 183 Scri
295. s on the keyboard 2 On the Cheat Element Menu Check the Underline CheckBox 3 Select OK and the entire Element is Underlined Italicizing Text To format existing text as Italic Select the text Then e Click on the Italics Button labeled with an I on the Top SpeedBar e Or press cw or k on the keyboard To format an entire Element as Italic place the cursor in the Element Then 1 Click on the Cheat Element Button on the Top SpeedBar the button with a hand holding a card up a sleeve Or press e on the keyboard 2 On the Cheat Element Menu Check the Italics CheckBox 3 Select OK and the entire Element is Italicized Striking Out Text To format existing text as Strikeout Select the text Then Press J on the keyboard To format an entire Element as Strikeout 1 Place the cursor in the Element Then 2 Click on the Cheat Element Button on the Top SpeedBar the button with a hand holding a card up a sleeve Or press 3 on the keyboard 3 On the Cheat Element Menu Check the StrikeOut CheckBox 86 SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING 4 Select OK and the entire Element is StrikedOut Removing Text Formatting Select the text to remove formatting from Click on the Normal Button label with an N on the Top SpeedBar Or press cw N on the keyboard Applying Multiple Text Formats You can apply multiple formats to existing text e g make text both Bold and Italicized without re sel
296. s how do we merge it back together without creating unnecessary A scenes and A pages A Open the first part of your script place your cursor at the place where you want to add the second part select Paste From under Edit menu and the file that contains the second part of your script SCREENWRITER TROUBLESHOOTING Q I have made some changes in the Top SpeedBar Editor and than restored my Screenwriter for Windows from the Windows 95 Taskbar but the changes were not there what did I do wrong A You have to close and restart your Screenwriter for Windows for the changes to take effect Q I have cut some of my text and than continued working on something else when I wanted to check that cut text in my Clipboard Viewer and got the message lt Cannot display Data in clipboard in an unknown format gt why A You have to check Share Clipboard with Other Windows programs under Misc In Program Options menu Q Yellow background in my script notes makes the text in them hard to read can I change the background color A Go to Format menu select Edit Script Formats and than Script Notes change color as desired Q I was trying to put some text in my dialogue in parentheses but as soon as I typed the left parenthesis I was in Parenthetical element is there a way around that A Instead of pressing just the left parenthesis type Ctrl Shift Q Is there an easy way to move an element down the blank page A Press F3 and specify th
297. s which rounded upwards becomes 7 8ths Scene 7 is calculated as 50 divided by 6 8 33 8ths or 1 and 0 33 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 1 1 8ths The total of Scenes 5 amp 7 calculates as 7 8ths 1 1 8ths 2 0 8ths SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING True Total of All Lines If checked the actual numbers of lines in each scene are added then rounded into eighths to give a more accurate total In our previous example the total of the lines from Scenes 5 amp 7 is 89 And 89 divided by 6 is 14 83 8ths or 1 6 83 8ths which rounded upwards comes out to 1 7 8ths Miscellaneous Options List Characters in Each Scene If checked lists all the characters whether they have dialogue or not directly underneath each Scene Heading in the breakdown Listing options are Sorted Alphabetically If checked lists characters in each scene alphabetically Script Order If checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they appear Speaking Characters First If checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they speak in that scene followed by character with no dialogue User List Order If checked lists characters in each scene with those from User Lists first then all others alphabetically List Non Speaking Characters If checked lists characters who are mentioned in Action or Dialogue but who have no dialogue of their own Unchecked only characters with dialogue are listed Each Group o
298. s it at the end of an automatically generated Scrap File which has the same name as your script but which ends with Scrap This file is a great place to put text and scenes you want to remove from your script but might want to go back to later Select All Selects the entire contents of the currently displayed script Select Special Shows options for selecting by word sentence element group page scene Turn Off Block Un selects the currently selected text Add Forced Page Break Starts a new page at the current cursor position Remove Forced Page Removes a Forced Page Break immediately before or after the cursor position Add Hard Return Goes to a new line but stays in the same element Add Dialogue Paragraph If in the Dialogue element starts a new paragraph of dialogue Otherwise does nothing Convert Case Shows options for changing the case of selected text If no text is selected the entire element except when in Scene Heading Character Name or Transition that the cursor is in is changed Change Text Color Shows options for changing the color of selected text If no text is selected the text from the cursor position to the end of the element is changed Normal WP Mode Toggles between the script format you re using and Word Processing mode where Tab and Enter function as in other Windows word processing programs Edit Scene Description Selecting this menu item will add edit a hidden Script No
299. s you Type and Edit has already been enabled With this option NOT enabled when the real time spell checking routines find a word that it cannot correct and does not recognize it will NOT give you a visual alert Prompt on Multiple Words If checked gives you a choice of words when the typo could have two or more correct spellings If unchecked Auto Correct makes the decision for you The SpellCheck as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work Query when you fix Auto Corrected Words With this option enabled if the real time spell check erroneously fixes a word by inverting two of its letters changing the capitalization or spacing and then you immediately go back and change it back to what it was before the program fixed it will prompt you with a message asking you if it should learn this word as you have restored it or whether it should simply ignore this one instance This option will only be available if the option Spell Check as you Type and Edit has already been enabled With this option NOT enabled assuming you have Auto Correct Typos enabled in the case where you restore a fix that the program has just made it will simply ignore this one case without prompting you AutoCapitalize Sentences If checked capitalizes the first letter in all Sentences in Dialogue Action and Script Notes Except immediately Following Shots Shots also known as secondary Sluglines can be used
300. s you to do so SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Any new scene added between existing A Scenes will have a number added after it For example a scene added between scenes 13A and 13B would be numbered 13A1 the next one 13A2 etc If you add a new scene between an existing A Scene and a Normal Scene it is entered as a normal A Scene For example a scene added between 25B and 26 would become 25C If a new scene is added between a Normal Scene and an A Scene it is entered using the Multi Lock Character For example a scene added between scenes 103 and 103A would become A103 using the default Multi Lock Character Also see A Scene Numbering Scheme below NOTE An individual Locked Scene Heading can be moved in the script without changing the numbering by Dragging and Dropping it Be careful to drag and drop only the Scene Heading The text of the scene associated with the moved Scene Heading does not move with it Locked Page Breaks To use Page Break Locking you need to click on its tab Unlocked Normal Adding or deleting enough text to create a new Page Break causes pages to renumber automatically Locked Adding or deleting enough text to create a new Page Break makes the existing page numbers stay the same and generates a new short A Page If you add text to page 38 for example the text flows over to a new page This new short page becomes 38A If the page 38 text flows over to two new pages the second be
301. script Elements To switch to WP mode 36 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Under the Edit Menu select Normal WP mode Allow Normal Word Processor Mode must be checked on the Misc page of Program Options under the File Menu before you can use WP mode A checkmark appears next to it and the left of the Bottom Panel displays a message in Red to remind you that you re in WP mode To exit WP mode repeat this command sequence or press kentrol w Television Templates These templates have the pre set formats for certain Sitcoms and Episodic Dramas Loading a Television Template is as easy as opening one of your script files 1 3 Under the File Menu select Open You ll be in the default subdirectory which is C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts unless you changed it Open the Template folder it should be in C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts if you installed it as recommended If you didn t install the templates uninstall Screenwriter and re install it Answer Yes when asked if you want to install the TV Templates See the Installation chapter for more information Select a Template file Click on OK to open it For a list of Television Templates and the shows they correspond to see the Appendix chapter entitled Files Installed Creating a User Defined Format Formats are saved as part of the script file itself and don t need to be saved separately However you can re define one of the
302. sed Press t2 on the keyboard Quick Bold and Uppercase of Previous Word Position the cursor immediately following the word to be formatted Press c fF on the keyboard Quick Lowercase of Previous Word Position the cursor immediately following the word to be lowercased Press shit J rey on the keyboard Typing Foreign Characters Screenwriter uses the Character set selected in Windows and can correctly deal with auto capitalization for the most common accented characters To enter Accented Characters 1 Press the accent or closest keyboard equivalent 2 Release both keys 3 Type the letter you want accented For example to create you would press J J release them both then press e Accent Aigue the accent over the in caf Press cuJ 0 followed by the letter you want accented Accent Grave the accent over the in la mode Press C J CJ followed by the letter you want accented Circumflex the accent over the in moi m me Press 0 actually en Fs 1 followed by the letter you want accented Umlaut the accent over the in No l Press enj followed by the letter you want accented Tilde the accent over the in mafiana Press c EJ followed by the letter you want accented SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Cedilla the accent under the in garcon Press jL followed by either a small c or Capital C You can view a table of available characters in th
303. select a range or the lt CTRL gt key to select individual ones Script Note Commander elect Which Color Notes to View Uncheck All Colors Delete Print Notes Hide in the Script Show in the Script This set will be the main set 229 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC Select Which Color Notes to View This checkbox represents one of the currently available Script Note Colors and you can turn on off the display of all Script Notes of this color in the Window below simply by clicking on this box NOTE When you check or uncheck this colored box you are not affecting the display of those Script Notes within the script itself To do that click the Hide in Script or Show in Script buttons Uncheck All Colors Click this button to turn off the display of all Script Notes Colors in the Window below so that you can easily select Script Notes of only one or two colors without having to manually uncheck all of them Delete Click this button to delete the selected Script Note s from the script Print Notes This button takes you to the Print Notes printing setup window Use this window to choose how the Script Notes are printed Hide in the Script Click this button to hide turn off the display of the selected Script Note s Show in the Script Click this button to show turn on the display of the selected Script Note s Configuration Wizard Takes you to the Configuration Wizard to configure Sc
304. select the entire Group if any e Double Click again to select the entire Scene Right Click Place the cursor on the word sentence element to be selected Right Click the mouse to bring up a Selection Menu If you re using the Windows pop up 80 SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING menus choose the appropriate item If you re using PowerPanel click on the Select button for further choices Mouse Blocking Screenwriter can select text in increments of text characters or of whole words Choose your preference under the File Menu by selecting Program Options then the Mouse button If you check Mouse Selects Text by Whole Words Screenwriter automatically selects entire words when you drag the cursor over them This ensures that you don t accidentally select fragments of words Unchecked Screenwriter selects text one character at a time Keyboard Selection Place the cursor on the word sentence element to be selected Press the key and hold it down Press other movement keys such as an arrow or page down key to highlight the text Release both keys when the desired text s selected Adjusting the Block Selection If you ve selected some text and then realized that you need to block less or more text you don t have to start over Instead 1 Press the key and hold it down 2 Use the Up and Down and Side to Side Arrow keys This will allow you to extend or reduce the selection 3 Release the key De Selecting Text To
305. st half of the existing element or dropped after the existing element if the drop cursor is in the second half of the existing element The existing element remains intact Mouse Selects text by Whole Words If checked the mouse automatically selects entire words when you drag the cursor over them This ensures that you don t accidentally select fragments of words Unchecked the mouse selects text one character at a time Including First Word of Block lIf checked the mouse selects text by whole words regardless of where you start the block selection Unchecked you can start a selection block in the middle of a word for example at the d in production with all subsequent words selected as whole words Hide Mouse Cursor when Typing lIf checked the mouse cursor doesn t display while you re typing Moving the mouse makes it visible again Unchecked the mouse cursor is always visible Move Mouse Cursor to Menu Default Button If checked the mouse cursor automatically moves to the default response button on any Yes No type Menu Doesn t affect Menu screens with multiple options Unchecked the Mouse cursor stays where you left it Single Click Turns Off Block If checked single clicking the mouse anywhere on a highlighted block of text deselects it Unchecked single clicking on a block moves the cursor within the block Right Mouse is PowerPanel or Pop Up Menu Lets you choose what displays when you click the ri
306. t about the item the cursor is currently over To the right of that is the Insert Typeover Button which toggles between Insert and Typeover modes In Insert mode whatever you type is inserted before the cursor In Typeover mode whatever you type writes over the text after the cursor position replacing it Insert mode is in common use in most word processing and screenwriting programs NOTE To enable the Insert Typeover Button Allow Typeover must be checked in the Text Entry Editing area of the Program Options Menu Next to that is Line amp Position information telling you where the cursor is located onscreen To the right of that is the Page Number Button which displays Current Page Number information Click on it to pop up the Goto Page Menu A box on the Goto Page Menu marked Goto Scene Listings appears This displays a list of Scene Headings to go to It can also be displayed by right clicking on the Page Number Button If you re writing a script with Act and Scene Information such as a Sitcom or Stage Play this button displays a list of specific Acts Scenes to go to NOTE The FADE IN Attention Box displayed in the example does not pop up initially when you load the program It can be made to appear by pressing in a completely blank script if QuickType is enabled 16 SCREENWRITER BASIC INFORMATION Opening a Script Under the File Menu select Open Select from the list of available files cha
307. t Color Text Highlight If checked prints color highlighted text in color on color printers and with a grayed background on black amp white printers Unchecked ignores color highlighted text and prints normally 105 TEXT EDITING 106 MOVIE MAGIC Always Compress PrintScript Files If checked PrintScript files are saved in a compressed file format compressed by 20 which prevents someone from hacking the file and extracting your script s text This format is prone to less errors when sending by E mail It also allows you to password protect your PrintScript file The recipient of a compressed PrintScript file must have the current version of the PrintScript program to access the script When printing to PDF prompt user with With this option enabled when you create a PDF Adobe Acrobat file it will ask you whether it should automatically display the Scene Heading Bookmarks and which if any non printing Script Notes should it include With this option NOT enabled it will automatically use the last PDF Printing Options that you had chosen When printing by Scenes print entire pages If checked prints all of the selected Scene s pages This includes the text from the previous scene that begins the first page of the selected Scene and the text from the following scene that continues the page after the selected Scene ends Unchecked prints the selected Scene s text only Text from surrounding scenes does not print
308. t can be branched or jumped to A Branch Target in an Adventure game might be SECRET PASSAGEWAY In an educational CD ROM about Dinosaurs one Branch Target could be FEEDING HABITS OF TRICERATOPS Branch targets are formatted in All Caps underlined boldfaced and have an automatically generated number in the left margin This number is used internally by the program as a reference for branching For example 1 SECRET PASSAGEWAY Branch Points Allow you to jump from the current position in the script to any Branch Target Branch Points can have multiple Branch Targets within them allowing the player to decide where to jump to An adventure game Branch Point might contain three Branch Targets a room with three exits while in an educational CD ROM it might have eight Branch Targets eight possible sub menus from the Main Menu Branch Points are formatted in boldface with each of its Branch Targets on a separate line A triangular pointer to the left of the margin indicates that it s a Branch Point Each line also has the automatically generated reference number of the Branch Target to which it is pointing You don t have to worry about these numbers as Screenwriter maintains them automatically For example a Branch Point in our Dinosaur CD ROM might look like the following FEEDING HABITS OF TRICERATOPS 1 THE PLEISTOCENE OCEAN 2 HIT DINOSAUR MOVIES 4 User Activities L
309. t in your script and moves the cursor to a new Action element NOTE Transitions are an exception Any text that ends with TO is recognized as a transition whether or not the text is in the Transition User List Screenwriter can also recognize abbreviations for text that you use often Typing the first letter or two of a word tells Screenwriter to enter the full text complete with any element formatting margins etc Entering an abbreviation or Alias Text in an element s User List lets Screenwriter know it should auto format that abbreviation using that element s settings As an example you could assign I as the alias text for the Scene Heading Initial Text INT Typing I on a blank line would tell Screenwriter to expand that abbreviation to INT and format the line as a Scene Heading element just as if you d typed INT 57 MOVIE MAGIC The number of items in a User List is determined by Element as follows Element Maximum Items Character Names 15 Initial Scene Text Scene Body Text Locations Time of Day Transitions Act Scene Info Prologue Text Tag Text End of Act Text FADE IN Text Substitution Text User Lists for Character Names amp Scene Body Text Locations are only used to supplement what Screenwriter puts on its pop up menu and uses in Auto Text Recognition Before Screenwriter pops up User List text for Character Name or Scene Body Text it f
310. talized for you Editing Screen amp Movie Magic Screenwriter C AMovie Magic Screenwriter Scripts NONAME1 SCW E File Edit Format Search Goto Spell Production Window Help my2 Y vu o Ss inset w1 posts Potott A The default editing screen has several bars on screen The top most bar is the Main Menu Bar which gives you access to all of the Pull Down Menus Beneath that is the Top SpeedBar with Speed Buttons for frequently used tasks To see what any Speed Button does move the mouse cursor arrow over it A hint explaining its function appears immediately underneath the button Another 15 BASIC INFORMATION MOVIE MAGIC explanation often giving the Quick Key command may also appear on the status bar at the bottom of the screen NOTE You can edit this top Speed Bar with the Top SpeedBar Editor see the Appendix chapter entitled Utility Programs for details At the right of the screen is the Right SpeedBar A Right SpeedBar icon button inserts an element at the cursor position Depending on how you customize Screenwriter the Right SpeedBar can display using any of these methods e Element Buttons above the Vertical scroll bar as in the example shown e Vertical scroll bar only e Not at all To change the way the Right SpeedBar displays go to Display Options under the File Menu Across the bottom of the screen is the Bottom Status Bar On its left side it displays a hin
311. te a new Character Name type it in To enter a Character Name that s already been used in this script 1 Press fre A Pop up list of available Character Names displays 2 Type the first letter of the character s name you want The name becomes highlighted 3 Press Enter The Character Name is entered and a Dialogue element is created To enter an existing Character Name by first letter 1 Type the first letter of the character s name A Pop up list of Character Names starting with that letter displays CST ee SS rs 2 Type enough letters until the name you want is highlighted and press Ene The Character Name is entered and a Dialogue element is created 42 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS 3 To enter a Character Extension press left parenthesis instead of Entes The Character Name is entered and a Character Extension Pop up List displays NOTE To alternate between the Last Two Character Names used preceding the cursor position press ir J Lob For example Paul had a speech then cca Maya Pressing b enters the character name Paul again and creates a dialogue element for him After writing his speech pressing Lh J J again would enter the character name Maya and create a dialogue element for her Alt Key Character Names Character Names can be entered using an Alt key combination From any element in the script press z J the first letter of the Character Name e g 21J 0 fo
312. te place directly under the Scene Heading with whatever Scene Description text you enter This Scene Description text will be tagged as Scene Description for use in all the breakdown functions including breakdown sheets in addition to being printed if you choose Print Scene Heading List on the Print Menu 211 MAIN MENU BAR MOVIE MAGIC 212 Format Menu Edit Script Formats Load Script Format b Save Script Format Edit User Lists Load User Lists from Hide Names in Pop Up List Hide Locations in Pop Up List Cheat Reset Cheated Change Element Type gt Repaginate Now Ctrl A Run SmartCheck Scene Character Lists Mark One Character s Dialogue Edit Script Formats Displays a menu where you can change the way elements are formatted in the currently displayed script and set the default formats for New scripts Load Script Formats Shows a list of available script formats to load Save Script Formats Save the format for the currently displayed script as the default format for one of these available script formats Edit User Lists Displays a menu where you can edit the User Lists and Text Aliases for the currently displayed script and set the defaults for New scripts Load User Lists from Allows you to retrieve User Lists from other Screenwriter scripts ASCII files Collaborator files or Screenwriter s Original Defaults Hide Names in Pop Up List Displays a menu w
313. ted directly to Movie Magic Budgeting There you can assign costs and pay rates and easily produce a complete production Budget using the same breakdown information from your Screenwriter script Breakdown Tagging Mode To start tagging script items for breakdown you need to turn Tagging Mode on Under the Production Menu select Breakdown Tagging then Tagging Mode A checkmark displays next to Tagging Mode indicating that it s on Selecting Tagging Mode also makes Tagging Codes visible To exit Tagging Mode click on it again The checkmark disappears and Tagging Codes are no longer visible Tagging Items With Tagging Mode on select a text item to be tagged an overcoat for example by double clicking on it with the mouse A Breakdown Category screen displays Click on a category to assign the item to for the overcoat Costume is the appropriate category A Format Code is placed around the item displaying an abbreviated code for the Breakdown category for Costume the code CS displays around the item to give ICS overcoat Untagging Items Tagged items can be untagged by SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Placing the cursor directly after the ending Format Code square bracket and pressing s Placing the cursor directly before the beginning Format Code square bracket and pressing siete Undo ing the tagging if no other text editing has been performed since tagging the item Under the Edit Me
314. tegories which appear beneath their respective Headings can be moved by dragging and dropping To move Stunts to the EXTRAS window for example double click on Stunts and drag it over the EXTRAS window Release the mouse button to drop it on the EXTRAS window Stunts appears below Extras You d now want to change the EXTRAS heading to EXTRAS STUNTS or something similar Click OK to accept your changes Cancel to discard them Export to Movie Magic Scheduling Screenwriter can export all your tagged breakdown items for every scene to a Screenwriter Export file with the file extension SEX This file can be imported directly into Movie Magic Scheduling where breakdown information is automatically transferred to Breakdown Sheets and Production Strips enabling you to easily organize a production schedule and print strips for the Production Board To export to Movie Magic Scheduling Under the Production Menu select Breakdown Tagging then Movie Magic Scheduling Export The Export menu displays with a list of all your script s scene headings Choose which scenes to export using these options Selected Scenes Only Click on individual scenes to select them for export and this radio button is checked automatically Only the scenes you select will have breakdown information exported All Scenes Exports breakdown information for all scenes in the script This is the default and the radio button is automatic
315. ter Names sort the list 133 When flipping Multi locked Scene Numbers with double letter text ie 12AA keep the AA text in its non flipped original order rather than flipping it 146 When opening a script start at last saved position 139 When Parsing Locations Only Strip Known Times 133 When Printing Branch Points e the page number of each referenced Branch Target 150 When printing by Scenes print entire pages 106 147 When Printing sides using SELECTED Text then Gray out the Non Selected Text Box 106 148 When Printing sides using SELECTED Text then Print all Non Selected Text that s on the page with selected text in a box witha big X across it 106 When Printing sides using SELECTED Text then Print all Non Selected Text that s on the page with selected text in a box with a big X across it 148 When printing the List of Unique Characters include ALL names in the user list regardless of whether that Character speaks in the script 106 When printing to PDF prompt user with 106 147 white space 95 96 Window Background 152 Window Menu 224 230 Windows 11 INDEX Windows 3 1 248 Windows 95 248 Word Processor format 36 Word Processor mode 235 Word Web 215 Worddos xtd 243 WordPerfect 197 WordPerfect 5 0 201 WordPerfect 5 1 amp 6 x files for DOS and Windows 197 Words 98 Words to Check 216 WordStar for DOS 197 Wordwin xtd 243 Wordwin6 xtd 243
316. the appropriate button for Print Sends the onscreen page to the printer formatted exactly as it looks but at 100 size Prev Goes to the previous page in the script Next Goes to the next page in the script Close Exits the Print Preview screen back to the Print Selection Menu 1 Page Displays one page at a time onscreen 2 Pgs Displays two pages at a time onscreen Setup Page Layout Goes to the Page Layout screen see above displaying your actual script page instead of a Sample Page Zoom In Displays the script page larger onscreen Cycles through 53 93 133 173 213 253 of actual page size Zoom Out Displays the script page smaller onscreen Cycles through 53 93 133 173 213 253 of actual page size SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Fax Click this button to Fax your print selection instead of printing it Only available if you have a Fax Modem installed with appropriate Windows Faxing software Otherwise the button is grayed out and unselectable Setup Options on the Print Menu At the top left corner of the Print Menu is the Setup Menu Click on the word Setup to access these options Printer Select to display the Windows Print Setup window where you can select a printer and change printing options same as Printer Setup under the File Menu Fax Modem Select to display the Fax Modem Setup window where you can select from among installed Fax software print drivers Checking the
317. the user selected from the Voice window Edit Pronunciation Clicking this button displays a window that allows you to alter the pronunciation of the voice that was chosen from the Voice window Based on the word you enter in the blank field the Edit Pronunciation window gives you four choices of what you can do with it Add this word to the dictionary Change the pronunciation of this word Remove this word from the dictionary and Change capitalization or spelling Once you make your choice clicking Next will take you to the next stage of modification The Change the Pronunciation of this word feature is more extensive and allows you to change the way a voice says the word To modify the way a word is pronounced the user would type in a spelling that sounds more like the word or the phonetic symbols Add New Voice Clicking this button allows the user to add a voice You can choose if the new voice is male or female Whichever selection you choose male or female will determine what the default voice this new voice is based on For example if you choose female the voice will default to Mary You can change the default voice by clicking on the Edit Pronunciation button Delete Voice Clicking this button allows the user to delete any voice that he has created Voices that come with the program cannot be deleted Edit Voice Name Clicking this button allows the user to change the name of any voice they have created 125 O
318. though the highlighted item on the displayed list will change as appropriate to whatever matching text you ve typed it will not remove any items from the menu Ignore Initial Space when in Running List When a running list first pops up if you press a space as the first letter you type one of two things can happen e With this option enabled then it will assume that the space was merely a keystroke pressed out of habit and it will be ignored If you WANT to exit this list in this case press the ESC key e With this option NOT enabled it will assume that it was a deliberate keystroke and will exit the running list and type a space into the script at the current cursor position Use the following Dash before Time of Day This drop down list allows you to select the character that Movie Magic Screenwriter should use for Time of Day dashes when it automatically puts in the time of day following a Scene Heading e g INT HOUSE DAY Whatever character you select on this drop down menu will be put in at this position as shown above Note that this selection does NOT affect any existing text merely new text that is put in as part of the automatic time of day entry Startup Files Page Screenwriter can be preset to automatically do one of five things each time it starts up by clicking on one of the following radio buttons Leave You in a Blank Script Opens a new file with the default Screenplay format Display Scree
319. ticals in their assigned Character Name voices Read in Action Voice lIf selected will read Parentheticals in the voice assigned to the Action element MAIN MENU BAR 226 MOVIE MAGIC Load Voice Association File If you have assigned voices to a previous script and saved them you can load the voice association file vaf and use it on your current script Save Voice Association File This option allows you to save your current voice allocation settings Clicking this button saves your voice settings to a voice association file vaf The voices that are assigned to this script can now be used for other scripts Save as Default Voices You can save your current voice associations for use on all your future scripts by clicking this check box Clear All Associations Clicking this button removes all assigned voices to your elements Apply This saves all changes and returns you to your script Cancel This removes all changes and returns you to your script You can assign a voice by double clicking on an element The window below will appear iol x Edit Vocal Characteristics fie Select Voice for Shots Female Voices E Male Voices Edit a Pronunciation Mike in Hall Mike in Space Mike in Stadium 5 Add New Voice am Delete Voice Edit Voice Name R What Is Help Play Sample Retum to Voice Assign The window on the left has voices that are divided into two
320. to select a range or the lt CTRL gt key to select individual ones Colored Checkboxes You can have up to 25 different colors of Script Notes thus allowing you to assign different colors to different categories of note or different people if you re in development or production or working with a partner etc as desired See Script Notes section of Edit user list for more information on changing Script Note colors The colored checkboxes each represents one of the currently available Script Note Colors and you can turn on off the display of all Script Notes of this color in the Window below simply by clicking on this box SCREENWRITER OTHER FEATURES Uncheck All Colors Click this button to turn off the display of all Script Notes Colors in the Window below so that you can easily select Script Notes of only one or two colors without having to manually uncheck all of them The button will now have changed to Select All Colors allowing you to check all colors in the script NOTE When you check or uncheck Script Notes Colors in the Script Note Commander you are not affecting the display of those Script Notes within the script itself To do that click the Hide in Script or Show in Script buttons Delete Click this button to delete the selected Script Note s from the script Hide in the Script Click this button to hide turn off the display of the selected Script Note s Show in script Click this button to show
321. tual numbers of lines in each scene are added then rounded into eighths to give a more accurate total In our previous example the total of the lines from Scenes 5 amp 7 is 89 And 89 divided by 6 is 14 83 8ths or 1 6 83 8ths which rounded upwards comes out to 1 7 8ths Miscellaneous Options List Characters in Each Scene If checked lists all the characters whether they have dialogue or not directly underneath each Scene Heading in the breakdown Listing options are SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Sorted Alphabetically If checked lists characters in each scene alphabetically Script Order If checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they appear Speaking Characters First If checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they speak in that scene followed by character with no dialogue User List Order If checked lists characters in each scene with those from User Lists first then all others alphabetically List Non Speaking Characters If checked gathers the names of non speaking characters from the Action element and uses them in Breakdowns and Movie Magic Scheduling export files NOTE The Breakdown may pick up the name of a Non Speaking Character as being in the Scene even when he s not though the name appears in the Action element Override this error by tagging the name to be ignored Put the cursor immediately before the first letter of the name an
322. turn on the display of the selected Script Note s Print Notes This button takes the user to the Print Notes printing setup window that allows the user to choose how the Script Notes are printed Printing to HP LaserJet 5000 Series PCL 6 on Moviemagic eng_hp_ 5000n Setup Your notes can be printed sequentially with reference page numbers or they can print them on the BACKS ofthe pages which they are facing For itto do the latter you must have first printed out your script EP Re Have termico tolneerbeach Page as needed BrintwithoutPromping requires you to neern entire script When you re Printing Notes on Facing Pages without prompting you MUST insert the script WITH a title page into your printer so that it feeds it in sequential order starting from the Title Page si Color Notes to Print UnSelect All X Cancel 7 Help This menu is also accessed by selecting the Print Menu then selecting the Script Notes radio button and clicking the Fax or OK button Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Select this option to print the script notes that match the selected colors in them in the order in which they appear in the script along with reference page numbers All script notes of the selected colors will be printed regardless of whether they are hidden or not within the script Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed script Select this option to have Movie Magic
323. tus as the next Revision Color draft e g NamePINK 2 Under the Production Menu select Start Next Revision From now on Screenwriter automatically takes you through the steps to get to the next revision When you select Start Next Revision Screenwriter e Removes all Revision Marks e Fixes all A Pages e Locks the Header Text e Advances to the next Revision Draft Color e Displays the Title Page Publisher so you can add the next Revision Draft Color to the Running List and change the Date a Enter YES to have Screenwriter start the automated process b Click on OK at the prompt telling you that all A Pages have been fixed c Click on Yes to advance the Revision Draft Color d Click on OK to go to the Title Page Publisher Manually change the Running List adding the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes 3 Make changes to the script adding and deleting text as necessary Save the file under the same name as needed 4 Issue Revised Pages by printing and distributing them 5 Go back to Step 1 of Start Next Revision Repeat the process for each day s revisions That s the Production Cycle completed 169 PRODUCTION FEATURES MOVIE MAGIC Revision Marks A Revision Mark is a special character usually an asterisk usually appearing in the right margin of a line It signifies that changes have been made to that line If you follow the Production Cycle sequence described above
324. u specify how many Current Revision Marks on a page are acceptable before putting a Revision Mark on the Header also to indicate a revised page Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Mark If checked puts the default asterisk as the Header Revision Mark even when you ve changed the Current Revision Mark to be some other symbol Unchecked the Header gets the same Revision Mark as the rest of your script Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to the right of it If checked puts the Header Revision Mark on its own separate line below the Header Unchecked puts the Header Revision Mark on the Header line at the right Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on them If checked puts an asterisk on the Header of added A pages to indicate that they re new and are considered revisions Unchecked new A pages are identifiable by their page numbering scheme only Auto Update Locked Headers on Revision If checked automatically changes an individual Locked header to the Current revision header when a new revision mark appears on its page Unchecked Locked headers are not updated automatically When printing Screenwriter prompts you to Update the Headers of all pages with revisions on them to the Current header They can also be updated manually by issuing either a Fix Headers or Remove Current Revision Marks command Don t print Revision Marks on each lin
325. u enter Screenwriter assigns the appropriate numbering scheme to the Scene Heading NOTE Overriding a Scene Number may change all subsequent Scene Numbering Check the scene numbers of scenes following the one you ve overridden and renumber them if necessary Fix or Flex A Pages When Screenwriter adds an A Page or B Page etc to a script it puts it in as a flexible A Page If you later add or delete text before the flexible A Page the A Page adjusts its numbering accordingly just like a normal un locked page After pages have been issued you may want existing A Page numbering to become fixed Under the Production Menu select Fix or Flex then Fix All A Pages All Flexible A Pages are converted into Fixed A Pages becoming locked When you add text later the new A Pages generated are Flexible A Pages These can also be locked when necessary Converting A Pages There may be times when you want to pull out a bunch of short A Pages to combine the text or convert an A Page to a Locked Page To Remove a Locked or Fixed A Page Break 178 SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES Put the cursor at the Beginning of the Element following that Page Break Press the backspace key Or under the Edit Menu select Remove Forced Page Screenwriter will display a dialog box that asks Delete this Locked Page Break Choose Yes The page becomes a Flexible A Page To Insert a Locked or Fixed A Page Break in a s
326. u saved Restore Last Workspace opens all files that were open when you last exited Screenwriter displayed in the same way Opening a Timed Backup Screenwriter makes an emergency backup of the currently displayed script at timed intervals This is in addition to the automatic BK backup file created when you save a script and is saved separately To open a Timed Backup file 1 Under the File Menu select Open 2 Change the File Type from Screenwriter Scripts to Timed Backup 3 Select from the list of available TMB files 4 Click on OK to open the file To keep a copy of the TMB version save it under a different name for example if the filename is SAVE2 TMB save it as lt FILENAME gt SCW SCREENWRITER BASIC INFORMATION Saving a Script To save an open file display it onscreen If you have multiple scripts open select the file to display by clicking on its name at the bottom of the Window Menu A checkmark appears next to its name and it becomes the currently displayed file Under the File Menu select a save option Close Exits the script without exiting Screenwriter If you ve made changes without saving it prompts you to save the file only if you have added something to your script If you remove portions of your script and never add anything to it the program will never ask you to save Save Saves your script under its current name or asks for a new name if you haven t already named the file Sa
327. uJ 21 e Hard Return To end a line short and start a new line enter a Hard Return at the cursor position e Under the Edit Menu select Add Hard Return e Or press 21 Eve J Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue There may be occasions when you want two characters Dialogue to appear side by side in the script For example when two characters are speaking at the same time with their dialogue overlapping 52 SCREENWRITER SCRIPT FORMATS Another application is AudioVisual AV format where one column contains the Audio text and the other column contains the Video text While Screenwriter can print Dual Column Dialogue lined up correctly it displays it onscreen sequentially The left column paragraph displays then the right column paragraph and so on To enter Dual Column Dialogue or text 1 10 11 Type the Left column text as you would normally For example create a Character Name element then type the Character Name With the cursor in that element press 1J Control 1 The element is formatted as Character Name L as displayed in the Change Element window Press to go to the next element In the example it is a Dialogue element already formatted as Dialogue L Type the Dialogue Press to go to the next element It is a normal Action element To enter Left column action type the Action text Press cxJ 2J Control 1 Press to go to the next element Itis a normal Action el
328. uation Screenwriter expands it to INT for you and formats the element as Scene Heading Or add the name CAROL ANN to the Character Name User List assigning it an Alias of CA When you type ca followed by a space or appropriate punctuation it s expanded to Carol Ann for you Type CA and the same capitalization is used expanding it to CAROL ANN automatically NOTE To use Aliases for Character Names and Substitution Text you must have the option SpellCheck as you Type amp Edit checked To do this go into the File Menu select Program Options and click on the Spelling button Creating Alias Text 1 Under the Format Menu select Edit User Lists The Edit User Lists screen displays 2 Click on the element button of the User List you want to add to A lettered list of items displays 3 To add a new text item type it into a blank box Click on the Alias button next to the lettered item you want to add an Alias to 4 The Alias Auto Recognition Text screen displays Type the abbreviation for selected User List text using at least 2 characters 5 Click on OK to exit and save the Alias Text Cancel to discard your changes 6 Click on OK to save your changes to the script s User Lists 63 MOVIE MAGIC Capitalization of Alias Text With two exceptions expanded Alias Text takes its capitalization as defined by the Element it belongs in Substitution Text For capitalization
329. up screen where you can change font formatting and font size of the Watermark Watermark Density Determines how dark the gray Watermark text prints from white 0 to black 255 Experiment with the slide bar for best results on your printer Print Gray as Color If checked the use of the Watermark won t slow printing May not work on all printers Graphically Gray If checked prints Watermark text as a gray graphic More reliable though slower and not as smooth looking Print Gray Sample Prints sample pages of the range of gray text available showing each density number printed at its own density Text Angle Sets the angle the Watermark text prints at Can print anywhere from 90 degrees from the horizontal counter clockwise to 90 degrees from the horizontal clockwise in 1 degree increments Letter Spacing Expands the spacing between the letters words of the Watermark text up to 300 for Gray as Color and up to 200 for Graphically Gray 100 is the default Print Name in Lower Right Hand Corner instead of Grayed Centered If checked prints the Watermark information as a right justified page Footer instead of a background behind the script text Require that user fills out REQUESTED BY field when printing If checked asks for the name of the person authorizing the printing of this copy of the script Unchecked no Requested By field is printed Require that user fills our APPROVED BY field when printing
330. urrent script will remain open e Scrap File Creates a new file with the same name as your current document but at the end will have scrap You can find this document by going into the Window menu At the bottom of this menu it lists all the open documents Simply click on your scrap file and the document 19 BASIC INFORMATION MOVIE MAGIC 20 will display If you would like to keep the scrap file simply go to the File menu and click Save Cut to Cuts the selected text removing it from your script and saving it in a new file New File Removes selected information from the original document creates a new file puts the selected information within it and allows you to name the file before the program saves it Screenwriter keeps the original document open To retrieve the new file you must go to File gt Open e Existing File Removes the selected information from the original document and copies it to a script that already exists Choosing this option brings up a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the file that you would like this text to be pasted to Select the file and click open Screenwriter pastes the text to the end of the document and closes the file Your current script will remain open e Scrap File Creates a new file with the same name as your current document but at the end will have scrap The file that it creates will have the same name of your current document but at the end will
331. urrounding scenes does not print but the space it occupied prints as blank lines Ignore Printer resolution when calculating the script s pagination With this option enabled the program will calculate all page breaks and pagination as if you were printing to a 600dpi printer regardless of that actual printer s resolution This will ensure that if you are taking a script among multiple printers that the page breaks will not change With this option NOT enabled the program will use the actual printer s resolution when it gets font heights and so on with the result that the script s pagination may vary from one printer to another When printing the List of Unique Characters include ALL names in the user list regardless of whether that Character speaks in the script With this option enabled when you choose the option Character List All Unique Characters in Script on the Print Menu it will include all names in the Character Name User List regardless as to whether that Character speaks in the script With this option NOT enabled when you choose the option Character List All Unique Characters in Script on the Print Menu it will only include Characters who actually speak 147 CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER MOVIE MAGIC 148 When Printing sides using SELECTED Text then Print all Non Selected Text that s on the page with selected text in a box with a big X across it This option is used only if you have chosen to print Producti
332. using the Save As command Give it a different name to reflect the Date and its status as the next Revision Color draft e g NameBLUE Make changes to the script adding and deleting text as necessary that will appear in the next draft Save the file under the same name as needed As the script is locked Screenwriter does the following e Automatically puts Revision Marks on lines you make changes to e Puts appropriate OMITTED text in the place of omitted Scenes and Pages e Keeps existing Page and Scene numbers the same while adding new ones as A Pages and A Scenes Update the Title Page Under the File Menu select Title Page Publisher Manually change the Running List adding the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes Check the Header Text to make sure it accurately reflects the current Date and Revision Draft Color Save the script using the Save command Issue Revised Pages 1 Print the Revised Pages only a Under the File Menu select Print b Click on the radio button for the displayed Revision Color or click on the radio button for Asterisked Pages if you re not using Revision Colors Screenwriter prints only the pages with Revision Marks and any A Pages immediately following them SCREENWRITER PRODUCTION FEATURES 2 Distribute the revised pages Start Next Revision 1 Save the script using the Save As command Give it a different name to reflect the Date and its sta
333. ve As Goes to the Save As Menu You can change the script name its subdirectory or file format Save All Open Scripts Saves all files you have open if they have changes that need saving Prompts you for save options for each file if needed Exit Closes all scripts and exits Screenwriter Prompts you to save any open scripts with unsaved changes only if you have added something to your script If you remove portions of your script and never add anything to it the program will not prompt you to save Saving Portions of a Script While you re rewriting you may want to cut a scene from your script but not discard it completely Screenwriter lets you save portions of your script to a new file 1 Select the text 2 Under the Edit Menu select either Copy To or Cut To Copy To Copies the selected text leaving it in your script and saving it in a new file e New File Creates a new file puts the selected information within it and allows you to name the file before the program saves it Screenwriter keeps the original document open To retrieve the new file you must go to File gt Open e Existing File Allows you to copy the selected text to a script that already exists Choosing this option brings up a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the file that you would like this text to be pasted to Select the file and click open Screenwriter pastes the text to the end of the document and closes the file Your c
334. w to Partner Disconnect The Top window is the message area where you will see messages from your partner and you as well as occasional system messages The Bottom window is a text entry window where you can type messages to send to your partner ThBUIN style Buttons between the two windows allow you to change the style of the text you send to BOLD Underline Italics and Normal respectively The small window below the text entry window is where you specify your name as it will appear in your partner s Chat windows You can change the name by simply typing a new name in this window All previous names are accessible by clicking on the down arrow to bring up the Pop up menu Send Script Allows you to send the current active script in your program to your partner Your partner will receive a request asking if he wants to accept the script if he does the computer will begin receiving the script During this time you and your partner will not be able to Chat with each other until your partner receives the script Partner will then automatically launch the Show Partner feature from your partner s computer showing you the file that is now on his computer in slave mode see below The script now resides on your partner s computer allowing him to save and print the file Show partner This is different then the Send Script feature since it does not actually transfer the script to your partner s computer Instead it opens a window on
335. when Sentence Ends Only is selected Break After a Single Sentence If checked elements may be broken after a single sentence that only takes up one line doesn t word wrap For Dialogue elements this option only applies to a single sentence directly following the Character Name element Dialogue elements following Parentheticals or second paragraphs of Dialogue may be broken after a single sentence even if this option is not checked Break two One line Sentences If checked elements consisting of only two one line sentences may be broken Unchecked the element is not broken Allow Transition as 1st Line on Page If checked a new page is allowed to start with a Transition element This is unconventional as Transitions are intended to bridge two other elements Unchecked part of the element preceding the Transition is broken to appear at the top of the new page The previous page may have extra blank white space as a result SCREENWRITER CUSTOMIZING SCREENWRITER Allow Transition on CONTINUED line If checked forces a Transition element to fit on the bottom of a page if the next element is Scene Heading or Act Scene Information Only applies when Bottom Scene Continueds are turned on the Transition takes the place of the Bottom Scene Continued Allow Transition on Last Line of Pg If checked this option effects the allowable placement of Transitions In most script formats this option should be selected because few formats
336. which tells the reader that the character is not visible on screen but is nearby somewhere in the scene To enter a Character Extension 1 Press left parenthesis while the cursor is anywhere in a Character Name and a Character Extension Pop up List displays 0 5 4 0 New Extension No Extension Add as Text N evermind Esc 2 Type in the underlined QuickLetter of your selection and it s entered for you For example type v for V O and V O is entered New Extension Displays the Character Extension User List where you can enter text and create a new extension Add as Text Enters whatever you type as a Character Extension without adding it to the User List 3 The cursor moves to a new Dialogue element If you pressed e and the cursor s already gone to a blank Dialogue element press bockspace to return the cursor to the Character Name element Then press left parenthesis Delete a Character Extension With the cursor at the end of a Character Name element press ciete to delete the Character Extension Or with the cursor anywhere in a Character Name element press left parenthesis A Character Extension Pop up List displays Type e for No Extension The cursor moves to the Dialogue element following the Character Name Dialogue A Dialogue element can only be created immediately following a Character Name or its Parenthetical element 1 With the cursor in a Chara
337. wise without prior written consent by Screenplay Systems Inc Trademarks Screenwriter and the Screenwriter Logo are trademarks of Screenplay Systems Incorporated Movie Magic is a registered trademark of Movie Magic Technologies Inc Dramatica is a registered trademark of Screenplay Systems Incorporated SmartCheck SmartTab ZapSave QuickType iPartner Script Note Commander and PrintThing are trademarks of ScriptPerfection Enterprises WordPerfect is a registered trademark of the WordPerfect Corporation Microsoft Word is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Movie Master is a registered trademark of Comprehensive Video Software Scriptware is a registered trademark of Cinovation Inc Collaborator is a registered trademark of Collaborator Systems all others are registered trademarks of their respective holders SCREENWRITER TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents BASIC INFORMATION viii cotissiavticivercctessaiadaitla seeks rsguadecanntecleyigitcardlateetorsaetichunteelesigiadazas 11 WIDOWS ie ese E EIA ee AE ole a OS Ea a S eg Les 11 Selecting Screenwriter Commands ses e e Ne pi r a a eai iet 11 Online Hel o EA S E pad 11 Menus it a i 12 Editing SCHOO tt A et PRES eS eaten ete Ses SEA AA AAA AE 15 Opening a Scripts ssccadsiond irer aeara shes radenesddaees bat n E A AS tagaabstataadessang sla deed 17 Opening Multiple Scripts ooooocccccnccononoonnnnnnnnnonnonononnnnnnnnononnononnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnenanns 17 Opening a P
338. wn The cursor changes from the normal text I Bar to a Flashing Arrow with a page icon at its base the Drag and Drop cursor 4 While holding the Left Mouse Button down drag this block across the page to its new position With the arrow cursor at the place you want the text inserted release the Left Mouse Button The text block moves to the new position Breaking Elements Screenwriter can handle Drag and Drop text placed in the middle of an Element in two different ways Choose your preference under the File Menu by selecting Program Options then clicking on the Mouse button Checking the option Drag n drop should break Elements in middle tells Screenwriter to let Drag and Drop text Break Elements If the cursor is in the middle of an Element when you release the button Screenwriter breaks that Element at the cursor position Dropped text is inserted between the broken Elements Unchecking the option Drag n drop should break Elements in middle tells Screenwriter not to let Drag and Drop text Break Elements If you release the Left Mouse Button while the cursor s in the First half of the Element text is dropped Before the Element If you release the Left Mouse Button while the cursor s in the Last half of the Element text is dropped After the Element Deleting Text The following delete commands remove the selected text from your script without placing it on the Clipboard To un delete text you ve del
339. writer 241 Movie Master 197 Moving a Text Element 24 Moving between Elements 49 Moving Text 81 Moving the Cursor 78 MOW 35 MS Word 197 MS Word 2 0 6 0 and 7 0 for Windows 197 MS Word 5 5 for DOS 197 Multi Lock 223 Multi Lock Character 173 174 175 Multi Locked 172 173 174 Multi Locking Dialogue Numbering 191 Multimedia 36 71 Multimedia 236 Multimedia Demo 77 Multimedia Page 150 Multimedia Run Time Player 241 Multimedia Script 71 Multimedia Interactive 65 Multimedia Interactive format 35 Multiple Revision Marks 188 multi revision mark 188 Murphy Brown 245 murphyb scw 245 N Name Bank 225 Namebank fil 242 New 207 New Act 46 New Branch Points 74 New Extension 44 New File 19 20 New Scene 47 New York Undercover 245 NEWACT 46 62 NEWACT 59 News Radio 245 NEWSCENE 47 59 62 Next Current Revision Mark 188 next speech by 214 NIGHT 62 MOVIE MAGIC No Automatic Character Continueds 157 Non Printing text 209 Non Speaking Character 183 Normal 192 Normal Button 87 Normal Order Forwards 103 Normal Scene 173 Normal WP mode 37 211 Not Page One 99 Not Real Time 144 Note Color 49 161 Note Commander 229 Novel 36 Number of Copies 104 number of lines 96 number of pages 96 Number of Spaces after INT EXT 158 Number Scenes Continuously 160 Numbered Dialogue 191 Numbering Scheme 160 161 Numbers 9
340. x The Undo Level must be set to a number between 1 and 20 to enable the Undo command Setting it to 0 will cause Undo and Redo to not appear on the Edit Menu 4 Click on OK If Screenwriter can undo the changes Undo on the Edit Menu is selectable If Undo is grayed out Screenwriter cannot undo your text editing NOTE For the purposes of Undo each mouse click that you make is considered a text edit The Undo function merely un clicks it which results in no change Setting the Undo Level to a higher number gives you a greater likelihood of being able to reverse a text edit Redo To restore a text edit you ve just Undone 84 SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Under the Edit Menu select Redo Redo can restore only one 1 text editing change Insert Typeover Modes Screenwriter can deal with the typing of new text at the cursor position in two different ways The current mode is displayed on the Bottom Status Bar e Insert mode Inserts new text at the cursor position pushing existing text to the right This is Screenwriter s default mode e Typeover mode New text replaces existing text typing over it To Switch between Insert and Typeover e Press the J key on the keyboard e Or click on the Insert Typeover button on the Bottom Status Bar For Typeover mode to take effect the Allow Typeover option must be enabled To change its status 1 Under the File Menu select Program Options 2 Select t
341. x of lines Enter the maximum number of lines to stretch a page by Accepts values between 1 and 10 with a default of 3 Save as Defaults for All New Scripts If checked all new scripts will have these Page Layout settings as the default Script Font Size You can adjust the size of the printed text from 85 to 115 The initial size of text is chosen in the Format Menu in Edit Script Formats Changing the size will effect how many lines fit on the page SCREENWRITER TEXT EDITING Header Setup To print the same text across the top of each page such as Page Numbers Dates Act Scene Information use Header Text Under the File Menu select Header Setup The Header Setup screen displays Line 1 ES Line 2 Codes Pg Act Info Scene Info Date Rev Color Flush Right Underline Bold Put in Date As C Month Day Year Month Day Year C Day Month Year C Day Month Year Put in Act Information As C 1 Numbers 2 Letters C 3 Words 4 WORDS 5 Roman Numerals Put in Scene Information As C B Numbers C Z Letters C 8 Words 9 WORDS 10 Roman Numerals Print Headers On Not Page One Every Page C Every Page Except first Page of Scene Align Headers Flush Left at Margin 11 5 lt Inches Flush Right at Margin 1 0 Inches Blank Lines Following Header j E Preview Y x Cancel 7 Help Header Text You can have one or two
342. xit the run time player or Uncheck Print Session Exit exits the Run Time Player returning you either to Windows or Screenwriter depending on where you ran the Player from The Display Menu has these options Current Variables If checked displays the Current values of all current variables Variables are displayed in one of two windows at bottom right of the screen 75 76 MOVIE MAGIC Variables which are True Variables which are False These variable lists give you more information about the state of the game and allow you to pre set variables so you can test later sections of the games where you may need to have certain variables set to be true or false Set any Variable by dragging it from the Variables which are True or Variables which are False window to the other window Variables to Be Set Toggles on and off the floating Variables to be Set Window which contains any variables affected by the Current User Activity This is a roll up Window which can be displayed either horizontally or vertically To change the Variables to be Set window display 1 Under the Display Menu select Variables to be Set 2 Right Click anywhere on the floating window 3 Select an option e Roll Up Minimizes the window to its informational header Double clicking on the header accomplishes the same thing and also maximizes it again e Hide Closes the window e Vertical Horizontal Switches between two views of the Will
343. xt Color 211 Change the Pronunciation of this word 125 227 Changing Case 87 CHANGING SCRIPT NOTE COLORS 128 Changing the Level of Locking 177 Character Continueds as 157 Character Extension 43 Character Extensions 136 Character List 102 Character Name 30 42 43 50 51 134 212 214 Character Name in Dialog Action 51 Character Name Options 123 225 Character Name Position 108 190 Character Names 58 60 61 102 156 Character Names 213 Character Names Box on Character Name Entry 136 Character Names without Dialogue 140 Character Set 230 Characters 110 180 Characters 213 CHARMAP EXE 230 Chat Window 117 Cheat 31 151 212 236 Cheat 55 56 Cheat a Page 55 Cheat an Element 54 Cheat Element 236 INDEX Cheat Element Button 85 86 Cheat Page Breaks 55 Cheat Right Margins 55 Cheat the Page s Header 56 Cheat the Whole Script 56 Cheating 54 Cheating 95 Cheats the Right Margin 236 Check Forwards 216 Check Homonyms 216 Check Script 216 CheckBoxes 14 chicaghp scw 244 Chicago Hope 244 Choosing a Script Format 203 Circumflex 88 Cleaning up Imported Scripts 203 Clear All Associations 124 226 Clear File History List 152 Clear Ignore List 217 Clear Out all Alt Ctrl Key Override 148 Clear Out List First 60 Clear Selected 102 clipboard 209 clipboard 210 Close 207 217 236 Coach 244 COLD OPENING 46 62 Collaborator 60 Collab
344. y be broken in the middle of a sentence in order to fit the maximum number of lines on a page Minimum Action Lines on a Page Tells Screenwriter not to break an Action element unless there are at least this number of Action lines both before and after the page break The lower the number entered the less blank white space at the bottom of a page Accepts a number between 1 and 10 with 2 as the default Not used when Sentence Ends Only is selected Break Dialogue Do Not BreakDialogue lIf checked a Dialogue element is never split by a page break Unchecked Dialogue may be broken over the two pages Sentence Ends Only lf checked Dialogue is broken at the end of a sentence or between Dialogue and Parenthetical only Sentence Ends Preferred If checked Dialogue is broken at the end of a sentence if one exists in the 3 lines before the end of where the page break falls If no sentence end is found in the last 3 lines Dialogue may be broken in the middle of a sentence Maximum Lines on Page If checked Dialogue may be broken in the middle of a sentence in order to fit the maximum number of lines on a page Minimum Dialogue Lines on a Page Tells Screenwriter not to break a Dialogue element unless there are at least this number of Dialogue lines both before and after the page break The lower the number entered the less blank white space at the bottom of a page Accepts a number between 1 and 10 with 2 as the default Not used
345. y of the changes made since you sent the script to your partner Using the Voice feature to talk to your partner iPartner allows you and your partner to actually speak to each other via the Internet using a microphone and speaker This feature functions best if both you and your partner are on the same LAN Local Area Network or if you both have T1 Cable or DSL level connections Slower modem connections may produce undesirable results when using the Voice feature In order to enable speaking and listening you must have the microphone and speaker buttons available These buttons are only be available if both you and your partner are on Windows machines running Windows 98 or later with the GSM Audio Compression Code Installed you may need to install Microsoft Netmeeting to get it Speaking To enable speaking to your partner click on the microphone and iPartner will enable your microphone and send anything you say to your partner via Streaming Audio Listening To enable listening to your partner click on the speaker and iPartner will enable your speaker so that you can hear anything your partner says via Streaming Audio iPartner Trouble Shooting Known Issues Problem America Online 5 0 dial up connection Due to bugs in America Online 5 0 version 1 0 it does not correctly share the connection so that other programs can access it Solution Use America Online 4 0 until America Online rectifies this problem Problem Using
346. you to override the header of the page the cursor s on Displays the Header Setup screen for editing of the header text Only available in a Locked Script Page Break Type Allows you to override the type of page break directly before the cursor converting it to your preference Only available in a Locked Script Element s Numbering Allows you to override the numbering of the Scene Header that the cursor s currently in renumbering it to your preference Only available in a Locked Script Breakdown Tagging Shows options for tagging breakdown items to be printed on Breakdown Sheets or exported to Movie Magic Scheduling Tagging Mode Toggles Tagging mode on or off When turned on a checkmark appears next to Tagging Mode on the menu Tagging mode allows you to tag items by double clicking on them then selecting categories from a list Edit Categories Displays a screen where you can change the names or shortcut codes of Breakdown Categories Tag Item Globally Displays a screen allowing you to tag every appearance of an item in your script Untag All Items Removes all Breakdown tagging codes from your script Setup Duplicate Names This Menu allows you to identify alternative names for the same characters such as ABRAHMS and CAPT ABRAHMS being the same character so that the breakdowns and other functions will know not to list them as separate characters Setup Duplicate Locations Like Character Names it is qu

Screenwriter™ - Screenplay.com Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Screenwriter&trade; - Screenplay.com Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Screenwriter™ - Screenplay.com Support